curso civil uca

Module 1

The AutoCAD Civil 3D Interface

This module introduces:

Section 1: AutoCAD Civil 3D Interface•S Product OverviewS AutoCAD Civil 3D WorkspacesV AutoCAD Civil 3D User InterfaceS AutoCAD Civil 3D ToolspaceS AutoCAD Civil 3D PanoramaS Civil 3D Templates - Settings and Styles

Section 1: AutoCAD Civil 3D Interface

1.1 Product Overview.....................................................................1-4

1.2 AutoCAD Civil 3D Workspaces................................................1-5

1.3 AutoCAD Civil 3D User Interface.............................................1-7

1.4 AutoCAD Civil 3D Toolspace.................................................1-12

1.5 AutoCAD Civil 3D Panorama..................................................1-18

1.6 Civil 3D Templates - Settings and Styles..............................1-19Overview of AutoCAD Civil 3D and its User Interface... 1-40Task 1: Set up the practice...................................................... 1-40Task 2: Review the Prospector tab...........................................1-43Task 3: Review the Settings tab................................................1-44Task 4: Review AutoCAD Civil 3D's Dynamic Object Model. 1-50 Task 5: Review AutoCAD Civil 3D's Reports Manager..........................1-52

1.1 Product Overview

AutoCAD® Civil 3D® software supports a wide range of Survey and Civil Engineering tasks. This application creates intelligent relationships between objects so that design changes can be dynamically updated.


• AutoCAD Civil 3D software makes use of dynamic objects for points, alignments, profiles, terrain models, pipe networks, and more. Objects can update when data changes. For example, if an alignment changes, its associated profiles and sections update automatically. Commands can be safely undone in AutoCAD Civil 3D without causing the graphics to become out of date with survey and design data.

• These objects are style-based and dynamic, which streamlines object creation and editing.

• AutoCAD Civil 3D objects (surfaces, alignments, etc.) are often stored directly inside drawing files. The only time they are not is when working with the Autodesk Data Management System (Vault), shortcuts, or a survey database.

• AutoCAD Civil 3D software, unlike AutoCAD® Land Desktop, supports a multiple document interface. This means that more than one drawing file can be open in the same session of AutoCAD Civil 3D at the same time. Users of AutoCAD Land Desktop moving into AutoCAD Civil 3D should be aware that, by default, opening a second drawing does not automatically close any currently open drawings.

• AutoCAD Civil 3D software can be launched by selecting its icon from the desktop or by accessing the command through the Start Bar. Depending on the installed version of AutoCAD Civil 3D software, the icon will indicate Imperial or Metric, as shown in Figure 1-1. Once launched, the AutoCAD Civil 3D application initiates with the standard AutoCAD Civil 3D profile. It is also possible to customize the shortcut to initiate the Civil 3D application to launch with project based setting, this is accomplished by using a custom profile.

fifela-iis&asttiediivsmll..|jmt-ll

Figure 1-1

1.2 AutoCAD Civil 3D

Workspaces

When AutoCAD Civil 3D software is launched for the first time, you are presented with a Welcome Screen dialog box, as shown in Figure 1-2. From here, you can view information about the User Interface, Learning Resources, New Features

© 2011, ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge® 1-15

AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012 Fundamentals

Workshop, and Best Practices. You can also watch the new Getting Started Movies from this screen.

It is recommended that you stay in the Civil 3D Workspace most of the time. As a review, AutoCAD Workspaces are saved groupings of menus, toolbars, palettes, and Dashboard control panels organized as needed for specific tasks. You can edit the stock Workspaces supplied with AutoCAD Civil 3D or create your own. In this material, you work with the Civil 3D Workspace, which includes a complete list of AutoCAD Civil 3D-specific Ribbons, pull-down menus, and tools.

1-20 © 2011, ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge®

Figure 1-2


Workspaces can be changed using the Workspaces switching icon on the Status Bar, located in the lower left corner, as shown in Figure 1-3. They can also be modified using the CUI command.

V Civil 3D2D Drafting & Annotation 3D Modeling Planning and Analysis


Save Current As,., {§}

Workspace Settings.,.

Customize...

Figure 1-3z100

0^


1.3 AutoCAD Civil 3D User Interface

The AutoCAD Civil 3D user interface is shown in Figure 1-4. The numbered areas are described in this topic.

Tkv a mf sawAmnmgn (ipis Tcakt Vfcft

Rl y. OP. Is- '-a # <j 4 ft%-<&■ a

J ' © ■ 1 3 0 V > GT

UwZg - N

1.

Application Menu

2.

Quick Access Toolbar

3.

InfoCenter

4.

Ribbon

5.

Tooltips

6.

Drawing Window

7.

Command Line


•f) "ia £•

• BD'

.on

C:\tJMl 30 P^jwt*,iCm!JDtr4WJnq\

Or«wm«3r»\Gr*dmg C ORvlAHiW) lxhag

LT

car.

1/12/291011JJ30O <.-luor «•*.- U0CC»tS

Cimro* sew- W"

OWS t«* »-«CAO Cm! »

Figure 1-4


8.

Status Bar

| mf [>M

Of**) U1KI

Tj;

© 2011, ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge®


gj] Recent Documents By Orsered List » fj]

^ patis.dwg ^ Basep)anl-3.d\vg Ri topo-

OTHERS.dviS

0

Figure 1-5

Quick Access Toolbar provides access to commonly used commands such as open, save, print, etc. You can add an unlimited number of tools to the Quick Access Toolbar by clicking on the down arrow on the right, as shown in Figure 1-6.

j{o>Civi)30

HomeQ Import Survey D»s Q Parcel -Points • V Feature Line

0 S Q Surfaces - Q Grading • Palettes » Create Ground Data

Master View1 Customize Quick Access Toolbar

✓New✓Open•s Save✓Plot

✓ UndoZi A Vf PIK cCrea-

✓ Redo✓ Workspace Save As... Match Properties Batch

Plot Plot


SBDOpenNew

la

la

as

Save

Application Menu provides access to commands, settings, and documents. With the Application Menu you can: 1) Browse menus available in AutoCAD Civil 3D; 2) Perform a search of menus, menu actions, tooltips, and command prompt text strings; and 3) Browse for recent documents, currently open documents, and commands you recently executed. An example is shown in Figure 1-5.

Save As

Insert Annotate Modify Analyze View

Toolspace


Preview Properties Sheet Set Manager Render^Vore Commands .. J Show Menu Bar Show Below the Ribbon

m

Figure 1-6



3. InfoCenter enables you to quickly search for help. You can specify which Help documents to search, and collapse or expand the search field, as shown in Figure 1-7, to save screen space.

Type a keyword or cnrgss

Figure 1-7

4. Ribbon provides a single, compact location for commands that are relevant to the current task. It contains tools in a series of tabs and panels to reduce clutter in the application and maximize drawing space. Selecting a tab displays a series of panels. The panels contain a variety of tools, grouped by function, as shown in Figure 1-8.

Tab

Paintsi-J'.T.

":W& Surfaces • Palettes » Create Ground Data

jnment • «f» i-tersecticr.s • D

-eature Line • Prof eSa Assembly

Grading - K Corridor ■ §8 <6tkCreate Design »

Figure 1-8

Clicking the drop-down icon expands the panel to display additional tools, as shown in Figure 1-9. Clicking an arrow pointing to the bottom right opens the tools dialog box for additional controls.

odify Analyze View Output Manage Express Tools

qp .ntersections • Assembly * Pipe Network *

Profile & !Create Figure from Object Create Network Parts Jst


e Edit View Geri Command jvjjjrtace; lines'Curves Parcels Grading Alignments Profiler™S=1 i^ortSu^eyLars 1J3 Parte' "

Profile View

Prof* & Section V«ws


Create Subassembly from Polyline Create Full Pars List Create Poiyline From Corridor 0 Set Pipe Network Catalog O Create Boundary From Corridor 0 Part Builder -P

Create DesignFigure 1-9


Q Parcel *

AlignmentFeature Lir.e * V* Profile * Grading *

|Vf Profi Sam Sect

Corncor


' U UAJ;nm«it Geometry Desi^r ■looerrxs' £di:or Cnter-a Hear

^ Surface PrjSt -p Intersectior j\if PrrfteVwt Jfc ComdcrOfise Alignment SaaStancu: |

Kselfv - Launch Pad

Tooltips display the item's name, a short

description, and sometimes a graphic. They provide information about tools, commands,

and drawing objects, as shown in Figure 1-12.

-m

Q

Alig Ge Des


General Tools -

- "3 Pcrts-nouF. SO 0+055.39rr -iS.S?^ Q ES Z 193.205m

Figure 1-11

^ T FT3KO®

G^ Ob*C VMv»«

ACc Acc Renumber laSes * Tabtes • Tegs

- Survey DatabasesPortsroojth survey 1 t Equipment

Databases t Figure Prefix Databases

- El unework Code Sets

Inquiry

You can minimize the Ribbon by clicking on the arrow successively, as shown in Figure 1-10.

I Express Tools SIB

• r Minimize to Tabs« 0 Minimize to

Panel Titlesvs ■ J- <2>

Minimize to Panel Buttons

Views Draw

/ Cycle through AllFigure 1-10

There are two classifications of Ribbons: static and contextual.

Static Ribbons display the most often used tabs, panels, and commands, whereas the contextual Ribbons display the tabs, panels, and commands that are applicable only to the selected object. A Static Ribbon is shown in Figure 1-11.


nment

ometry

igr

Properties *

Editor

Cntena Editor

You can acjust the style, stationing,

design criteria, and superelevation parameters of a seiecte: alignment. You car also view basic infcrmatisr about cronies and profile views tnat have beer creates for the current alignment.

R EditAlignmentProperties . Press F1 for more help

Figure 1-12

Drawing Window is the area of the screen where the drawing displays.


"/-• Surface Profile Intersect (Vf Profile View Ej CorridorAlignment Properties

Edits the parameare that define the alignment object

1

th


7. Command Line is a text window located at the bottom of the screen that shows command prompts and a history of commands, as shown in Figure 1-13. To toggle the command line display, press <Ctrl> + <9> on the keyboard.

I< < ► n \ Model / Layout 1 / Layout2 /"" Current line-width is 0.00€>Specify next point or [Arc/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]:

Command:_______________________________________Figure 1-13

8. Status Bar enables you to change many of AutoCAD's drafting settings, such as snap, grid, and object snap, as shown in Figure 1-14.


Figure 1-14

Pi W371QQU73. 310071.250. 0.000

L_ & □ D z k. += + C 01 +ic

SSlJAnooo-UJ y8|[f|^[J3rJP


1.4 AutoCAD Civil 3D Toolspace

AutoCAD Civil 3D uses a Toolspace to manage objects, settings, and styles. The Toolspace can have up to four tabs: Prospector, Settings, Survey, and Toolbox. Each uses a hierarchical tree interface to manage objects, settings, and styles. Branches in these hierarchical trees are referred to in AutoCAD Civil 3D as "collections". The Toolspace is an interactive data management tool. Right-clicking on a collection or on an individual object provides many commonly used commands in the shortcut menus.

Toolspace operates similar to an AutoCAD tool palette in that it can be resized, set to dock or float, and when floating can be set to auto-hide. The Toolspace is shown docked on the left of Figure 1-15 and floating on the right.

■ft 0

*■ £

s-Q Open Drawings - Q INTRO

Intro

Move Size Close V Allow Docking

Anchor Left < Anchor Right >

C" ............." "N

Auto-hide

Transparency...i——•— i—

Figure 1-15


X

x

I

D

ca

Master View Master View


The Toolspace can be closed by clicking on the X in the upper left or right corner. Once closed, it can be opened by selecting the Home tab > Toolspace on the Ribbon, as shown in Figure 1-16.

Prospector Tab

* Existing Ground®

3 Alignments if ■ 5S Sites r S3 Catchments 30 p'Pe

Networks [jy Corridors* £|l Assemblies ^ Intersections♦ ^ Survey[E] View Frame Groups

Data Shortcuts [C:\Civil 3D ProjectsV.

Surfaces -Ej Alignments ijg Pipe Networks

View Frame Groups Drawing Templates

Figure 1-17The Prospector tab lists the AutoCAD Civil 3D objects present in open drawings as well as other important


E D & 8 © <S) • so • ®C>v

| Home ]

Insert Annotate Modi

mr|r00,SpacelmM

IPalettes "

Jjj Import Survey Data

Points * (£/ Surfaces * Create Ground Data ▼

Figure 1-16

3 Toolspace□ 0

Master View ■v

0- O Open Drawings- G INTRO Introduction

• Points ffi [O] Point Groups i © Point

Clouds 3 Surfaces

3 @


information, as shown in Figure 1-17. Its hierarchical structure dynamically manages and displays objects and their data. As objects are created or deleted, they are removed from the Prospector. A pull-down menu at the top offers the following options:

Active Drawing View displays only the AutoCAD Civil 3D objects present in the active drawing. If you switch to another drawing, the tree is updated to reflect the currently active drawing.

Master View displays a list of all open drawings and their objects, project information, and a list of drawing templates. The name of the active drawing is highlighted.

Each object type (Points, Point Groups, Alignments, Surfaces, etc.) is allotted a collection, and objects present in a drawing are listed below the respective collection.



The bottom of the Prospector tab alternately shows a list view of items in the highlighted collection or a preview of an object selected in the Prospector.

The icon at the top of the Prospector tab controls how items in the Prospector tree are displayed. Icons next to objects give you additional information about the object. A list of common icons is shown below:

a Turns the Toolspace item preview on or off.

□Displays (or closes) the Panorama window. This window only appears if there are vistas to be displayed in the Panorama.

•

?Opens the AutoCAD Civil 3D Help system.

0 Indicates the object is currently locked for editing.

V Indicates the object is referenced by another object. In the Settings tab, this also indicates that a style is in use in the current drawing.

Indicates the object is being referenced from another drawing file (such as through a shortcut or Vault reference).Indicates the object is out of date and needs to be rebuilt, or is violating specified design constraints.

tk Indicates a project object (such as a point or surface) has been modified since it was included in the current drawing.

j Indicates you have modified a project object in your current drawing and those modifications have yet to be updated to the project.



Settings Tab

Imnt AnnuUr Modify Analyze

; Toolspace

A£Bve Drawrq Senngs View

C Drawing?♦

General ±- ^ Point•

© Point Clou

d 3 Q Sur

face

- 12" Surface Styles _No Display B


£3 Import Surve-. Daa Qj Sarcel ■[J Ponc " tJ Mature

LineS Surface! • IjJ

Grading • Palettes w

Crea:e Ground Data -

Toolspace


order OnlyContours lm and 5m (Backgroun-ds Contours lm end 5m (Design)Contours 2m and 10m (Background Contours 2m and 10m (Design) Contours 5m and 25m (Backgrou.. Contours 5m and 25m (Design) ^ Contours and

Tnangles La Eevation Banding (2D) Slope Banding (2D) ■ & Label Styles ? & Table Style; Iti & Commands

Parcel G> Grading

*

—1

Alignment + V Profi

1-20ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge®


le> jvj

Profil

e

View+' ^ SnnwHevuHnn

Figure 1-18

The Settings tab is used to configure how AutoCAD Civil 3D operates and the way AutoCAD Civil 3D objects are displ

ayed and printed, as shown in Figure 1-18. You do not create or modify AutoCAD Civil 3D objects here (use the Prospector and Survey tabs instead); rather, you control how objects are created and how they behav


1cn

i

I


e afterwards.

Different settings are accessed by right-clicking on the name of a drawing file or on one of the collections located inside this tab.

The collections (such as the Surface collection shown in Figure 1-18) can contain object styles, label styles, command settings, and related controls.

Changes to settings affect all lower items in the tree. For



example, assigning an overall text height in the drawing's Edit Label Style Defaults dialog box applies that height to all other settings and styles in the dra

wing. Applying the same setting in the Surface collection's Edit Label Style Defaults only applies the text height to the surface label styles. (Lower items in the tree and styles can be set to override these changes individually



as needed.)

All drawing settings originate from the template used to create an AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing.



Survey Tab

The Survey tab is used to manage survey observations data, as shown in Figure 1-19. Selecting this tab enables you to create a survey database, create a survey network, points, and figures, and import and edit survey observation data.

To toggle the display of the Survey tab, select the Survey Toolspace


Toolspace

0 Impel Survey Data =

D 4? Po.rts • "J F,£j Surfaces • Q G

Palettes w C.-eate Ground Data -fo. ESg tit

Survey Databases E Equipment Databases ^ Sample ell Figure Prefix Databases ^J Sample 9- Eb linework Code Sets E Sample


icon in the top left area of the screen, as shown in Figure 1-20.

g}Civil3D

Insert Annotate Modify Analyze View Oulpi

Figure 1-19


yjv !i|jO]Wj £) Import Survey Data Q Parcel • ^J Alignmei

? Points • Feature Line • Profile •

SurveyOpens cr closes the Survey tab m the Cml 3D Toolspace which i the primary interface for wwfcmg w&h J^vey data

> ^ Survev

m SurveyPress F1 for more help

Figure 1-20


Toolbox Tab

Toolspace&

e?[Q Reports Managet - [D ABgn

ment

[jj Alkgnrnent_Curve []j Alignment D



esign Criteria Veri. General j.egal_Description_fo. Incremental Stationing Report —

[Q PI Station ReportEH

[Q Station_and_Curve * EO Corridor t [□ Par


Refresh


cel$ C Pipe®3

[

Q

Points > C Profile + [[]

Surface t [J] BieaklineReport5 Subscription Extension Manager



6

Miscellaneous Utilities

The Toolbox tab is u

sed to access the Reports Manager and to add custom tools to the AutoCAD Civil 3D Interface, as shown in Figure


E


1-21. The Toolbox can be toggl

ed on and off by selecting the Toolbox icon, as shown in Figure 1-22.

QH"8

The Reports Manager, the only set of tools that appears in the toolbox by default,


Toolspace UPalettes -

Figure 1-22

Stakeout Alignment Report'-1 =


enables you to generate a large variety of survey and design reports. For example, to launch a Stakeout Alignment Report, right-click on it under the Alignments collection and select Execute.

Figure 1-21

The icons in the upper left

area of the Toolbox tab

enable you to:I Open the Edit Report Settings dialog box, where

you can assign settings for all report types. These settings include items such as the name to display in the report.

c*

Open the Toolbox Editor, where you can add custom reports and other tools.



1.5 AutoCAD

Civil 3D

Panorama

AutoCAD Civil 3D includes a multi-purpose grid data viewer called the Panorama. The dialog box is similar to an AutoCAD tool palette in that it can be docked or floating, and set to auto-hide. Each tab in the Panorama is called a Vista. The Panorama can be opened from the

AutoCAD Civil 3D Toolspace using this toggle: , and



can be closed clicking on the X in the upper left or right corner of the window. You can only display the Panorama after launching a command that uses it, such as Edit Points (right-click on a Point Group in the Prospector tab of the Toolspace to access this option). The Panorama can display many different kinds of data, such as point properties, alignment, and profile data, as shown in Figure 1-23.




Port Elevaton Name

Raw Descrpbcn

188.699m

STA 1

194.475m

STA 2

179.966m

STA 3

169.960m

STA 4

192.410m

STA 5

187.876m

STA 6

187.115m

STA 7

180,351m

STA 8

io> n.n,.

cta n

Figure 1-23


The Panorama can also show a special Vista called the event viewer, as shown in Figure 1-24. The event viewer appears when AutoCAD Civil 3D encounters a processing error, such as when surface breaklines cross or a road model passes over the edge of the existing ground surface. When working through a large number of events, clearing all of the old entries through the Action > Clear All Events option in the



Panorama can be helpful.

If a Panorama contains multipl


C G

2 event(s)

Date

Tfne Source

Err5/16/2009

3:20:44 PM Surface dimp

Err

5/16/2009 3:20:44

PM Surface: dunp

Figure 1-24


e Vistas, clicking on the green checkmark closes only the current Vista. To close (hide) the Panorama, click on the X in its mast.



1.6 Civil 3D

Templa

tes-

Setting

s and

Styles

A drawing template (.dwt extension) contains all blocks, Paper Space title sheets, settings, and layers for a new drawing. As with AutoCAD software, a template (.DWT) file in Autodesk Civil 3D software is the source file from which new drawings



acquire its settings, units, layers, blocks, text styles, etc., and therefore, enforces standardization. With Autodesk Civil 3D software, in addition to the AutoCAD components noted, the drawing template is also the source for specific styles and settings. As you learn, Autodesk Civil 3D styles and settings (Feature and Command) have a profound impact on the appearance of objects, labels,



and tables. These styles and settings also act as the primary mechanism that control the behavior and default actions. Selecting the correct template for your intended design and standards needs is a significant component of fully utilizing the benefits that Autodesk Civil 3D software offers. Therefore, it is highly recommended that all styles and setting be setup in the template file



before you use Autodesk Civil 3D on a project.

To use AutoCAD Civil 3D software efficiently and effectively, you need to configure styles and settings to control the object display. All of these styles and settings affect the final delivered product and enable you to deliver a product with consistent quality.

To create a template file, use the Save As command


Drawing Settings in Detail


and in the Save As dialog box, change the File of Type to DWT.

The values in Drawing Settings influence every aspect of the drafting environment. Each tab has values affecting a specific drawing area. For example, layer naming properties, coordinate systems, default precisions, input and output conventions, abbreviations for alignment, volume units, etc. After



implementing AutoCAD Civil 3D software, you need to access only the first two tabs.

To access Drawing Settings, in the Settings tab of Toolspace, select and right-click on the drawing name (at the top), and select Edit Drawing Settings.



Units and Zone

In the Drawing Settings dialog box, the Units and Zone tab, as shown in Figure 1-25, sets the Model Space plotting scale and coordinate zone for the drawing. The scale can be a custom value or selected from a drop-down list. A zone is selected from a drop-down list of worldwide categories and coordinate systems.

A drawing which has been assigned a coordinate system enables points to report their grid coordinates and/or their longitude or latitude. Conversely, when assigning a coordinate system, grid coordinates and Longitude or Latitude data can create points in a drawing.

When plotting from the Model tab, the drawing scale in the upper right corner is the scale you would prefer the drawing to be printed at. When in the Model tab, changing this scale automatically updates all AutoCAD Civil 3D annotations that are


Drawing Settings • SUVl-O-Survey^ —a;- i .-.,-rW

in is aryJ Zcr* jTransformaeon i Object uyere i ■ttbrevwaons Amount Settles jOrAMfig irrts: l"nc>enai to Meinc conversion:

Seaie:

I Meters - Inlemabonai Foot(l Foot • 0.3043 Meters) »

1:1000

Ajv^* urats: Scale objects nserteo from other drawn®s

Custom scale:

•» Set AutoCAD vsf^yes to mat<Ji

1000

ZoneCaterer**: ISA, Catforrw wAvaiabie raordnate systems:f«AD33 Casfarrwi State Piares, Tor* W, Mete-

▼

Selected cowsjrsatr system code: CASi-'/I

Otsore (son:'.AD33 C&hrrn sate Zo^e 11, Mewfrojecton;IM

NAD33

or. cancel Apol,

Figure 1-25


scale-dependent. (AutoCAD Civil 3D annotations are automatically resized for correct plotting in each viewport that displays them based on that viewport's scale.) Changing the drawing scale does not automatically change the Itscale variable, since it assumes that you most often prefer to leave Itscale = 1. If this is not the case, you need to assign this variable manually. Refer to the AutoCAD User Guide if you need more information on variables like Itscale.



You can also set the drawing scale by assigning a different annotation scale in the Status Bar, as shown in Figure 1-26. In layouts you can change either the VP Scale or Annotation Scale and both update.

Transformation

During the life of a project, there can be reasons to change local point coordinates to a coordinate system. The values in the Transformation tab, as shown

in Figure 1-27, transform local coordinates to a State Plan Coordinate system, UTM system, or other defined planar system. Ur»ts end 2ooe 'ransfcxmabor |Ct>jtctUyers Atore.-jtKjos |

Amtaen! Se«ngs

lor* omrvbon: NA0it3C««brni»Satr Pton«. Zone VI, Meter

•/ Apply u-anarfo<->\ settings J Aopiy sea level scaJe factor SevaJwn:7Q0m (Meters; {Meters) Ur»ty

Refer em* oer't


Annotation Scale

JC§}|d

Figure 1-26

Drawing Settings - SWl~C2-$u

Or*! Scale Forty

Compulafcon;


^ _ L Cance

Figure 1-27


P^nunnijerLoeat Nflrlhnj

On

leeafEastrs

Q»

GBdNerthno

Cm

GrxJEastms

Cw

a Soeofy grid rotation angle To north: Ajvnutf::0 60 £ 0(d}

^orit nurr^ber.ocal Qir.ocal Eassrx; &rGrid Not fang &rGnj EasingOn-.

T 12cme ir>B are r. r>€TEft.

Apply He*>


Object Layers

The Object Layers tab, as shown in Figure 1-28, assigns layer names to AutoCAD Civil 3D objects. A modifier, which can be a prefix or a suffix, is associated with each layer's name. The value of the modifier can be anything that is typed into its Value field. Traditionally, the value is an * (asterisk) with a separator (a dash or underscore). AutoCAD Civil 3D software replaces the asterisk with the name of the object of the same type. For example, the base surface layer name is C-TOPO and a suffix modifier of -* (a dash followed by an asterisk). When a surface named Existing is created, it is placed on the layer C-TOPO-EXISTING, and when a surface named Base is created it is placed on the layer C-TOPO-BASE.

The last column of the Object Layers tab enables you to lock the values. When a value is locked at this level, AutoCAD Civil 3D software does not permit it to be changed by any lower style or setting.


Figure 1-28


To change the listed object layers, double-click on a layer name. In the Layer Selection dialog box, as shown in Figure 1-29, select the layer from the list. If the layer does not exist, click the New button in the Layer Selection dialog box. This opens a second dialog box, where you define a new layer for the object type.

^ J < . : ~ mrnUimi

Layer wrce:__________ _______ jC.t/ri»Projectt£rviSX«ig'M\Dr«n*iesi: - .




Uyns-layer Col

orlawtvoe

=»«! Style

not

0 CftMM

Detail

Color..?

(a

A«HC Ccr-truow

3efaur

cmorj>

res

A«06«>RT

Q

«»Kr

Conbnueus

OtltJt

Color.?

res

i&DG-Sm

Q«hSe

Cotvomout

Defadt

Color 7

«

i-etx Qn»«se

ConSrtjous

SeCaJ!

Color .7

res

CorsWwws

OefaUt

Wor.7

*es

A-Prooertv

Corstwaeus

Srtauft

Color.?

vtt

A-Propeety-E*»tnc

Cirafwx:

DelaJt

Color.:

Yes

A-»rooertr-?uts/e

□ 253

Detaft

Color.253

res

iSBBHMHHHBe.Aj«o+ro«

DASME)

0*«*i*

COW,?

«o

Cytruout

0»ta«

Celor_7

res

c-Afno-wroTErr

□ 150

Continuous

setae

Color.ISO

res

C*TOT«i

ConSngous

Color.!

r i -<—«

*

i>;

(

;__CK Caned ntt>


Figure 1-29

Abbreviations

The Abbreviations tab, as shown in Figure 1-30, sets standard values for reports referencing alignment or profile data. Some entries in this panel have text format strings that define how the values associated with the abbreviation display in a label.

i Drwmg Settings

fr-----—■>■—"

unucrO Jane |7rar«toei4l]On | £»)«« layers

AMeev-j'jsrtt |4nfeent Setongs |

1 P'Cperty value*

I 0 General Text

Infinity INFINITY tleft LRight R

13 Alignment Geometry Point leal

Station Increawng

Increasing

Station Equation Decreasing

Oecreawng

CuneMtd Point

Mia

Re.ers« Curve-Curve Intersect

PRC

Tangtnt-Spual Intersect

IS

Spiral-Tangent Interned

ST

Cur.eSp.ial Intersect

cs

jpnil Cur.e Intersect

sc

Spiral-Spiral Intersect

ss

Reverse Spital

SP1



InterjectAlignment End

EP

Alignment Beginning

BP

* T . ^ m<* Cancel Ko,

Figure 1-30



Ambient Settings

In the Ambient Settings tab, as shown in Figure 1-31, the values influence prompting and reports. For example, the Direction section affects the prompting for direction input: Decimal Degrees, Degrees Minutes and Seconds (with or without spaces), or Decimal Degrees Minutes and Seconds. Any value set at this level affects everything (labels and commands) in the drawing.

^ Drawing Setting? - SUV1-C2-S

Unis and Zone Transformation | Object Layers j Abbreviations Amber*. Se'.tngs

Property sOOerveralPIctted Unit Display T..Set AutoCAD Units Save Command Chan... Show Event Viewer Show 7ochip5Imperi -1 te Me-1 c con . New Entity Tocltip State On Driving Direction

Right Side of the...Dr awing Untt Drawing Scale 5c a«e Inserted Objects Independent Layer Onml Ni _k. mrnm .

Cancel

Figure 1-31


Override Child OverrideLcck

Value

decimalmYes Yes YesUse Uwernationa,.

&

meterimo mYes

ApCvcx He*>


Edit Label Style Defaults

The values assigned in the Edit Label Style Defaults dialog box, as shown in Figure 1-32, control text style, plan orientation, and the basic behavior of label styles. Like Feature Settings, this dialog box is available at the drawing level and at the level of individual objects. Editing Label Style defaults at the drawing level affects all label styles in the drawing. Editing them at the object level (such as surfaces) affects only that object's labels.

Jfc, Edit Ubri Style Defaults -

PropertyText Style Label Visibility Layer E BehaviorOrientation Refeience Forced Insertion Forte Inside

Curve Q Plan Readability Plan Readable Readability 6ias Ffop Anchors *ith Text ft' Components S LeaderS Dragged State Compone—

Z

Cancel

Figure 1-32

In the Label, Behavior, and Plan Readability sections, the values affect the overall visibility of labels, their default text style, label orientation, and the rotation angle that affects plan readability.

The values in the Components, Leader and Dragged State Components sections affect the default text height for the label, colors for the text, leader, surrounding box, and type of leader. There are also several settings defining what


Override Child Overnde

AV

Q £ £AA

LockValue Standard True 0

ObjectNoneNone

True110.0003false

a a

aQ

a a a

OK Apply He*


happens to a label when you drag it from its original position.



Edit Autodesk LandXML Settings

The LandXML Settings dialog box, as shown in Figure 1-33, provides settings that govern how Autodesk LandXML data is imported and exported from AutoCAD Civil 3D application. Autodesk LandXML is a universal format for storing Surveying and Civil Engineering data that enables you to transfer points, terrain models, alignments, and more between different software platforms. For more information please see www.landxml.org and the AutoCAD Civil 3D Help system. This dialog box can be opened by right-clicking on the Drawing Name in the Settings tab and selecting Edit LandXMLSettings.

LandXML Settiogi • SUV1-C2-S

iwt

Property S Translation S Rotation Rotate ftnglt Direction B Point Import Settings

Point Description E Surface Import Setting* S3 Pipe Network Import Settings !■) Conflict Resolution Settings S Default Diameter Units © Alignment Import Settings

a*

Cancel

Figure 1-33


Value

OH

OOWO (d) count*!

rlockv isi

use'code then desc

Apply He©

OK

http://www.landxml.org/


Feature Settings

In Settings, each object type collection has an Edit Feature Settings dialog box, as shown for Surface in Figure 1-34. Its main function is to assign naming values, initial Object and Label styles, and overriding the values found in Edit Drawing Settings for that object type. Access the feature settings by right-clicking on the object tree in the Settings tab and selecting Edit Feature Settings.

Jjk Edit Feature Setting? - Sur

Property Value EjQlabeSng 13 LJ Time B ^Default Style*

Surf nee Default Styfe C ontours 2m an.„ Marker StyleSurface Spot Elevation ... E'evation Onfy Surface Slope label Style PercentRender Material ByLayer Bf'/Contour Labeling Def_

Display Contour Label...TrueLabel Mask Type From Label StyleSurface Contour Label... Existing Major La-Surface Contour Label Existing Minor L~.Surface Contour Label •• Existing Major La...

Cancel


Override Child OverrideLcck

i■C1-A

a a a a a

A

Jl A

a aa

OK

He©A«*y


Figure 1-34



Command Settings

Similar to feature settings, in the Edit Command Settings dialog box, as shown in Figure 1-35, you can set the default object and label styles used when creating objects with a specific command. Each object type contains a unique set of commands. Typical values in these dialog boxes include the name format (surface 1, parcel 1, etc.), design criteria (minimum area, frontage, length of vertical curve, minimum horizontal curve), etc. To open the dialog box, expand a collection in Settings until the commands are visible. Right-click on a command you want to assign default settings to and select Edit Command Settings.

Figure 1-35

Advanced Tip: Style and Setting Overrides

In the Edit Label Style Defaults, Feature Settings and similar dialog boxes, a downward pointing arrow in the Child Override column indicates that a setting or style lower in the settings tree has a different value than the one shown. Clicking on that arrow (which creates a red 'x' over the icon) and clicking OK removes the variant settings and makes all lower settings and styles match those assigned in the dialog box. This can be a quick way of standardizing multiple settings dialog boxes and styles at once.


Property ValueaDCfenl

SOlabcfingsQTime

SSL Surface Creation S?_ BuHd Optiom 0ti>DeUuH S»yt«Suffice Ddnutt Style Contours 2m in Marker Style

Surface Spot Ele.-ation ... Elevation Onty Surface Slope Label Style Percent Render Materia! 6) L«/er

3 L .'Contour Labeling De»_Oiiplay Contour label... True

label Mask type From Label Style


For example, in the Surface Label Style defaults window, as shown in Figure 1-36, some surface label styles are assigned a layer other than 0 and a visibility of false, since an arrow is present in the Child Override column. Since an arrow is not shown for the Text Style property all surface label styles are using a text style of Standard.

21 Edit Label Style Defaults Sarface

frosty tfnur OvtrraJe CMdOvenaJe lock- label

Tent Jtyte Sar«Mrd "1 y—■>.%»ue ( } J %Layer 0- Behavior

- Pian HratiaMrtr

The Override column indicates whether a value in this window is overriding a higher settings dialog box. Clicking on the lock icon prevents you from changing that value in a lower settings dialog box or style.

Styles are preconfigured groups of settings specific to an individual object type or label that make the objects print the way you want them to print. For example, in the list of surface styles shown in Figure 1-37, each surface style is configured differently to display different features, such as contours at different intervals and on the right layers. The display of a terrain model could be changed by swapping one surface style for another. Styles enable an organization to standardize the look of their graphics by providing pre-configured groupings of display settings.

Gb Surface Styles (ja _No Display Ca Border Only

Contours lmand..

Contours lm and..

Contours


Styles

Slope Banding (2D)


2m and .. Contours 2m and .. Contours 5m ... (jtj

Contours 5m and ..

(jt) Contours arid Tra..

C^g Elevation Banding .&____

ts> Label Styles m

(2» Table Styles

^TparceT

Figure 1-37


o

Figure 1-36


The two categories of styles you work with most often are Object Styles and Label Styles. Some objects have table styles as well. Object styles control how AutoCAD Civil 3D objects (points, surfaces, alignments, etc.) are displayed. They control which components are visible, which layers they display on, and many other settings. Label Styles are similar except that they control the text and other annotations associated with the objects.

For example, an alignment object style specifies many settings including what layers to draw tangents and curve segments on (which might be different) and symbols to add at certain points as required (like a triangle at the PI point). Alignment label styles include major and minor station labels, the display of station equations, design speeds, and similar annotation. By separating object and label styles, you are able to mix and match the right combination for a specific object.

Styles are the lowest items in the Settings tree and are typically dependent on other settings above them. If a style is given a unique setting, different from feature settings or label style defaults (such as a different text height), then that style is considered to have an override.

Styles in Depth

Styles are central to AutoCAD Civil 3D. Their flexibility enables an Office or Company to create a unique 'look' for their drawings. By changing the assigned style, you can change the composition of a profile view as shown in Figure 1-38.

uHeHHHHHuiK. ®HBHSBiHHnK< Figure 1-38



In the Settings tab of Toolspace, an object type branch identifies each style type and lists its styles below each heading. An example is shown in Figure 1-39.

O EEACTve Drains Settings V*w

SurfaceSurface Styfes

.No Otsplay Bolder Only (jfe Contours lm and Sm (Background) (ji" Contours lm and 5m (Dessgn) Ijjf ' Contours 2m and 10m (Background; Ci£'' Contours 2m and 10m (Design; Cjg Ceritours 5m and 25m <Backg«eundl tjj Contours 5m and 25m (Oesign)

Contours and Triangle*. Uj, Elevation Bandinj (20)Slope Banding (2D) Q Standard & Label Styles

fr E& Contour —- B Slope• B Spot Elevation ;• B Watershed

1 B Table Styles' B Oitection• & Elevation• Br Slope ' & Slope Aitoa• B Contour

Name Description Created by D«t<I ....No Display TumsoflatlsurfaAutcde-.lt 5/22

Figure 1-39

Object Styles

Object Styles stylize an object's data for display. To edit a style, in the Settings tab, right-click on the style and then select Edit. Most of the work for all object styles will be done on the Display tab. For certain objects, other tabs might be required to be modified.


ra


For example, in the Surface Style dialog box, the Display tab enables you to turn on or off triangles, borders, contours, and other items as well as define the layer, color, linetype, etc. that are assigned to them, as shown in Figure 1-40. The Contours tab sets the contour interval, smoothing, and other settings, as shown in Figure 1-41.

jLSu^Styfc-Co^jmi ____________________________________________

InformaSon j Borders I Context Gr<i Pons |Tnansl« '.Valersheds | A/%»ly*s DwcVa. ! Summary :

Drrtfccr:

CTtW*...

vaasie

Coior

Lmetype

IT Sca»

L»*Aeiont

Plot Style

9 c-mri

HsrurK

Sysayc

'.-0000

ByLaye-

ey©os»

Triangles

9 C-TWI-VKW

1.0000

Bylave

3<&*y.

Svder

¥

□ Sn.AYER

Sparer

J.0000

Syt-ayer

StCw

Contotr

fa 4 C-

TOPO-MA...

□ BYlAYfR

Bviavw

10000

Bylaye?

Mnor Contax

V C-TOPO+C...

□ EfLA*»R

SyLayer

i.oooo Bylayer

jser Conttxxi

f C-TOOO-CSER □r<U,'3t

Svt-ayes

1.0000

Bilayer

BySSoft

Graded

t c-nw Svlaver

U»00

Bytaver

8y®ci£»

>erto»

9 ■ 1.0000

Bycaye

ByBo



« r ckSevatxns

9 § SyeosSi

1.0000

Bytayer

Svfltocfc.

Scees

9 0 By®**

s.oooo

ByLaye-

9>®«4

OK

wtst&f ■

Figure 1-41


Figure 1-40

InfgntaSor (Borders Contours (find ;ft*rts |Tr.ong*s j .'.atersheds j Anaiy» jCwptay jixnmar,

Value

0.000m 1.000m 5.000m

PropertiesB

Contour Intervak

Base Elevation

Minor Internal

Major Interval (3

Contour Depressi

ons El Contour Smoothi

ngww

Cwoia* _ !■ Cor*-tnuous

"flajor otscteiConfinuows

'M^ber

Consxx sm»[*n


From the default AutoCAD Civil 3D template, the respective Parcel Style dialog box for Property, Open Space, or Single Family, as shown in Figure 1—42, define how each displays their segments and hatching by assigning different layers for the components. Rarely other tabs are used for the Parcel styles.

P»ol Stytr - Opm;r V-jwi j | iecw

LW). ijerjr, |

Ve* C* VflKT'V4T "tvw'tw vtSCW*Craw »*«r

Uhrc«cns«,c-mmv.,

gtru

'VA' f ' Type

Pwcci Uta

DJ** Vijc

Compqne-i •pawn

»«rrri Arm N

An object style represents a specific task, view, type, or stage in a process. For example, a surface style for developing a surface, reviewing surface properties, or documenting surface elevations as contours for a submission. For Parcels, styles represent a type like open space, commercial, easement, single family, etc. One style can cause an object to look different in various views. For instance, you might want to see both the point and the label in the plan view but only the point marker in


C<w

^ S«««l 5lyir -[ ;«<r j iecS*1 >SM.•

Figure 1-42

:«gr : Jti-xr C«SM.

Wli' torov i-itft

'trailer*!*

,

irrxnrr- Jrnv CM"***** . v so<WmH .

Urt- Cwc-«*o«H?m. ps-x*-C-l*C*HOT5 Jfffi.*-

tWTPomm! «CU i

»: r i.'r-


a model (3D view). As shown in Figure 1-43, there are four view directions to consider when creating an object style.


Infornvabor. Hmxer 3D Geometry Oepiav Sunrtfy j

vev. Drectrar

Figure 1-43

Color

■TREE □SLAYER .abe vv*OOe-TR£...

HWIAXB


Label Styles

Label styles produce annotation of critical values from existing conditions or a design solution. A label annotates a contour's elevations, a parcel's number and area, a horizontal geometry point's station on an alignment, etc.

A label style can have text, vectors, and AutoCAD blocks as well as reference text. The content of a label depends on the selected object's components or properties. For instance, a Line label can annotate bearing, distance, and coordinates, and use a direction arrow. A Parcel Area label can contain a parcel's area, perimeter, address, and other pertinent values. A surface label can include a spot elevation and reference for an alignment's station and offset.

• To access the values of a label style, in Settings, select the style, right-click on its name, and select Edit.

• A style's initial values come from Edit Label Style Defaults and the style's definition.

• All labels use the same interface.• The object properties available for each label vary by object type.

Each label style uses the same tabbed dialog box. The Information tab describes the style and who defined and last modified its contents. The values of the General tab affect all occurrences of the label in a drawing. For example, if Visibility is set to False, all labels of this style are hidden in the drawing. Other settings affect the label's text style, initial orientation, and reaction to a rotated view.

The Layout tab lists all of a label's components. A label component can be text, line, block, or tick. The Component name drop-down list, as shown in Figure 1-44, contains all of the defined components for the style. When selecting a



component name from the drop-down list, the panel displays information about the component's anchoring, justification, format, and border.



Lob*; Styie CZnhwmatar, j Central Lire*.- jorawed iSnnnwry |

Component narw:

TatwTayNameVisibility Used inAnther Component An<hot Pomt ) Direction Arrow Anvw Head Style A<ro* Head Size Rotation Angle fired Length Length X Offset V OWiet I r«io»

cancelAoor

Figure 1-44

When defining a new text component, you assign it an object property by clicking the ellipsis button for Contents. This opens the Text Component Editor dialog box, as shown in Figure 1^45. The Properties drop-down list displays the available object properties. The number and types of properties varies by object type. For example, a parcel area label has more and


Lneutod Style

Dneiticn Ariov. TrueLabel Mode"Feat)ire>Label Lccabon s

Closed titled 3.00mm 0MM id. true 9Mmm MOnwi 6Mmm n rtvi ivtp


different properties than a line label does. Once a property is selected, units, precision, and other settings can be set to display the property correctly within the label. The arrow button next to Properties places the property in the label layout area to the right.

Jfr, Ube* Styti Cornea*" S«*ftflg *rva OaunceInforr^Ujn |0«ner# UrPut| StJimcry |Corcconen ncmc*

________ • a . - s *

Property B GeneralUameVi«M*y Utedtr

Amhcf C cmponmt Anchor B1«iContents Terf Htsghlit&K^mert

XOdMt * Off 5*1

fvmti Modern*

CanusAnn

Figure 1-45


c'le-e-;

&tann«j Iruel»t>«l Mcde «ff*Jutr>

labtl lOCftttO*

0W00 <d) Sottcm «nttt OMwr O.rimm■ muye*

vMim

\ 1 - I ^ ' * IBL.o m

R<?UTKJ»T«9

'cwuivv&tmtl

Ofs'tmtf <K«'«<!rr

grouping ivmbo

ccmmi ,

D*gst g»cup«fvg

imssm

IrWtTetl...

<K


The values of the Dragged State tab define a label's behavior when dragged to a new location in the drawing.

The key to making the label look the way you want it to look when it is not in the dragged state, is to line up the Anchor Point of the component with the Attachment option for the text. Each has nine options to select from. The options are shown in Figure 1-46.

JK§8§ §TE§<1§ dot)

Figure 1-46

Lining up the square hatched Anchor Point with the circular hatched attachment option results in the text centered above the object similar to the bearing distance label, as shown in Figure 1-47.



Figure 1-47



A drawing template (.dwt extension) contains all blocks, Paper Space title sheets, settings, layers, Civil 3D styles and content-specific settings for a new drawing.

Creating Template Files

To use AutoCAD Civil 3D program efficiently and effectively, you need to configure styles and settings to control the object display. All of these styles and settings affect the final delivered product and enable you to deliver a product with consistent quality. Once all the styles required for a set of drawings are created, saving the file as a template enables you to use the same styles over and over on each project they work on. To create a template file, use the Save As command and in the Save As dialog box, change the File of Type to DWT. After giving it a name, the Template Options dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 1—48. It enables you to give it a description, set the measurement units, and save new layers as either reconciled or unreconciled.


Templates

M

VMeASurcnv€rt 1 Metric

New layw Noutcacer » Save aJ layen w inreccroW Save al layen as reco^oled

Help

Templat

e

Options

Devcnobcn

Figure 1-48

Once an AutoCAD Civil 3D style is created, it can be transferred between drawings and templates by selecting the style and dragging it to the required file. When dragging a style to a drawing, any associated style layers also transfer.


The method of transferring styles is to use the Styles commands located in the Manage tab, Styles panel. There are two commands Import and Purge, as shown in Figure 1-49.

Figure 1-49

Import styles

The Import styles command prompts you for a source drawing from which to import the styles into the current drawing. The Import Civil 3D Styles dialog box displays as shown in Figure 1-50. It lists the styles that are available for import and also displays the style differences between the source and the current drawing. Each style collection lists three subcategories, styles to be added, styles to be deleted, and styles to be updated.

ft. Import Civil 3D

Styles Sauce Drawng or Terolate

CUsers .ya-risrAaoOa'-aioca 'iAu*odeskv3P 20irlenuv>npiat£1 Ef qj gj lj gf un

S L General3 0 Multipuipose Styles HI Marker Style

3 Tc beaded

It □ Tc be de.eted - 5 Tc be


line Add-im Express Tools

Applications »CAD Standards Action Recorder ■

|

Import Purge

H Run Script Eg Layer Translator ■Ujf V isual USP Editor V'Check______n j ILoad Record -------ses Application Configure


upoated 1 □ Feature Line Styles

Figure 1-50


B


Purge styles

The Purge styles command enables you to purge all selected unused styles within a drawing. However, you might have to run this command more than once as there might be some styles that are used as parents to other styles. The purging information is displayed in the Style Purge Confirmation dialog box, as shown in Figure 1-51. The Command line will notify you when there are no unused styles in the drawing.

'jfc, Style Purge <

air tfir sSriei Plat ivr unused n the : jre«i! drawing. RemOVi- the chfct Tart: frcxr any styes vou do not wsh to se aroed

r*jte rat po-ono dud stytes nay "race more styes becon-e uiuses. Run this onmvsnd oqom to rsut ttia! ai .jmne-i s'yire have ber-i pj-geet.

StylesV*kinment Design Chedc

set'east: [7] StytesVMcnmcm

DCSKT Cheer: setCubdvtson 0 Styles'yikTuncnt _aocl SetWajor "Intr H 4V Geonctr v Ponts . [5] Styles VWicnmcnt -aocl Setftejor ?4ncr and Gcooetry Pcrnc |§3StitteVtf*jnn*nt Label Se:W>w and Hoar ortv gJStvtes'VUoirrent .abel Set\J*s .abels 0 Styles'Code Set Stv lc ySl Codes wti" -atchnc 0 Styles'Code Set Style W Codes wT No Shadng SStvles'Code Set Style Codes With Labels 0 Styles Code SetStyMyie* Edit wth ^-adr-g



209 o^t o' K9

Figure 1-51


OK Cancel Net


Overview of AutoCAD Civil 3D and its User Interface

In this practice you will become familiar with AutoCAD Civil 3D's capabilities and learn about its interface.

Task 1 - Set up the practice.

&Jdouble-clicking on the desktop icon PK3 (AutoCAD Civil 3D).

If presented with the Welcome Screen window, click ^ to close it.

In the Status Bar, confirm that Civil 3D is the active Workspace. The Workspace icon is located in both the Status Bar to the right, as well as in the Quick Access toolbar at the top left of the window, as shown in Figure 1-52.

o"& a Q Oa - <jo}Gvil3DHomeInsert Annotate Modify Analyze View Ou

Figure 1-52

Select the Home tab and ensure that the Layers panel is displayed. If it is not, right-click anywhere on the Ribbon and select Layers, as shown in Figure 1-53.

^tpe Network - >J Sector, Views ♦ ^J * CDr»

. .— s^ofiie & Section Views

Tabs ►

% & % yUnsavec Layer State


Practice 1a

3.


Layers »•


Panels* * Palettes</ Create Ground Data

* Create Desigr

v Profile & Secior Views w" Draw

Figure 1-53


4. If a blank drawing is open (Drawingl .dwg), close the current

default drawing by selecting the Application Menu H > Close.

5. Open an existing drawing by selecting the Application Menu

> Open and browse for INTRO-lntroduction.dwg in one of

the following folders:

Metric:C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-M\Drawings\lnterface Imperial:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training'l\Drawings\lnterface

You can add a shortcut to the folder in the bar on the left side of the dialog box. In future, this enables you to quickly access to the class folder when in the Open dialog box. Select the Application

Menu £■£ > Open again. In the Select File dialog box go up one

level ES to the C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-M\Drawings or C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-l\Drawings folder. Select the tools command and in the drop down list, select Add Current Folder to Places in the Tools drop-down list, as shown in Figure 1-54.

Add/Modify FTP Locations ^Add Current Folder to Place^Add to Favorites

T


<=■ s en x e3 \fcws

Preview

Select File

Drawings

NameAlign

ments Corrid

ors I Gradin

g J Interfa

ce i Parcel

sPineNptwnrlr*


Figure 1-54

7. Close the Open dialog box by clicking Cancel. When prompted to save the changes to your Places List, click Yes.



8. Locate the Civil 3D Toolspace, as shown in Figure 1-55, which by default displays docked to the left side of your screen. If you cannot find it, select Home > Toolspace. This command is useful to remember if you ever close the Toolspace accidentally.

I Toolspacem

i Actve Drawing ViewQ INTRO-lntroduction

• <§> Points $;'[❖] Point Groups i Point Clouds fcf Surfaces tf "13 Alignments B gj] Sites

E3 Catchments PlPe

Networks

nnFigure 1-55

9. Save the drawing as Example 1 .dwg. Select Application Menu

, click in the Search field and type save, as shown in Figure 1-56. Select Save As, type in Example 1 in the File Name field and click Save.


ED

CL


AutoCAD Drawing [3

El AutoCAD Drawing Tenplate I3

Q AutoCAD Drawing Standards I3

EJ Other formats...

Ex per :o AutoCAD 2010 Exoor. :o

AutoCAD 2007 Exoor: 10 AUTOCAD 2004

[H. Expor. TO AutoCAD 2000Figure 1-56


fceiated Results

4saacstert 'ftsr„j

EJ Save As-•• ■ : 'w»5 Ssve > iSve -ajour."Vsi • y


Task 2 - Review the Prospector tab.

In this task, you will explore the tabs in the Civil 3D

Toolspace. 1. Ensure that the Civil 3D Toolspace is visible. If

the Toolspace is» 1

faoopaae

(Toolspace) located at the top left corner ofthe Ribbon on the Home tab.

2. Click in the Prospector tab to make it active. (The tabs are listed vertically along the right side of the Toolspace.)

3. Click on the "+" signs to open the collections and the "-" signs to close them. Items shown in the Prospector tab are the design data currently in the drawing file (such as points, alignments, and a surface).

4. Collections like Points do not have a "+" or"-" sign because they are not intended to be expanded in the tree view of the Prospector. Click on the Points collection and the list view appears below, describing the AutoCAD Civil 3D points currently in the drawing file.

5. Under the Surfaces collection, look for the surface called Existing Ground. Expand its branch and the Definition area inside it. Highlight the items below (breaklines, boundaries, etc.) and notice the components shown in the list view.

6. With Existing Ground's breaklines highlighted in the list view, right-click on Ditch and note the commands


not visible, click


available in the shortcut menu, as shown on the left in Figure 1-57. Select Zoom to.



Similar shortcut menus are available for nearly all objects shown in the Prospector tab. Expand the Point Groups, select the Bdy Survey point group, and in the panorama view at the bottom, press the <Shift> key to select both point numbers 2 and 3, as shown on the right in Figure 1-57. Right-click and select Zoom To. This enables the Prospector to serve as the primary control center for creating, editing, and managing design objects.

C) Surfaces 0 Existing Ground £$3 Masks Ci'j Watersheds i'3 Definition

Boundaries

IT Q Breaklines

ftC

ont

ours ■(3*, DEM Files t^i Drawing Objects & Edits

<............ in

Description

Vertices

Type

(2>ditch:l

4 Standard

• Points- [<?>] Point Groupsj


Propert

ies...

Insert

to draw

Delete.

..


« [<S>] 7

_A1I P

oints © Point Clouds £ Surfaces

S (2) Existing Ground Masks

J_______H% Watersheds



Point Nu... Easting

Northing

Point Elevati...

41 1 7286.7724m

3917.5908m

51596m

mp nniuam 3930.0483m

3; 7067.3102m

30^84rpJ

■ty 4 5990.8853m

D997,5930m

50.460m

4 5 59613987m

L010.4823m

50.748m

Figure 1-57

Task 3 - Review the Settings tab.

1. Switch to the Settings tab in the Civil 3D Toolspace, as shown in Figure 1-58.

Master View



- %:' Generalj Si- Point: ffi © Point Cloud| 51 (2> Surfacei ffl Parcel : & < ■ G r a d i n g

33 "3 Alignmentj ffi V Profile: $ [vj Profile View

3s f®

Superelevation View i ft fel Samole Line

Figure 1-58


J i/i


2. In the Settings tab, right-click on the drawing's name (Example l.dwg, at the top), and select Edit Drawing Settings.

3. In the Drawing Settings dialog box, select the Units and Zone tab, as shown in Figure 1-59.

V Drawing Settings - Example 1Units and Zone jTransformation j Object Layers |

Abbreviations Ambient Settings | Drawing

units: Imperial to Metric

conversion:

» | International Foot(l Foot = 0.3048 Meters)

Scale objects inserted from other drawings

I Set AutoCAD variables to match ZoneCategories:Available coordinate systems:NAD83 California State Planes, Zone VI, MeterSelected coordinate system code: CA83-VI Description:NAD83 California State Planes, Zone VI, Meter Projection:LMDatum:NAD83


[ E) \m*2mm \

Scale:

1:500Meters

Custom scale:

Angular units:

S00Degrees

USA, California


OK. Cancel

Figure 1-59

4. Change the Scale to 1:1000 in the pull-down menu on the upper right corner.

5. Note the coordinate systems available in the Zone area, such as CA83-VI, NAD83 California State Planes, Zone VI, or Meter.

to close the dialog box. Because Civil3D labels are annotative, the point label annotation size has changed to match the new Drawing Scale.


Apply Help

OK

Click


7. You can also change the Model Space display scale using the Annotation icon in the Status Bar. Change it to read 1:500. Notice as you change the scale, all labels also change in size, as shown in Figure 1-60.

8. You can change the display of the contours by changing the style of the surface. Select the surface object in the AutoCAD window, and the Ribbon will display the contextual Ribbon, as shown in Figure 1-61.

Annotate Modify Analyze View Output Manage Help Online Add-lns Express Tools

Tin Surface: Existing Ground Q- Visibility Check - Export to DEM N/(ffi Catchment Area C) Drape Image * Quic^ Volumes Extract Objects Prcrfil

Figure 1-61

In the Modify tab in the Ribbon, select Surface Properties or right-click and select Surface Properties.


Figure 1-60

& $ 6°

Properties IQ Object Viewer jj Isolate Objects

Surface Properties

Add Data Edit SurfaceWater Drop Resolve

Crossing Breaklines

9.


10. In the Information tab, select the drop-down arrow for the surface style, as shown in Figure 1-62. Select any one of the predefined

to apply the selected style to the

V Surface Properties - Existing Ground

Informatics. jDefini&on ] Analyss j Statsocs j Name:Busing GroundDescription:______Description

Default styles Surface style:Contoois 1m ana Sr" (Deaign | » f^r ■Q .NoDreplav Ck Border Onty (fi Contours lm and 5m (Badiground)•-----------nsrj Contours 2m and 10m {Background) ^ Contours 2m and 10m (Design) 3 Contours 5m ana 25m (Backgrouid) j Contours 5n and 25m (Design) Contours and Tnangies Elevation Bandng (2D) Slope Bandrig (2D)

Cancel

Figure 1-62

to exit the Surface Properties dialog box.

12. View the label style default. Select the View tab in the Ribbon and in the Views

panel, select Named views. In the View Manager under Model. Views, select Contour label, select Set

Current, and click ——-----------J. This will zoom into a preset viewof the contour labels, as shown in Figure 1-63.


Apply

styles and click surface.

OK11. Click


Note that the labels are not rotated to the correct drafting standards. The contour label style being used is rotating the text so that it remains plan readable (so they do not appear upside down). The highlighted labels are rotated more than 90 degrees from horizontal. This is caused by the Readability Bias setting being larger than 90 degrees. This setting controls the viewing angle at which the contour text should be flipped, and is presently set to the default 110°.

13. You could change the setting in only this particular contour label style, if needed. To assign this new value to all surface label styles, right-click on the Surface collection in the Settings tab and select Edit Label Style Defaults.

14. Under the Plan Readability property, set the Readability Bias to 91°, as shown in

Figure 1-64, and click ----------------------—----.

Property IB Label Value Override Child Override Lock

E BehaviorB Plan Readability

Plan Readable 1^aaSSty'iasl \ 'ITlmqq (d) ......... ju) 0Flip Anchors with Text

*lalse ------

El ComponentsIS LeaderSi Dragged State Components

15. Save the drawing. On the Manage tab of the Ribbon, click on Import from the Styles panel, as shown in Figure 1-65.


Figure 1-64

Figure 1-65

[Tp H Run Script Eg layer Translator

Cf Visual LISP Editor Check✓

Applications

EjJ Configure CAD Standards

oRecord

O Play

Action Recorder

Manage■§] import

7col B E>PCrt ce Palette. to

Eds? Abate*.Customization

load Application

16. Select and Open the Styles.dwg file from one of the following

folders:

Imperial

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-l\Drawings\lnterface

MetricC:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-M\Drawings\lnterface


17. Click the Uncheck All button at the top to uncheck all the available styles. Expand Surface Styles, expand To be added, checkmark Contours 1m and 5 m (Design) with Slope Arrows, as shown in Figure 1-66.

18. Click -----—---- in the warning dialog box regarding overwriting

duplicate styles. Click ' —----1 acknowledge the messagedialog box.

19. Change the surface style to the newly imported style by repeating Steps 9 and 10. Note the slope arrows shown in Figure 1-67.

f.--------— — „ — -

'** J ■ ■ -4 ' ' -y — '

\


it Import Civd 3D Style;

M

Figure 1-66


\xSX \

. ■ - . ---------------------------------------------$7

/

Figure 1-67

Task 4 - Review AutoCAD Civil 3D's Dynamic Object Model.

1. Select the View tab in the Ribbon and in the Views panel, select Named views. In the View Manager under Model Views, select

Alignment Profile, select Set Current, and click 1- —------This will zoom into a preset view of the alignment and the surface to the right.

2. Select the Jeffries Ranch Rd alignment to activate its grips, as shown in Figure 1-68. Click on the lowest grip and reposition it. The alignment and profile update as well. (If the alignment had labels displayed, they would also update).

1 X



3. Float your crosshairs near the alignment in its new position. The station, offset, and surface elevation information are provided through tooltips.

4. Save the drawing.Task 5 - Review AutoCAD Civil 3D's Reports Manager.

1. Select the Toolbox tab in the Civil 3D Toolspace. Expand the Report Manager, as shown in Figure 1-69, by selecting the "+" sign.


Figure 1-68


2. Expand the Alignment collection. Select PI Station Report, right-click, and select Execute, as shown in Figure 1-70. Note: As a shortcut, you can double-click to execute the Report command without having to select the Execute command.


■1

e 9 D a

- ED Reports ManagerE IJ] Alignment 1

ED Alignment.Curve IED Alignment Design Criteria VerificationED General_Legal_Description_for_Alignme...

—

ED Incremental Stationing Report

■■■WjflPl Statwft Report Ep V.

ED Stakeout Alignment Report

CN c ±£

[J] Station_and_Curve X

t [Q Comdort ED Parcel1 ED Pipesf ED Pointst ED Profile r- ED i

/i

ED Surface Points to CSVED Surface Report ___

* ED BreaklineReportS Subscription Extension Manager

X

S Miscellaneous Utilities■n

oFigure 1-69



Igl PI Station Report Execute... >'Q Stakeout

Alignment Report ®

Station_and_Curve Refresh

Figure 1-70


3. Accept all the defaults and click Create report. The report appears as shown in Figure 1-71.

Alignment PI Station Report

Akammti N ami Asceol Btvd DtsoipliooStation Race Stan MOO 00. End 0-560 24

PI Stalioa

Northing

Eastjag Distance

Direction

0-000.00

620.951 8490to

1.90-.201 -791m

227 440m

S15> 19 55-W

0-22*44

«20732J039m

L907.141 6411m

337.754m

S12" 3"' 15*E

0-560.24

620.402.9107m

1.90" .215 4396m

Figure 1-71

4. Expand the Surface collection. Select Surface Report, right-click, and select Execute, as shown in

Figure 1-72.

f-EE Surface

^ Surface Points to CSV


Predated by:Your Cotnpar.v Nan* 123 Mm Street

Cbll: OnCMS! Compa.iv Address IDate H VmOlO 50TJ] PHI


iriiiippiiE0 BreaklineReport S Subscription Extension Mar

cSa i u.;iu.;„

Figure 1-72

5. Accept all the defaults and click Create report. The report displays as shown in Figure 1-73. Enter a file name for the saved report or accept the default. Review and close the report.

Your Company Name

123 Main Street

Suite #321

City, State

01234

Surface ReportProject Name: C Civil 3D Projects Ctvl3D-training Drawings Example 1 dvg Report Date: 15

022010 5 1325 PM

Area I nits: squat eMcter

Figure 1- 73


<7S

Refresh

Cheat: Client

Companv Project

Description: Prepared

by: Preparer

Volume Units: cubicMeter

Units: meter Surface: Existing GroundDescription:

Description Area 2D: 24726S.606 Elevation Max 88.732 Number of Points: 330

Area 3D. 248981.671 Elevation Mir 47.824 Number of Triangles: 628

Review Questions

How is AutoCAD Civil 3D application different from traditional Survey and Civil Engineering packages, such as AutoCAD Land Desktop?

Which Workspace do you use in this Training Guide?

What does the Prospector tab do?

What does the Settings tab do?

How do you access the Edit Drawing Settings dialog box?

What is the main function of the Panorama window?

Question 1

Question 2

Question 3

Question 4

Question 5

Question 6


Module 2

Parcels Level 1


Section 1: Parcels Overview S Introduction to Parcels

Section 2: Subdividing ParcelsS Creating and Editing Parcels by Layout Overview S Creating and Editing Parcels S Renumbering Parcels

Section 3: Parcel Reports, Annotation, and TablesParcel Reports

S Parcel Labels V Parcel Tables


2-1


Section 1: Parcels Overview

2.1 Introduction to Parcels...............................................................2-4

Beginning a Subdivision Project............................................ 2-11Task 1: Create a Site parcel from objects and renumberparcels....................................................................................... 2-11Task 2: Split and Merge Parcels.................................................2-15Task 3: Create a new Site and Site parcel from referenced objects2-19


Parcels Level 1

2.1 Introduction to Parcels

A Site under development, as shown in Figure 2-1, is the starting point for defining smaller parcels. The development's agreement or covenants determine the size, setback, and other criteria for the new parcels. If a parcel is residential, there could be restrictions affecting minimum parcel areas, setbacks, and where to locate a house. If it is a commercial property, there could be restrictions or specific mandates for access, traffic control, parking spaces, etc. The Parcel Layout commands are used for subdividing larger parcels.

Sites, parcels, and alignments are closely related. Each can exist by itself and you do not need to have any alignments associated with the parcels. However, you often start with a site boundary and then divide the site into smaller parcels by placing alignments within its boundary.

• Parcels are listed in the Prospector tab in the Sites branch, as shown in Figure 2-2.

G3" Alignments e gy Sites j B ® Site


Figure 2-1

Figure 2-2

0 "ID Alignments !"" +J Feature Lines

Property : 1 Property : 2 • Property : 3 Qj Property : 4


When adding alignments to a site, the Parcels list is updated in the Prospector tab.

As in all other AutoCAD® Civil 3D® objects, Parcel object layers are controlled in the Drawing Settings dialog box, Object Layers tab, as shown in Figure 2-3.

U.lJ.PiJJ.UJJi J.L-BWBffEMMB—t -Units and Zone | Transformation Object Layers jfibbreviations | Ambient Settings |

I Enter a single 1 (asterisk) in the value field to include the object name as the prefix or suffix value in a layer name.

r Immediate and independent layer on/off control of cisplay components

OK ~| Cancel | Apply | Help

1 AutoCAD Civil 3D software contains a ROW command that creates a parcel using offsets from an alignment.

• A ROW parcel can represent the front yard definition of several potential parcels.


_IS|X]

ModifierObject________jj? Match Line f>> Match Line-Labeling ? Material SectionQ Parcel ^

Parcel-Labeling - j'r Parcel

Segment ^ Parcel

Segrrent-L.. 1 Parcel

Table

Value LockedLayerC-ANNO-MTCHC-ANNO-MTCH-TEXTC-ROAD-SHAPC-PROPC-PROP-TEXTC-PROP-LINEC-PROP-LINE-TEXTC-PROP-TABL

a a a a a

a

PipePipe-Labeling 1 3ipe and Structur.. j Pipe Network Sec.. f Pipe or Structure.. ] Port Table / Profile^ O'rtfiU.1 aholinn

C-STRM-PIPEC-STRM-PIPE-TEXTC-STRM-TABLC-STRM-SCTNC-STRM-PROFV-NODE-TABLC-ROAD-PROFr.o r, a n,DOAP.TFvT

a a aa

zl

ROW Parcel

Parcels Level 1

While normal parcels automatically adjust to changes to an alignment, ROW parcels are static, as shown in Figure 2-4. Therefore, you should create ROW parcels only after settling on a final location for an alignment.

[3 Drawing Settings - Drawing2

Units and Zone | Transformation Object Layers j Abbreviations | Ambient Settings

Object_________0 Match Line

Match Line- Labeling f Material Section

j ParcelParcel-Labeling Parcel Segment Parcel Segment-L.. | Parcel Table 'Pipe Pipe-

Labeling ] Pipe and Structur.. 1 Pipe Network Sec., p Pipe or Structure.. ] Point Table Profile

Vi-iPilck-l ahcJirtn

Enter a single * (asterisk) in the value field to include the object name as the prefix or suffix value in a layer name.

f" Immediate and independent layer on/off control of display components

OK | Cancel | Apply | Help

Figure 2-4


jnjxl

Modifier

Locked

Value

Layer

'-MTCH MTCH-TEXT SHAP^Hag.TiFii,

r.Dr>An.

C-ANNO- C-ANNO' C-ROAD-jD^ftnC-PROP C-PROPC-PROP C-

PROP

C-PROP'

a a a a a a

da


Parcel segment display is controlled by parcel styles, and parcel lines can abut parcels with different styles. Select the Parcels collection (under Sites), right-click, and select Properties, as shown in Figure 2-5, to open the Site Parcel Properties dialog box. You can select which parcel style should take preference in the Parcel style display order area of the Site Parcel Properties dialog box, as shown in Figure 2-5. Placing the style for the overall parent tract (the Site Parcel Style) at the top of the list causes the outside parcel lines to display differently than those inside.

l3S.tr PfltcH Proprrtm

Comoofron j-finVyv<;Sbeiwcclayle

| ]«3W0J&3 Sq. Ft. 119906.056'Ow-defned prooerty daesfiMtiori

d

v|

OK I C «xal I I Hrtp )

Figure 2-5


Parcel Style

Display Order

fei IT AVyiments +J Feature Lines GradnoGii

Qpro, 0

PM*□ fO)

ft) PipeW?twork$ §5

Corridors & Assernfc&M

Move to Site... Copy to Site-

Show Preview

SefectZoom to

^101*1

PwcdsxatK

"3 Ed El

~3Ez\mIStearMlabci 5»yto

A Pvcti styte dspiay ordsrSnie^rtPM«SProperty

Parcels Level 1

The properties of a parcel include its name, style, and an Analysis tab containing the parcel's area, perimeter, and point-of-beginning (POB). The Parcel Property's Composition tab shows the label style, area, and perimeter, as shown in Figure 2-6.

IBInformation Composition |Anaiysis | User Defined Properties Area selection label styleSn Name Square Foot J Acres

3 !H

Figure 2-6

The Analysis tab contains a parcel boundary Inverse or Mapcheck analysis. In the upper right side of the tab, you can change the POB location and the analysis direction, as shown in Figure 2-7.

(3 Parcel Properties - Property: 1

Information | Composition Analysis |user Defined Properties |"Analysis-------------------------

Inverse analysis <~ Mapcheckanalysis

P Enab« mapchecK across chord

Point oF Beginning : North: 6952,7359' East: 4559.6626'

Segment #1 : CurveLength: 169.284' Radius: 180.000' Delta: 53.8847(d) Tangent: 91.487 -Calculation Settings

Posit of x: Y:b6flinnh0' 14SS9 .>3626' 16952,7355.'f~ Process segment order cointerdockwise

Figure 2-7

The Mapcheck analysis precision is the same as the drawing distance precision.The Inverse report precision is set to the precision of AutoCAD Civil 3D (10-12 decimal places).The default direction of a Mapcheck or Inverse analysis is clockwise. You can change the direction to counter-clockwise, if needed.A POB can be any vertex on the parcel's perimeter.


Parcel

PropertiesJS]*!

Parcel statistics" Area:

Perimeter:15978.296'

15156247.05 Sq. Ft.

jaixj


The User Defined Properties tab contains site-specific details, such as the Parcel Number, Parcel Address, Parcel Tax ID, and other properties you might want to define, as shown in Figure 2-8. Custom properties can be assigned to a drawing through the User Defined Property Classifications section of the Settings tab, under the Parcels collection.

13 Parcel Properties - Property: 1

There are two types of parcel annotation: an area label for the parcel itself and the segments defining the parcel.

A parcel area label usually consists of a parcel's number or name, area, and perimeter, as shown in Figure 2-9. Most offices define their own parcel label styles. A parcel label style can include several additional parcel properties, address, PIN, Site name, etc. In AutoCAD Civil 3D, you graphically select a parcel by selecting a parcel area label, not parcel segments.


Information | Composition j Analysis User Defined Properties

Classification: NoneProperty Name Property ValueB General

Parcel Number IParcel AddressParcel Tax ID 0

Figure 2-8

JDJXJ

Parcel Labels and

Styles

Figure 2-9


AutoCAD Civil 3D program can create parcels from AutoCAD® objects, such as closed polylines and closed sequences of lines and arcs. Be careful to avoid gaps, multiple polyline vertices at the same location, and polylines that double-back over themselves, which might lead to errors in parcel layouts.

These objects can be selected in the current drawing or from an XREF. Keep in mind that AutoCAD Civil 3D parcel lines in an XREF cannot be selected-only lines, arcs, and polylines. Also note that AutoCAD Civil 3D parcels created from AutoCAD objects maintain no relationship to the objects after creation.

Once a site has the property defined as a parcel and alignments are generated, you are ready to start creating subdivision plans. One command that can speed up the process is Parcels > Create ROW. This command automatically creates Right-of-Way parcels based on alignment setbacks.

Keep in mind that ROW parcels do not automatically update when alignments change. Therefore, you might want to create ROWs after you are fairly certain where you want the alignments to be for this alternative.

Hint: Multiple Alternatives in the Same Drawing

Sites enable you to organize alignments, parcels, and related data into separate containers, so that parcel lines from one site alternative do not clean up with parcel lines in others. However, sites do not offer layer or any other kind of visibility control. Therefore, if you intend to have multiple parcel layout alternatives in the same drawing, you should consider placing parcel area labels and parcel segments on different layers.


Create Parcels from

Objects

Creating Right-of-

Way Parcels

Parcels Level 1

Beginning a Subdivision Project

Task 1 - Create a Site parcel from objects and renumber parcels.

Open the file PCL1-A1-Parcels.dwg from one of the following folders:

Metric:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-M\Drawings\Parcels Imperial:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-l\Drawings\Parcels

To make the annotation easier to read, change the current drawing scale. In the Status Bar, set the Annotation Scale to 1:1000 (M) or 1:40 (I), as shown in Figure 2-10.

IIc*

r = «r 31' = 50'1" = 60'1" = 70'

___ 1" = 75'

none

Custom-

Hide Xref scales

m Ar

M


Practice 2a

1.

2.

1:1250 1:2000 1:2500 1:5000 Custom...

V Hide Xref scales

tor

EH 1:10


Figure 2-10

Create a parcel from existing objects in Model Space. In the Home tab > Create Design panel, select Parcel > Create Parcels from Objects, as shown in Figure 2-11.

»Toolspace

leg %0 In-port Survey Data

Points * (y Sur'aces

- Create Ground Data "

(3 Parcel - t5 • ® '

0 0 Parcel Creation Tools

Palettes » [Create Parcel from Objectsl

Toolspace C matt. pi/iht waw—i

Figure 2-11


3.

Home Insert Annotate Modify Analyze View Output

Parcels Level 1

4. In the model, select all the objects that represent the property

boundary and press Enter when done selecting. Set thefollowing parameters:

• Site: Site 1

8 Parcel style: Property

• Area Label style: Name Area & Perimeter

• Erase existing entities: Select this option.

5. Refer to Figure 2-12 for the remaining values, then click

to accept and close the dialog box.


Parcels Level 1

Five parcels will be created. In the Prospector tab, expand the current drawing branch, as well as the Sites branch by selecting the + sign. Continue to expand until you reach the Parcels branch, as shown in Figure 2-13. Note: If the + is not showing next to Parcels, press the <F5> key to refresh the Prospector tab view.

£ SI Sitesj ft SI Srteli ffr Alignments +J Feature Lines Grading Groups j & Parcels

! Qj Property :1 bQ Property:2 j- Q Property: 3 ■ Q Property:4 Q Property: 5

Change the object style of the two parcels. In Model Space, select the parcels as shown in Figure 2-14. Select Property:1 and in the Parcel tab > Modify panel, select top half of the Parcel Properties command. In the Information tab of the dialog box that opens, change the Object style to Single-Family. Verify that Use name template in parcel style is checked on. This enablesOK

you to rename the parcel with the style name. Click close the dialog box and press <Esc> to clear the selection.

Home Insert Annotate Modify £ Inalyze View Output Manage Vault Express Tools

n □Add Add Renumber Laoels *

Tables " Tags

[El Prope-ties Cq,

Object Viewer

Isolate Objects

| Si JParcel 1 1

Properties

1

^p^ Multiple Parcel Properties G3

Renurrber/Rename

Edit Edit Geometry Elevatic-s Parcel Layout Tools

Labels & Tables________ Genera: Tools V S Modify -


B' Si SitesS 5itel £p- ™ Alignments ^J Feature Lines j2>] Grading Groups

Parcels

Property:!

Property:2 (|jl

Property:3 ^

Property:4

Property:5

Property :1 1 493635sq.m

Property ;1 1 5313418 Sq. Ft.

Property :2 2 66594.60sq.m

t^-] Property: 2 2 16815.49 Sq. Ft

S3 Property: 3 3 13617 £4 sq.m

^Property: 3 3 46578.46 Sq. Ft.

^Property: 4 4 11739151sq.m

^Property: 4 4 6359097 Sq. Ft

^Property: 5 5 6367334sq.m

^Property: 5 5 8537134 Sq. Ft

Figure 2-13


1 r

1Figure 2-14


to

Parcels Level 1

8. Repeat the previous step for Property:2 and change the Object style to Open Space.

9. In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Parcel-Split Parcel. Alternatively, in the Prospector tab go to the Sites directory and open it. Right-click on the parcels folder and select Refresh. Select the SINGLE-FAMILY : 1 parcel, right-click and select Zoom. This will zoom your view into this parcel in the Model Space.

10. Note the north boundary of the Single-Family parcel that shares the parcel line with the Open Space parcel displays this parcel line with the style assigned to the Open Space, as shown in Figure 2-15.

Figure 2-15

11. Display the Single-Family parcel so that its assigned style takes precedence over all other shared parcel line styles. In the Prospector tab, expand the Sites collection, and then the Site 1 collection. Select the Parcels collection, right-click and select Properties.



12. In the Site Parcel Properties dialog box, select Single-Family in the Parcel style display order section, as shown in

Figure 2-16.f7\I

to move it up in the list.Click V

| OK

Figure 2-16

13. Click -------- — ----- to close the dialog box and save the drawing.

Task 2 - Split and Merge Parcels.

As part of the development, you will need to acquire or purchase a partition of land from Property 2 (Open Space:2) and Property 1 (Single-Family:1).

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous task, or open the file PCL1 -A2-Parcels.dwg


Jfc, Site Parcel Properties

Composition jAnalysis | Site

parcel style Property

Site area label style cnone>

Parcel style display order

Par

ce

Are

a

266

Use

ri

Nor

n

Parcels Level 1

2. In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset viewC3D-Parcel-Split Parcel, as shown in Figure 2-17. Alternatively in the Prospector tab open the Sites directory. Right-click on the Parcels folder and select refresh. Select the Property: 1 parcel, right-click and select Zoom. This will zoom your view into this parcel in the Model Space.

^mmmtt lr* t ^ rr

" tfg Named Views Li Li L: la 12 ^

/lews

Figure 2-17

You will extend the blue property line until it intersects the north green property line. Select the blue property line to

display the grips. Select the grip and move it to the apparent intersection. Press <Ctrl>, right-click, and select Apparent

Intersection. When prompted for apparent of, select line 1 and then line 2, as shown in Figure 2-18. Press the <Esc> key to clear the selection.

, Apparent intersection Line2


Home Insert Annotate Modify Analyze

d<0 Par Orbit • Extents Navigate

C3D-Psrcet-' -rev ous view

i lop . Bottom

Property line to extend

PROPEPTi . 3 Area 3.36 AC

Apparent Intersection Line 1

\-

«•*«. 3.S6 AC Psrnister. 478.46m

X X


4. Select the parcel label Property:6 and in the contextual Ribbon, select Parcel Properties. In the Parcel Properties dialog box, select the Analysis tab and select the Mapcheck analysis option. Scroll down the list and you should see the Error Closure or Precision, as well at the total Area, as shown in Figure 2-19. This is the area of land you will need to purchase. Perform the same steps to determine the area you will need to purchase from the single-family lot.

Perimeter: 281.212m Area: 3337.05sq.m|Perimeter: 922.608' Area: 35919.54 Sq. Ft.Error Closure: 0.0001 Course: N5= 13' 24"V Error Closure: 0.0011 Course: N34- 02' 28"WError North: 0.00005 East: -0.00000 Error North: 0.00092 East: -0.00062Precision 1: 2812010.000 Precision 1: 838700.000

Figure 2-19

5. To create one parcel based on your development site, you have to erase and modify all property lines that split the site. Since you are performing a land transfer of Single-Family: 1 and Property:6 to the main parcel site, you need to adjust the property line that divides the two parcels. Click OK to close the dialog box and press <Esc> to clear the selection.

6. Select the north property line to display the grips. Select the east grip and move it to the intersection. Press <Ctrl>, right-click, and select Intersection. When prompted for intersection of, select Intersection Pt, as shown in Figure 2-20. Press <Esc> to clear the selection.


Intersection Pt

Grip

Figure 2-20

/

Parcels Level 1

Use the AutoCAD Erase command to erase all of the internal property lines, as shown in Figure 2-21.

8. You will now only have three properties. Rename them torelevant names. Type ZE and press <Enter> at the Command Line for Zoom Extents. In the Status Bar, enable the Quick Properties icon, as shown in Figure 2-22.

Figure 2-22

9. Select the Open Space:2 property (at the west end) and in the Quick Properties dialog box, change the Name to Private AR (agricultural reserve), and leave the Style as Open Space, as shown in Figure 2-23. Press <Esc> when finished.


} ^s 1 i II 1I i II _____ _______

— 1I I I I I I 1 I

___JFigure 2-21

Corrjr.ar.^ zt j

ty-iHkjsi a Ld

0 raki... ..

QUICK Properties

Parcels Level 1

10. Select the pie-shaped parcel located in the middle area between the two parcels. Rename it to Single Family R1 and enter Single-Family for the Style, as shown in Figure 2-24. Press <Esc> when done.

11. Select the main parcel that is to the east. Rename it to Main Property and enter Property for the Style.

12. You may have to refresh the Parcels collections in the Prospector. Expand the sites collection, expand the Site 1 collection, right click on the parcel collection and select Refresh.

Task 3 - Create a new Site and Site parcel from referencedobjects.

You have received a drawing from the Land planning department that shows the street layout and different parcels. Using this plan, you will create parcels from a xref objects.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous task or open the file PCL1-A3-Parcels.dwg.

2. Create a new site branch where you can store all parcels that are relevant to the Main development site. In the Prospector tab, right-click on the Sites branch and select New. Enter C3D

Training as the name and click ' -------- — ----- ' to close the dialog box.


Figure 2-24


You now need to move the Parcel, Main Property from Site 1 to the C3D Training site. Expand the Sitel collection, expand the Parcels collection, right-click on Main Property parcel and select Move to Site.., as shown on the left side of Figure 2-25. In the Move to site dialog box, select C3D Training, as shown on the

to close the dialog box. As intended only the required parcel is moved to the project site and the others are

removed.

Private AR 3 Single-Far

Catchments Si- fffl D

El- Site 1 &SL Parcels

• j/Main Property

Figure 2-25

4. To save time, the x-referenced drawing Base-original Property, has already been referenced in. Note that you have set the zone and units for the project drawings. This enables you to geo reference the drawings using Locate using Geographic data, as shown in Figure 2-26.


3.

OK

right side. Click

fi" QlJ Sites i ®

Sitel

EjD-Alignments

Feature

Lines ;-[£>] Grading

Groups Parcels

jjjy Move to Site

:f rQ C3D Training Selected objects:

Properties...

(^MovetoSite^^ Copy to

Site...

Parcels Level 1

Attach Externa! Refs-ence

Base-original Property

Preview

Speedy On-screen

I.Uu

1.00

2 1.00

IHonri Scale

Insertion point

Specify On-sa«en

jaoo Y

o.oo -

0.00 .....

Show Details

Figure 2-26

5. E nable a preset view by selecting the View tab in the Ribbon and in the Views panel, select the


Name:<

Browse

Scale

Reference Type o Attachment

Overtay

(S Locate using Geotpaphic Data


C3D-Parcel-Xref preset view.

6. T o create parcels from the x-referenced file. In the Home tab > Create Design panel, select Parcel > Create Parcels from Objects. Type X (for xref) <Enter> at the Command Line.

7. W hen prompted to select the xref objects, type WP (for window poly)


Parcels Level 1

<Enter> at the Command Line. Draw a boundary that encompasses all of the polylines that define the internal site, as shown on the left of Figure. Once you are finished defining the boundary, end the WP selection command by pressing <Enter>. Press <Enter> again to end the xref selection command.



8. I n the

Create Parcels - From objects dialog box, ensure that the Site name is C3D Training and accept the remaining defaults,


OK

OK to closeas shown on the right in Figure 2-27. Click the dialog box.

Parcels Level 1

Figure 2-27

9. The project site has nine parcels. Using the quick properties dialog box, select each of the parcel labels and rename the parcels according to Figure 2-28.

1. Commercial C1

2. Multi Family MF

3. Municipal

Reserve MR

4. Pond PUL

5. Residential

BLK2 R1

6. Residential

BLK1 R1

7. Residential

BLK3 R1Create Parcels - From objects

IgS^Sfil


Figure 2-28

/ V, »


Site.j HEssssa T

s ar car style: • St - If

Layers Parcel layer:

C-fftO"Parcel segment

layer:t-woe-ut*

Label styles Area tstw ityfe:

ftanse Jv&s 4 fenraeS

- **.' in

| irte At «>*: | Beav^ ever

Duaanc.

- 1

I, Deta over Lenjth anAutomasoalv add segment labels

CX Cancei

8. Right Of Way

9. School MSR

10. Save the drawing.


Parcels Level 1

Review Questions

Where are parcels listed?

What does the ROW contain?

What does a parcel style assign in the Display tab?

What is the default direction of a Mapcheck or Inverse report?

How do you adjust parcel display order?


Question 1

Question 2

Question 3

Question 4

Question 5


Section 2: Subdividing Parcels2.2 Creating and Editing Parcels by Layout

Overview..........................................................................................2-25

2.3 Creating and Editing Parcels..................................................2-28

2.4 Renumbering Parcels..............................................................2-30

Creating and Editing Parcels..................................................2-31Task 1: Create parcels by slide angle........................................2-31Task 2: Rename and renumber parcels.........................................2-34Task 3: Edit parcels using Swing Line - Edit.............................................................................................2-37

2.2 Creating and Editing Parcels by Layout Overview

In addition to creating parcels from polylines, arcs, and lines, AutoCAD Civil 3D can also intelligently create (and adjust) parcels using commands in the Parcel Layout Tools toolbar. To open the Parcel Layout Tools toolbar, click the down arrow next to the Parcel icon on the Create Design panel, and select Parcel Creation Tools in the drop-down list, as shown in Figure 2-29.

a • -J • m tf • / • r-

0 • a <2>-

B

fr- J Parcel Creator Tools

r ■ J Create Parcel from Objects

raw

ir j Create Righ: c* Way

1 Pare?-! layout: fools

/ - 0 m -1 & -d ~ 4 E> | <3=5 cO ¥

Select a command from the layout tools

Figure 2-29


Parcels Level 1

oil I(Create Parcel) assigns parcel

creation settings, such as parcel type, labeling styles, and other parameters.

/ ' -The Line and Curve commands ( ) can be used tocreate individual line and curve parcel segments. Segments created with these tools are considered fixed (see the Alignment course material for a definition of the fixed vs. free or floating segment types).

(Draw Tangent - Tangent with No Curves) enables you to create a series of connected parcel line segments.



• The Parcel Sizing flyout, as shown in Figure 2-30, contains a list of commands for creating and editing parcels. The methods used to create parcels include defining the last parcel segment by slide direction, slide angle, swing line, or freehand drawing of a parcel boundary. The most frequently used method is Slide Line.

I Parcel Layout Tools *I2J*I

^ | ta nP I s - >; 13 - f 4 & | & | ^(Select a command from the la Q slide Line - Create✓

Slide Line - Edit i-J Swing Line - Create Swing Line ■ Edit Free

Form Create

Figure 2-30

• The commands at the center of the toolbar, as shown inFigure 2-31, enable you to further edit parcel segments. These commands include inserting or deleting Pis (points of intersection), deleting parcel segments, or creating or dissolving parcel unions.

Parcel Layout Tools

/ <3 a-i'SF ly& o I I *Select a command from the layout toy [\j *" insert PI

Delete PI

tUaaaaMiiiafaiHl'1"

Figure 2-31

&(Pick Sub-Entity) enables you to

select a parcel line and view its details in the Parcel Layout Parameters dialog box.

H?-.._. (Sub-entity Editor) opens and closes the Parcel Layout Parameters dialog box.

The next two commands enable you to Undo and Redo parcel

edits ( ). These can be executed while the Parcel Layout


»I?|X|

Parcels Level 1

Tools have been opened.



° The drop-down arrow ( : ) expands the toolbar to show the Parcel Creation parameters, as shown in Figure 2-32 (also accessible through the Command Settings of CreateParcelByLayout in the Settings tab).

• The Parcel Sizing section sets the minimum area for parcels to be laid out. The Minimum Frontage sets the minimum width of a parcel at the ROW or at a setback from the ROW.

• The Use Minimum Frontage At Offset specifies whether or not to use frontage offset criteria.

• The Frontage Offset sets the default value for the frontage offset from the ROW.

• The Minimum Width sets the default minimum width at the frontage offset.

° The Minimum Depth sets the minimum depth of new or existing parcels at the mid-point and is perpendicular to the frontage of the parcel.

• The Use Maximum Depth specifies whether or not to use maximum depth criteria.

• The Maximum Depth sets the maximum depth for new parcels or when editing parcels.


Parcel Layout Tools

C - 4 | eO

Parameter | Value

Q Parcel SizingMinimum Area 10890.00 Sq. Ft.

Minimum Frontage 60.000'

Use Minimum Frontage At Offset yes

Frontage Offset 15.000'

Minimum Width 50.000'

Minimum Depth 50.000'

Use Maximum Depth yes

Maximum Depth 500.000'

Multiple Solution Preference Use shortest frontage

Automatic LayoutAutomatic Mode on

Remainder Distribution Place remainder in last parcel

Figure 2-32

Parcels Level 1

• The Multiple Solution Preference specifies whether or not to use the shortest frontage or the smallest area when multiple solutions are encountered.

• The Automatic Layout section affects how parcel auto-sizing subdivides a parcel block.

2.3 Creating and Editing Parcels

The Create Parcel by Layout tools can quickly help you create a subdivision plan. Although these tools can make your job easier and are faster than manual drafting, they are only effective in creating the last side of new parcels. In other words, you might need to create additional (or adjust) parcel lines manually to guide AutoCAD Civil 3D to the best solution. The area shown in Figure 2-33, for example, requires you to create minimum 950 sq m (10,225 sq ft) parcels.

The back parcel lines (those along the west and south of the Cul-De-Sac area, and between Jeffries Ranch Rd and Ascent Place) were drawn manually and saved in a separate drawing file. Once inserted, they will be used to guide the creation of the parcels adjacent to Ascent Place. If you ask AutoCAD Civil 3D to automatically subdivide this area, the


Figure 2-33


result is a total of 15 residential lot parcels, as shown in Figure 2-34.


Figure 2-34

Parcels Level 1

The various creation and editing techniques available in the Create Parcel by Layout toolbar are described below.

aThe Line and Curve commands ( ) and (Draw Tangent- Tangent with No Curves) command enable you to create lot lines without having to specify an area. In contrast, the commands below all create parcels based on a specified area.

The Slide Line - Create command enables you to subdivide a larger parcel by creating new parcel lines that hold a certain angle relative to the Right-of-Way, such as 90° or a specific bearing or azimuth. The Slide Line - Edit command enables you to modify a parcel to a specified area while holding the same angle from the ROW or a specific bearing or azimuth. They are shown in Figure 2-35.

1 Parcel Layout Tools ■i^Kl

■■■■■

§5i a„„

, jt

M - 1 f\N si- | -4 O &

\

1 *

Select a command from thdre

* Slide Line - Create

\V '

m

Slide Line - Edit f

Swing Line - Create

Swing Line - Edit

sFree Form Create

Figure 2-35

The Swing Line - Create command enables you to create a new parcel by creating a parcel segment that connects to a specified point, such as a property corner. The Swing Line - Edit command enables you to resize a parcel while specifying a lot corner. These commands are shown in Figure 2-36.


Swing Line

Free Form

Create

Frontage


1 Parcel Layout Tools

/ - 0 nF 1 s - >; o -1 4 o ^ ^ | ¥

iCurrent command: Swing Line j-]] slide Line - Create

j^l Slide Line - Edit

)f rj * Swing Line - Create \J%J Swing Line - Edit

[71 Free Form Create

Figure 2-36

The Free Form Create command enables you to create a new lot by specifying an area, an attachment point and angle, or two attachment points.

When using these routines, you are prompted to select a parcel interior point and trace its frontage geometry. This is a critical step. As you trace the frontage, the command creates a jig (heavy highlight) that recognizes the changing geometry of the frontage line work.


/Freehand

Slide Line

Parcels Level 1

2.4 Renumbering Parcels

Creating parcels using the methods explained in the previous examples results in inconsistent parcel numbering. AutoCAD Civil 3D parcels can be renumbered individually using Parcel Properties, or in groups using Modify > Parcel > Renumber/Rename.

This command enables you to specify a starting parcel number and the increment you would like between parcels. (It also enables you to rename your parcels based on a different name template.) When renumbering, the command prompts you to identify parcels in the order in which you want to have them renumbered. The Renumber/Rename Parcels dialog box is shown in Figure 2-37.

HitiilWWIii^MiUi *lSite:__________________________________

imai 3 ay<♦ Renumber -------------- —--------------------

Starting number:

n 3Increment value:

n aU

se

na

m

e

te

m

pl

at

e

in

pa



rc

el

st

yl

e

R

en

a

m

e

G Specify the parcel names Cglj

f* Use name template In parcel style

OK ~j Cancel | Help |

_____________________________AFigure 2-37


Parcels Level 1

Creating and Editing Parcels

You have three parcels zoned as single-family residential: Block 1 (1.31ac), Block2 (0.94ac), and Block3 (1.47ac). Your client, the land developer, requires you to maximize the number of lots in these three parcels, keeping in mind the minimum area and frontages as required by the Land Use bylaws.

Task 1 - Create parcels by slide angle.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice or open the file PCL1-B1-Parcels.dwg from one of the following folders:

Metric:

C:\Civil3D Projects\Civil3D-training-

M\Drawings\Parcels Imperial:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-l\

Drawings\Parcels

2. In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Parcel-Create parcel.

3. In the Home tab > Create Design panel, select Parcel > Parcel Creation Tools. The Parcel Layout Tools toolbar is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-38.

Parcel Layout Tools ! V NfcSwl

/ < a ^ i s - >x i 4 o i ^ i ¥ Select a command from the layout tools

Figure 2-38


Practice 2b


4. Click and enter the values shown in Figure 2-39. As you enter each value, notice the graphics below in the dialog box. They visually identify what the values you enter are used for.

When done click ^ to collapse the expanded toolbar.

B Parcel Sizing _ _ I________ B Parcel Sizing

Minimum Area 950.00sq.m Minimum Area 10225.CC Sq. Ft.Minimum Frontage 20.000m Minimum Frontage ; 65.000'Use Minimum Frontage At Offset YesUse Minimum Frontage At Offset

YesFrontage Offset 6.000m Frontage Offset 20.000'Minimum Width 20.000m Minimum Width 65.000'Minimum Depth 6.000m Minimum Depth 20.000'Use Maximum Depth Yes Use Maximum Depth YesMaximum Depth fimOOOm . Maximum Depth

4925.000'Multiple Solution Preference Useshortestfrontage..........Multiple Solution Preference Use shortest frontage

B Automatic layout B Automatic Layout

Automatic Mode On Automatic Mode OnRemainder Distribution Place remainder in last parcelRemalnder Distribution

Place remainder in last parcelFigure 2-39


Parcels Level 1

5. In the Parcel Layout Tools toolbar, expand and select Slide Line - Create, as shown in Figure 2—40.

Parcel Layout Tools I t< jw£3»[

si / a S* -it ' ft & ¥Select a command from tlfl

LJj ^

Slide Line - C^ate^

Figure 2-40



6. In the Create Parcels - Layout dialog box, set the following parameters, as shown in Figure 2-41:

• Site: C3D Training

• Parcel style: Single-Family

• Area label style: Parcel Name - Area

t. Create Parcels - LayoutSite:C3D Training Pared style: (. 'jy Single-Family Layers Parcel layer: C-PROPParcel segment layer:

Cancel

Figure 2-41

— ----- to accept the changes and close the dialog box. Click

When prompted to select the parcel to be subdivided, select the label for parcel RESIDENTIAL BLK1 R1, as shown in Figure 2-42.


i SS

o-

C-PROP-UNELabel styles Area label style:

Parcel Name - Area

Line segment label style:

| tf ~

<^ Bearing over DistanoCurve segment label style:

Delta over Length an

m-

Automatically add segment labels

HeipOK

7.

8.

Parcels Level 1


Figure 2-42


9. When you are prompted for the starting point on frontage, select the south end of the corner cut. Press the <Ctrl> key, right-click, and select endpoint. Then select the corner cut, Pt1, shown in Figure 2-43.

10. When prompted for the end point of the frontage, set the end point of the property line to the north, Pt 2, as shown in Figure 2^3. Use the same process as the previous step to set the end point.

11. When prompted for the angle of the property line that will be used to define each lot, select a point east of the parcel near Pt 3, shown in Figure 2-43. For the second point, press the <Ctrl> key, right-click, and select Perpendicular. Then select the line at Pt 4. '

12. When prompted to Accept results, press <Enter>.

13. When prompted to select another parcel to subdivide, press <Enter> to end the command.

14. Enter X at the Command Line to exit the layout tool.


Task 2 - Rename and renumber parcels.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous task, or open the file PCL1-B2-Parcels.dwg.


- Pi 2 JrEndpoint

Figure 2-43

Parcel to besubdivided

Parcels Level 1

In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Parcel-Create parcel.

Before renaming the newly created parcels, you first have to change the label style of the original parcel. Select the parcel label RESIDENTIAL BLK1 R1, right click, and select Edit Area section Label Style. Select Parcel Name - Area as the style and click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box, as shown in Figure 2-44.

u wirerramej

Repeat LABELSTYLEEDIT Recent Input

Isolate Objects Clipboard

Basic Modify Tools Display Order|HLl Properties... [j^Quick; Select...Move to Site- Copy to Site...

Parcel Properties...Edit Parcel Style..._______---------------------------------,Edit Area Selection Label Style..^

: Label Toggle Label PinObject Viewer-

Figure 2-44

Rename and renumber the lots so that you have the same numbering system. In the Modify tab > Design panel, select Parcel. This displays the Parcel Ribbon tab.

Properties Gi

Object Viewer Isolate Objects

Multiple Parcel Properties

IpL?

Renumber/Rename J Prope-bes * Geometry Elevations Parcel Layout Tools

Grading Creation Tools Quick Prof-ie

. Create | Poiits

Close

Genera! Tools

Modify •»■ Launch Pad

C cse

In the Parcel tab > Modify panel, select Renumber/Rename, as shown in Figure 2-45.


c □ y-

■, .1 » prixja. at

4.

5.

^ n □Add Aod Ren'jTiber Labels " Tables " Tags

Labels & Tables

Figure 2-45


In the Renumber/Rename Parcel dialog box, select the Rename option. Select the Specify the parcel names option and click

, as shown in Figure 2-46.

o Rename

o Specify the parcel names

Figure 2-46

In the Name Template dialog box, enter BLK1-Lot with a space after it in the Name field, as shown in Figure 2—47. Select Next Counter in the Property Fields drop-down list and click

to apply the changes and close the

dialog box.

jfc, Name TemplateName formatting template Property fields: I Next CounterName:BLK1 Lot <[Next Counter] >

Incremental number format Number style:1, 2, 3...

Increment value:1

Cancel

Figure 2-47

8. In the Renumber/Rename Parcel dialog box, click accept the changes and close the dialog box.


[ Insert OK. Click

S3

Insert

Starting number:

HelpOK

OKto

Parcels Level 1

9. When prompted for the points, select all of the parcels to be renumbered. Select the three points shown in Figure 2-48 and press <Enter> to complete the selection. Press <Enter> again to exit the command.

k

Ptt

Figure 2-48


Task 3 - Edit parcels using Swing Line - Edit.

In this task, you adjust the last three lots of the parcel (or lotting plan)so that they are more marketable.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous task, or open the file PCL1-B3-Parcels.dwg.

2. You first want to adjust the Lot line between Parcel 3 and Parcel 4. In the Home tab > Create Design panel, select Parcel. In the expanded list select Parcel Creation Tools.

3. In the Parcel Layout Tools toolbar, select Swing Line - Edit, as shown in Figure 2-49.

0 ER 13


•om th Qj / Slide Line - Create

Figure 2-49


4. In the Create Parcel - Layout dialog box, set the following parameters, as shown in Figure 2-50:

• Site: C3D Training

• Parcel Style: Single-Family

• Area Label style: Parcel Name - Area

5. At this point, you do not want to label segments so do not enable

this option. Click ------- — - - - - when done.

6. When prompted to select the parcel line to adjust, select the parcel line between Lot 3 and Lot 4.

7. When prompted for the parcel to adjust, select Lot 3.

8. When prompted for the start frontage, select the bottom right corner of Lot 3, pt1. When prompted for the end of the frontage, select the top right corner of lot 4, pt2.

9. When prompted for the swing point, select the end point of pt3.

10. When prompted to accept the results, enter yes and press <Enter>.

11. You have the desired results for Lot 3. However, Lot 4 is 955.74 m2 [10225.00 sqft] and Lot 5 is 1492.55m2 [16130.09 sqft]. You want to somewhat even-sized lots, each being approximately 1224 m2 [13,177.5 sqft]. Show the Parcel Layout Tools toolbar if it is not visible.

12. You should still be in the Swing Line - Edit command. (If not, repeat Steps 2-3 of this task.)


Lot 5 Block (1492.55m2i

Bock i00m2)

Lot 3 pt1y*TLot 2rElock 1

Figure 2-50

Adjust _________

Parcels Level 1

13. In the Parcel Layout Tools toolbar, click to expand it. Change the minimum area to 1224 [13,177.5 sqft]. Collapse the

toolbar if needed by clicking <-> .

14. When prompted to select the parcel line to adjust, select the parcel line between Lot 4 and Lot 5 (Line 1).

15. When prompted for the parcel to adjust, select Lot 4.

16. When prompted for the start frontage, select the bottom right corner of Lot 4, pt1. When prompted for the end of the frontage, select the top right corner of lot 5, pt2.

17. When prompted for the swing point, select the end point of pt3, as shown in Figure 2-51.

18. When prompted to accept the results, enter yes and press <Enter>.

19. Press <Esc> <Esc> or click the X in the Parcel Layout Tools dialog box to close it.

20. If time permits, perform the same steps as described above to subdivide Parcels Block 2 and Block 3.



Figure 2-51


Review Questions

How do you create or subdivide parcels interactively?

Which Parcel Create command enables you to hold a specified angle relative to the Right-Of-Way?


Question 1

Question 2

Parcels Level 1

Section 3: Parcel Reports, Annotation, and Tables

2.5 Parcel Reports............................................................................2-42

2.6 Parcel Labels..............................................................................2-43

2.7 Parcel Tabies.............................................................................2-45

Reporting on and Annotating the Parcel Layout........................ 2-47Task 1: Add Parcel labels.......................................................... 2-47Task 2: Create Line and Curve Segment Tables.......................2-48Task 3: Create a Parcel Area Table...........................................2-50Task 4: Create a Parcel Report..................................................2-52



2,5 Parcel Reports

AutoCAD Civil 3D has several types of parcel reports. Parcel Inverse and Mapcheck data is available through the Analysis tab of the Parcel Properties dialog box, as shown in Figure 2-52. The report can be generated clockwise or counter-clockwise, and the point of beginning can be specified.

12 Parcel Properties - Single-Family: 26

Information j Composition Analysts j User Defined Properties j• Analysis- ---------------f* Inverse analysis C Mapcheck anaJyas17 Enafcfc chafc

r-CataJabon SittingsPant of x: Y: beginning: r- ,------|*tc .... • | :cs. •.•■.• •V Frocess se^nent order .-.otrtetdoctewse

Port of Besnrtng : North: 10334.4639' East: 4660.0327' Segment #1 : LineCourse: N62* SS' S4"W Length: 132.28?-

North: 10364.6812" East: 4562.236Z

Segment 32 : UneCourse: NSS" 49' 16"E length: ^.SS? North: 10453.1906' East: 4692.5765'

Segment #3 : LineCourse: N85° 40' 18"E Length: 3S.79ff North: 104S5.8918' East: 4728.2639'

| OK 1 Cancel | apply | __Hefp__|

Figure 2-52

This dialog box does not enable output. If you want to generate a printable report, use AutoCAD Civil 3D Toolbox. It includes several stock Parcel-related reports (such as Surveyor Certificates, Inverse and Mapcheck reports, Metes and Bounds), as shown in Figure 2-53.


_inlxj

Parcels Level 1


Figure 2-53


2.6 Parcel Labels

Parcel area labels are a means of graphically selecting a parcel, such as when creating Right-of-Ways. In the Parcel creation and editing examples, you had parcel segment labels created for you automatically. This section explores the functionality of these labels in more depth.

The Add Labels dialog box (Annotate > Add Labels > Parcel > Add Parcel Labels...) can be used to assign the desired label styles and place labels in the drawing. It can set the line, curve, and spiral styles and toggle between single and multiple segment labeling, as well as access the Tag Numbering Table. The dialog box is shown in Figure 2-54.

mimnmm. »i?I*Feature:[parcel 3Label type:|Single Segment ID|Line label style;

Bearing over Distance 3

Curve label style:Delta over Length and Ra( [jf?i-| J5|j

Table Tag Numbering

Reference text object prompt method:

Command Line "-lAdd | Close [ Help

__________________________A

Figure 2-54

• Parcel labels, as with all AutoCAD Civil 3D labels, are capable of rotating and resizing to match changes in the viewport scale and rotation.

• A segment label has two definitions: composed and dragged state. A dragged state can be quite different from the original label definition.

• AutoCAD Civil 3D software can label segments while sizing parcels. • Labeling can be read clockwise or counter-clockwise around the

parcel.• Labels can be added through an external reference file using the same

commands that label objects in their source drawing. This makes it easier to have multiple plans that need different label styles.

• The Replace Multiple Labels option is useful when you want to replace a number of parcel segment labels with another style. However, if you are labeling through an external reference file, labels created in the source drawing cannot be modified.

Parcel Area labels are controlled using Parcel Area Label Styles, which control the display of custom information (such as the parcel number, area, perimeter, address, etc.). You can create more than one parcel area label, for example, if you need to show different parcel information on different sheets. An example is shown in Figure 2-55.


Parcels Level 1

Parcel Segment labels annotate the line and curve segments of a parcel, as shown in Figure 2-56. You can label all segments of a parcel with one click or label only selected parcel segments.

All labels have two definitions: one for the original location, and another when it is moved from its original location. A dragged label can remain as originally defined or can be changed to stacked text.


Figure 2-55

Figure 2-56


2.7 Parcel Tables

Parcel tables are an alternative to labeling individual parcel areas and segments. An example is shown in Figure 2-57.

Parcel Line and Curve Table

Line #/Curve § Length Bearing/Delta Radius

L76 112.01 N4' 08' 12.22"W

111 395.08 N85" 33" 05.19"E

L78 471.49 N85* 33' 05.19"E

L79 210.99 N4* 17' 33.13"W

L80 211.55 N4" 17' 33.13"W

L81 115.43 S25" 31' 05.98"W

Figure 2-57

When creating a table, AutoCAD Civil 3D software changes the parcel segment labels to an alpha-numeric combination, called a tag. A tag with L stands for line and C stands for curve. A segment's tag has a corresponding entry in the table.

• A table can only represent a selected set of label styles. • The Add Existing option, as shown in Figure 2-58, creates a table

from existing objects. New objects will not be added to the table. The Add Existing and New option will create a table with existing as well as new objects.

13 Table f r ration

Table layer:

IHI Length & Bearing or Defta I Radius Select by labd or style:

Selection... | AppfrLabei Style Name________i curve: Prt-a. . Add E'-ivtro

Sanew! itxvc: Deta... Add ExfelivjI'SansralCurve: vm^.ypi.tj :•""•■ ,General curva: Gradp.

jAddExistint ^)I General curve; Grs-i., ESEEB^BH |General curve: fr^iVJExdtrig and New^ I General cut ve: See. J^L' CML.'JIU g Gtr.-er d oji ve:

See.. Adc Eating jgGer-.2r -4 curve: Stsn... Add Eating tmx S*?

rir.q... Add Exts^ig <S>r?er^ ime: Bearing... Adc ExeUarig

j Mo lags selected.

P Spit table Maximum raw per table: Maxtmm tables per stack: Offset: Tile tables:Behavw Reactivity mode:

OK | Caned | Help

Figure 2-58


MB

Table style:

5 d~3 Kj j C-PROP-TA6L

|20j 3

[0.5000-

C Dovtfl

Across

C Static I* Dynamic

Parcels Level 1

• A table can have a dynamic link between a segment's tag and table entry. If the segment changes, the table entry updates.

• AutoCAD Civil 3D switches a label to a tag by changing the Display mode from Label to Tag, as shown in Figure 2-59.


NT-MM.U+ln'^Hfl-j-hi.llUVifInfalnattxi General j Layout j Dragged State jSumtRary j Pr

eview

jparcel Line Label Style

Progart ___S label

Text Style Label Visibility

110.0000 (d) false

Pt | Cancel | Apply | Help |

Figure 2-59

Layer

B Behavior

Orientation Reference Forced El Plan

Plan Readable ReadabJty

Sas RID

Anchors with Text


Reporting on and Annotating the Parcel Layout

Task 1 - Add Parcel labels.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice or open the file PCL1-C1-Parcels.dwg from one of the following folders:

Metric:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-M\Drawings\Parcels

Imperial:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-l\Drawings\Parcels

2. In the Annotate tab > Labels & Tables panel, select Add Labels, as shown in Figure 2-60.

i^ffia Annotate 1

©nA A B t

A ✓

Scfd Add Multiline CHec

Labels ' Tables"

Text * Speflii

Labels & "ables »

Figure 2-60

3. In the Add Labels dialog box, set the following parameters, as shown in Figure 2-61:

• Feature: Parcel

• Label type: Multiple Segment

• Line label style: Azimuth over Distance

• Curve label style: Delta over Length and Radius

Add Labels i. ffFeature:

ParcelLabel type:

Multple Segment ▼Line label style:

Azimuth over

Distance ▼ Curve

label style:

■w


Practice 2c

Parcels Level 1

Delta over Length and Rai ▼

Figure 2-61

Hf?

•W m



4. Click

5. When prompted to select the Parcels you want to annotate, select the single-family parcel labels in Model Space.

6. When prompted for the label direction, enter CL for clockwise and press <Enter>.

7. Repeat the previous three steps for all remaining single- family parcels.

8. Press <Enter> when done labeling the parcels.

9. Click the X in the Add Labels dialog box or click ——— to close the dialog box.


Task 2 - Create Line and Curve Segment Tables.

Labels are overlapping in a number of locations, making the drawing difficult to read. In this task, you try two methods to fix this. In the first method, you simply drag the label to a location where there is no conflict. In the second method, you add a label tag and an associated table.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous task, or open the file PCL1-C2-Parce!s.dwg.

2. In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Parcel-Add Tag1.


Parcels can also be labeled in an XREF file.

Add

Parcels Level 1

3. Select the label 3.64m [8.91ft], select the square grip, and drag to place the label in a location where there is no conflict. Do the same for the label 6.37m [24.21ft], as shown in Figure 2-62.

Figure 2-62

4. You will now add tags and a table. In the Annotate tab > Label & Tables panel, select Add Tables > Parcel > Add segment, as shown in Figure 2-63.

-abeis & • Add Point Tab.e I TootSfHK □ Add Surface

Legend "able<3

Figure

ParcelAlignment Pipe Network


BLK2—Lot 10 (10227.70 ft2)

* ELK2—Lot 10 (9 50.00m 2)

BLK2—Lot 10

( I022~.~0 ft2)

100* 24' 47"24.21ft

_100* 35' /

8.31ft

?0(v

ABC Sta-ds'<i ✓

Multiline CneclcText " Spe'-nq

0.200

A

► Q Add Line Add

Cuave

m


Figure 2-63



In the Table Creation dialog box, click and select the labels shown in Figure 2-64. Press <Enter> when done.(Select on screen)

oQ

> (i E

o oFigure 2-64

When prompted to convert labels to tags or to not add labels, select Convert all selected label styles to tag mode.

OKto close the Table Creation dialog box.

When prompted for a location for the table, select a location in an open space, as shown in Figure 2-65.

pQTCvi L l a r c ) Curv* ' . ..

<

!,! •«• rf

Figure 2-65


Task 3 - Create a Parcel Area Table.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous task, or open the file PCL1 -C3-Parcels.dwg

2. In the Annotate tab > Label & Tables panel, select Add Tables > Parcel > Add Area.


oy

6.

7.

8.

Click


3. In the Table Creation dialog box, select the style name Parcel Name - Area in the Select by label or style section, as shown in Figure 2-66. All parcels with this style will be selected. Click OK to close the dialog box.

Select by label or style:Label Style Name

Selectio...

Apply

4$Name Area & Perimeter

Add Exi...

□

^JjName Square meter & Acres

Add Exi...

□

t .aa c„;

q

Kg . _ fflH J^jf Add Exi...

El

T3

Figure 2-66

Parcel Area Table

Lot Area Perimeter

Segment Lengths Segment Bearings

BLK1-LM 1 10225.00ft; 407.10 126.51 69.02 20.88 109.83 80.86

M89' 53' 04.33'E ST 18' 04.7e"W S46" 13' 04.73"W 1458' 41' 55.21 "W NO' Of 55.61"W

BLKl-Lot 2 10225.00ft"

415.37 123.35 80.25 126.51 80.23

N89- ZS' 04.3i.VE sr is' 04.7S"w S89' 5?' 04.39"W NO' 01' 55.61" W

BLKI-Lot 3 10225.00*/ 418.37 132.28 5S.70 128.38 91.51

S79' 12' 46.3S"E ST 15' 04.79'W SSS' 54' 04.39"W NO' 01' 55.61*W

Parcel Area Table

Lot Area Perimeter

Segment Lengths Segment Becrings

BLK1-L0t 1 950.00m; 124.0£>

126.51 69.02 20.36 109.82. 50.35

89" 58' 04" 1ST 18' 05" 226- IS' 05" 271* 18' 05" 359' 58' 04"

6LK1 -Lot 2 S50.00m: 126.61 126.36 80.26 126.51 60.24

8-3' 58' 04" 131' 18' 05" 269" 53' 04" 335" 53' 04"

BLH-Lol 3 950.00m; 127.67 132.25 66.72 128,38 91.50

100' 46' 26" 161' 18' 05" 269" 53' 04" 309* 58' 04"

4. Click a location to insert the table into the drawing, as shown in Figure 2-67.

2-52 © 2011, ASCENT- Center for Technical Knowledge®

Figure 2-67


Parcels Level 1

Task 4 - Create a Parcel Report.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous task, or open the file PCL1-C4-Parcels.dwg.

2. If the Toolbox tab is not visible, go to the Home tab >

Palettes panel, and click ® (Toolbox), as shown in Figure 2-

68.

In the Toolbox tab, expand the Reports Manager and Parcel collections. Right-click on Surveyor's Certificate and select Execute.

4. In the Export to LandXML dialog box, click drawing), located at the bottom left of the dialog box.

When prompted to select a parcel, select one of the single-family lots created earlier and press <Enter>.

In the Export to XML Report dialog box, notice that only the Lots

you selected now have a check mark. Click -------- — ----- to close the dialog box.

In the Save As dialog box, enter the desired file name for the

report and click ------ ---------- to close.


3.Toolbox

Palettes ▼Figure 2-S8

St(Pick from

5.

6.

7.

Parcels Level 1

8. Review the report, as shown in Figure 2-69, and close the web browser,

Purveyor's Certifies:-? for Parce? Lot ? Block 1 - Windows Internet Exploiei—----"•*<-------—------- ------------ - - -—^ J'-J ri C:\Usi^iMar\AppDiiU\Ro«niing\Autodeik\C3D2011\<nu\SupporftCivjlReport_html t* Window: Live B<ng E ■» What"; New Profile Ma.l Photos Calendar MSNte & Surveyor's Certificate for Parcel Lot 2 Bock 1

Parcel Lot 2 Block 1

SURVEYOR'S CERTIFICATEI, Preparer Registered Land Surveyor, do hereby certify that I have surveyed, divided and mapped

Parcel BLKl-Lot 1

SURVEYOR'S CERTIFICATE

I. Preparer Retnstered Land Survrvor do hereby ccrtjfv- that I have surveyed, dr.xied. and mapped

more particdartv described as-

Coramenciwr at a point of Northing 620829.681 and Easting 1906946.199;thence bearing N 89-58-4.387 E a distance of 39.130 meters;thcncc bearing S 1-18-4.794 W a tfistance of 24.463 meters;thence bearine S S9-58-4.3S7 W a distance of 38.561 meters :thence besting N 0-1 -55.613 W a distance of 24.456 meters lo the point of be ginning.Said described parcel con tarns 950.000 square meters (0.095 hectares), more or less, subject to any and aB easements, reservations, restriction!, and conveyances of record.more particuJartv described as:

Commencing at a point of Northing 2036758.469 and Easting 6256372.700 ;thence bearing N 89-58-4.387E adistance of 126.511 :thence beanng S l-IS-4.794 Wadistaace of 69.016 .thence bearing S 46-1S-4794 U'a distance of 20.879 .(hcace brain; N 88-41-55.206 W a detanrrcf 109.832thcnce bearing N* 0-1-55.613 W a distance of 80.858 to the point oibcgBttftflSaid described parcel contains 10225.000 sqoare feet (0.235 acres), more or less, sribjectto any and a easements, reservations, restrictions and convevances of record.

Figure 2-69



Surveyor's Certificate for Parcel BLKl-Loti


Either of these formats can be opened in word processors such as Microsoft Word, which can read all of the formatting displayed in the web browser. Report settings, such as the Preparer's name, can be assigned by clicking Report Settings in the Toolspace.


Review Questions

What are the two types of AutoCAD Civil 3D Parcel labels?

What does the Add Labels dialog box do?

What are parcel tables an alternative to?

3-1

Question 1

Question 2

Question 3


Module 3

Survey Level 1


Section 1:

Civil 3D

Survey

ToolspaceS Survey Workflow OverviewS Introduction to the Survey

Toolspace

<S The Survey ToolspaceS Survey NetworksSection 2: Civil 3D Points V Points OverviewS Point Label Styles

Point Settings

S Creating Points


✓ Transparent Command

Description Key Sets

Importing and Exporting Points

Point Groups

Reviewing and Editing Points

Locking/Unlocking Points

Point Reports

Section 3: Civil 3D Survey Figures S Survey Figures S Importing a Field Book S Working with Figures

5-1


Section 1: Civil 3D Survey Toolspace

3.1 Survey Workflow Overview.......................................................3-4

3.2 Introduction to the Survey

Toolspace..........................................................................................3-8

3.3 The Survey Toolspace.............................................................3-10

Creating a Survey Database.................................................. 3-12

3.4 Survey Networks......................................................................3-17

Creating a Survey Network.................................................... 3-19Task 1: Open drawing and database................................................................................... 3-19Task 2: Create a network...........................................................3-19

3.1 Survey Workflow Overview

This module focuses on automated Field to Finish tools that aid in drafting an accurate and efficient "Existing Condition Plan". These tools create a correct existing topography, property lines, right-of-way, and center line locations.


Workflow

To create linework from coordinate files use the following survey workflow:

1. Data needs to be entered into the data collector. The proper language, methodology, and basic rules regarding data entry into the data collector begin with an understanding of Figure Commands and Field Codes (raw descriptions).

2. Data can be transferred from the data collector to the computer using an ASCII file. An ASCII file can be opened in Notepad and data can be separated or delineated by spaces or commas. The most popular transferred format is Point Number, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description. This material focuses on the different types of Descriptions that can be entered into a data collector so that the user obtains the desired automated symbology and linework.

7-1


3. If using a field book file (a type of ASCII file), data needs to be converted from the raw coordinate file to a field book (*.fbk)using Survey Link or other methods of AutoCAD® Civil 3D® application. Autodesk® has collaborated with major survey equipment vendors to develop API and drivers that will interface their specific survey equipment (Trimble Link, TDS Survey Link, Leica X-Change, TOPCON Link, etc.) to AutoCAD Civil 3D.

If following the Linework Code Set command format, you do not need to convert the coordinate file to a field book. All that is required is to import the file with linework processing turned on.

4. AutoCAD Civil 3D needs to have all the necessary Styles, Settings, and Figure Prefixes to create, sort, and place points and linework on the desired layers.

The surveying department can substantially increase productivity and


efficiency by standardizing field codes and figure commands, as well as learning some new fundamentals. This new knowledge enables field and office staff to better coordinate their efforts.Data Entry in the Field

Entering field data using methodology that takes advantage of AutoCAD Civil 3D analysis and drafting tools (that utilizes automated linework connectivity) can save a significant amount of time in the office. As the figure is essentially created during the survey field pick up, this workflow reduces discrepancy and interpretation as to what exists in the field. The linework can be part of the final deliverable building outlines, surface breakline center line of pavement, parcel segment, control lines, etc.

Retracement methodology used to establish boundary, traverse closure and adjustments, and error findings are not always the surveyor's focus. Many of these functions are easily calculated in AutoCAD Civil 3D application. Third party software and data collectors can also perform these same functions out

9-1


in the field during the survey. With the rise in popularity of GPS units, the need for traverse, setups, or back sights is reduced.

Field crews are the "witnesses" to a site and should be responsible for drawing the lines. Errors are made by office surveyors and draftsman when analyzing hand-drawn field sketches and many hours can be spent connecting points and solving connection errors.

Survey Results as Coordinate Files

There are two methods of importing point files containing the Point Number, Northing, Easting, Elevation, and Description. One is through the point creation tool and the other is through the Survey Database.

When importing point files outside the Survey Database through the point creation tool, the Description Key Sets, Point Groups, and Point and Label Styles work together to categorize points into layers, organize points into


groups, and display symbols. However no line work is generated. When importing files through the Survey Database, you have all the benefits of importing through the point creation tool, as well as automatic line generation and additional features.

Preparing Coordinate Files for Linework

A coordinate file produces linework when it contains survey figure codes that match preset figure prefixes in AutoCAD Civil 3D software and/or have the proper figure commands before or after them. Survey codes are field-entered values and when processed correctly, will create the desired linework within the AutoCAD Civil 3D drawing.There are two strategies to processing the files to generate figures (linework). The first is to convert the coordinate file to a field book file. The resulting field book contains figure control commands that create the linework. For some time, this was the only option to create figures. The major disadvantages to the field book language is that it requires

11-1


the user to only input commands defined by Autodesk. These commands are hard-coded and the user cannot customize them to conform to legacy methodology. The most popular method used to create a field book is with Autodesk's Survey Link, which was created before the MCE and MCS (multiple curve start and end commands) came into existence; therefore, it does not recognize these commands. Lastly, curve observations in the field must be consecutive. This means that when a curve is started the rodman has to complete the curve before another non-curve shot can be taken. One of the major advantages of the use of a field book format is the ability to use the analysis tools within the networks created in the Survey Database.

An innovation in Survey is the introduction of Linework Code Sets. A code set is by default the traditional field book language codes. A coordinate file with valid Linework Code Set commands produces the same figure that comes from importing a field book


without having to convert the file to a field book.

A Linework Code Set is changeable, whereas the field book language is not. For example, in a field book, B is the only way to begin a figure. In a Linework Code Set, you can enter almost any character as a starting figure command. Offices that use numbers for descriptions can now use numbers to start a figure. In the following portion of code, the number 1 starts a figure:

7,631397.3883,2208901.6900,809.6300,1 EPA

By default, the letter 'B' starts a figure instead of number 1, as shown in the following portion of code:

7,631397.3883,2208901.6900,809.6300,B EPA

The second advantage to Linework Code Sets is when importing, they manage all the starts, ends, and continues without actually being in the coordinate file. Finally, Linework Code Sets support multiple point curves without the points having to be consecutive points. You can now create

13-1


multiple point curves (more than three points) with other described points between the points creating the curve. The field book method does not support this.In the practice for this section, you will process a coordinate file to a field book, import it, and review the resulting linework. In the second practice, you import the coordinate file directly without having to create a field book and get the same results.

These two methods assume no adjustment is needed since the files contain coordinates, not observations. A later section will use a survey with observations to create linework. From the import of this file type, you are able to perform an adjustment if desired.

3.2 Introduction to the Survey Toolspace

The Survey Toolspace displays a panel through which all surveys are processed. Survey uses graphics to display field book imports, figure and


network previews, and points. If you toggle off these graphics, you can process a survey without a drawing being open. If you want to view these graphics, you will have to have a drawing open. Survey will remind you if you do not have one open.

Displaying the Survey Toolspace

To display the Survey Toolspace, click the Survey Toolspace icon on the Ribbon's Home tab. Clicking this icon toggles the Toolspace on and off.

Survey Database Tree

The Survey tab displays a tree that contains a list of local Survey Databases, the Equipment, Figure Prefix, and Linework Code Set databases. The local surveys are in a user-defined working folder. This folder does not have to contain any drawings.

The Equipment, Figure Prefix, and Linework Code Set databases reside in a Survey folder that is in the local or network folder. Survey settings enable

15-1


you to point to a relocated folder and its databases.

Typical Survey Database Settings

Surveys are either in a State Plane Coordinate system or an assumed coordinate system (e.g., 5000 for Northing and 5000 for Easting). Either of these coordinates systems are typed into a data collector at the first survey control found by the field crew. In AutoCAD Civil 3D, these different settings can be stored as definitions that the user assigns when creating a database, or assigned by editing a survey's settings.

Survey Protocol

Only one Survey Database can be edited at a time. When opened for editing, this prepares the survey for reading and writing. The process is analogous to Autodesk's previous Civil/Survey software, AutoCAD Land Desktop, where an external database in a project folder stored all the various data that was created in the drawing.


There are options to set the path or location for the Survey Database project files, as well as all the settings. When the user creates a new Survey Database, a Windows folder is created with the same name. If you close a drawing with a survey open, the Survey Database will close automatically. You must start a new drawing and then open the required Survey Database. You can only have one Survey Database open at a time.

3.3 The Survey Toolspace

After collecting and coding the data, downloading and converting it, the next step in Survey is to import the survey data, review it, and place the survey points and figures into a drawing.

Survey is a Toolspace, accessed through a panel in the Ribbon, in the Toolspace, or the Survey pull-down menu. It contains Survey settings, Equipment defaults, Figure Prefixes, and Linework Code Sets. Survey's settings can be on a local or network folder. Using a network folder is

17-1


preferred for larger offices because all users can then standardize the file values.

A working folder defines where the local Survey Database resides. Again, the preferred location is a network folder, in which you place the local Survey Databases.

If your Toolspace does not display the Survey tab, click the Survey Toolspace icon in Ribbon's Home tab > Palettes panel to display it, as shown in Figure 3-1.

# k f1

1 Home

Insert AnnotateAutoCAD Civil

3D s4odify Analyze View Output

Tccisp

sce

Palett

es

J J) Import Survey Data a - - 5

- m

hi?-

▼

[ Survey Toolspace

Opens or doses the Toolspace Survey tab which is the primary interface for

▼


r

working with survey data

P Toolspace

M OST, CST

Press F1 for more help

-........ 1 —-------------- —wr^rsr^nn----—---------------------

Figure 3-1

The Survey tab accesses the Survey settings and databases.

The Survey User Settings dialog box sets the defaults for all new Survey Databases. You should set these before starting Survey.

The Survey Working Folder is the location for all Survey Databases and can be local or on the network. The default working folder isC:\Civil 3D ProjectsYSurvey Database

A Survey Database is a subfolder in the working folder. The Survey Working Folder contains the Survey's settings and observation database. This database contains the Survey's Networks, Figures, and Survey Points.

19-1


Each local Survey Database references files to perform some of its tasks. The Equipment Database is an *.edb file and the Figure Prefix Database is an *. fdb file. The Equipment settings file contains values to estimate errors for the Least Squares adjustment process. The Figure Prefix Database lists definitions for Survey figures (figure style and layers).The default location for these files is C:\Documents and Settings\AII Users\Application Data\Autodesk\C3D 2011\enu\Survey.

Note: Survey Database folders cannot be deleted within AutoCAD Civil 3D Survey. If you want to delete the working folder, for example, this process must be manually done external to AutoCAD. Civil 3D.

Survey has four nodes: Import Events, Networks, Figures, and Survey Points. Import Events is where files are imported into the Survey's networks. The files can be a coordinate, a field book, a LandXML file, and points from a drawing. When importing a file, depending on its contents, the import results in figures and points.


Information in the file also populates portions of a Survey's Network.

When importing a coordinate or field book file containing only coordinates, the Figures and Survey Points nodes are your focus.

When processing a file with observations, turned angles, zenith angles, slope distances, and setups, your focus is the network and its nodes.

21-1

Survey Level 1

Creating a Survey Database

As of the printing of this book (June 2011) Depending on your current installation you may experience an issue (images inserted via FDO do not display). To resolve, at the command prompt enter "mapwspace" and when prompted enter "on". Hit the <enter> key to rerun the command and enter "off". This sequence of turning on and off the map work space initiates the Map 3D tools. This must be done prior to opening the drawing and needs to be done only once in the Civil 3D sessionIn this practice

you will set up a Survey project.

1. Open the file SUV1 -A1 -

Survey.dwg from one of the following folders:

Metric:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-

M\Drawings\Survey Imperial:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-l\

Drawings\Survey

2. The arial imaginary used in this module was attached via the

AutoCAD® Map 3D FDO connection. (For more information on Map FDO functionality, please refer to the program help file). You might have to enter regen at the Command prompt if the imagehides your AutoCAD® or civil objects.

3. To toggle on the Survey tab, click the Survey Toolspace icon in the Ribbon's Home tab > Palettes panel, as shown in Figure 3-2.


Practice 3a

Figure 3-2


4. Select the Survey tab on the Toolspace.

5. The Survey Toolspace displays four nodes: Survey Databases, Equipment Databases, Figure Prefix Databases, and Linework Code Sets. Each has a Sample database with default values. Expand the Equipment Database until you see the Sample database.


Survey Level 1

6. To create an Equipment database, right-click on the Equipment Database and select New, as shown on the left in Figure 3-3. Enter Training as the equipment database name, as shown on

to accept and close the dialog box.

S. New Equipment Database

Enter a unique name for the new equipment database.

Cancel

7. To open the Equipment Properties dialog box, select

Training, right-click, and select Manage Equipment database.... Civil 3D saves the Equipment database files in the folder shown in Figure 3-4. Note that Figure 3-4 is based on Microsoft Windows 7. Other operating systems will have a different location to the files.

Name^Sample C:\ProgramData\Airtodesk\C3D 2011\enu\

Survey\ Sample.edb_xdef

C:\ProgramData\Autcdesk\C3D 2011\enu\Survey\Training.edb_xdef

Figure 3-4

8. Review the settings. When done, click OK to close the dialog box.


OK

the right, and click

M survey Koirn uroups

&■ ® BfflBMBPWBHHI

Refresh Figi___________________

Figure 3-3OK

Path

raining


9. To set the working folder for the Survey Database, in the Survey tab, select Survey Databases, right-click, and select Set working folder..., as shown on the left in Figure 3-5. Browse and select folder C:\Civil 3DProjects\Civil3D-training-Geomatics/Survey-Projects, as shown

on the right. When done, click

Browse For Folder

Set Working Folder

* Local Disk (C:)

ToolspaceM si- y?

S © Equipr New local survey database.,ht) Sai f fr, Tra

RefreshFigure; ffl ffi

Linework Code Setsi> ,03c985d7400208c60c8e2a01

l> _ autodesk!> Civil 3D Project Templates* Civil 3D Projects

* CiviBD-trairiing-Geomatics^^^^Survev-PickuD^

F CiviBD-training-I* Civil3D-training-M

Figure 3-5

10. To create a new local Survey Database, select SurveyDatabases in the Survey tab, right-click, and select New local survey database..., as shown on the left in Figure 3-6. Enter Survey Data as the name of the Survey Database, as shown on

jj-, New Local Survey Database

Enter the name of the folder in which to create the new survey database.

Cancel

Tf


OK

to close the dialog box.

f Set working fo!der.„

T

OK

6 Toolspace

^ % D 0

i gj F

Set working

folder... Refresh

the right. Click to accept and close the dialog box

gEEfgHE ^New local survey database^

OK

Survey Level 1

Figure 3-6


ffi- ku Linework Code Sets


11. A Survey Database is now created in the Survey tab, as shown on the left in Figure 3-7. This Survey Database is actually a folder that exists under the specified Geomatics working folder, as shown on the right.

I &OrganizeInclude in library ▼

Local Disk (C:) 03c985d7400208c60c8e2a01 autodesk

Civil 3D Project Templates Civil 3D Projects Civil3D-training-Geomatics Survey-Pickup Jj, Survey-Projects Survey Data Surveyl Data B Surveyl Data C Surveyl Data I Surveyl Data N2 Sun/eyl Data O Surveyl Data_Complete Civil3D-training-I Civil3D-training-M


I Home KE B ^ ^ ^ S

Toolspace

eg %

0 Import Survey Data Points Surfaces *

D S

Palettes -

Create Ground Data »

I d & S © Q ^ ( S I X A I N

i Toolspace

[2

A

« Civil3D-training-Geomatics

i'l'lll^'i—^WWW'I www

Sha

Survey Level 1

Figure 3-7

12. To edit the Survey Database settings, select Survey Data, right-click, and select Edit survey database settings..., as

shown in Figure 3-8.

Close survey database Display change report... Translate Survey Database...

[II,] Figure Group. Q sufv£y databa'5e ^ting^

0 Survey Points^^ar)age ^^ properties^ Survey Point! " -----Surveyl Data B !mPort

Figure 3-8


B /fg Survey Databases

!

Survey Data

i J Import Event IS Networks

[itS] Network

Grot Figures

Q


Meter, as shown in Figure 3-9,

and click although some of the survey was done in CA83-VI, you can import the survey data to any coordinate system or units and AutoCAD Civil 3D software will convert the coordinates and units in the drawing.

^ Select Coordinate Zone ZoneCategories:Available coordinate systems:

NAD83 California State Planes, Zone VI. MeterSelected coordrate system code: CA8S-VI Description:NAD83 CaWomia State Planes, Zone VI. Meter Projection:IM

Datum: NAD83

OK | [ Cancel

Figure 3-9

l-Jjtf Units

— Coordinatezone CAS3-VI■••• Distance Meter- Angle Degrees DMS

(DDD.MMSSS)— Direction North Azimuths

Temperature Celsius— Pressure Millimeters Hg

14. Set the Distance to Meter, the Direction to North Azimuths, the Temperature to Celsius, and the Pressure to Millimeters Hg, as


Note that

OK

13. Under Units in the dialog box, click d for the Coordinate Zone and set the zone to NAD83 California State Planes, Zone VI,

£2

j USA, CakfoffM

Help

OK to close theshown in Figure 3-10. When done, click dialog box.

Property

ValueFigure 3-10

Survey Level 1

3*4 Survey Networks

A local Survey Database has one or more networks. You can import one or more field books or point flies into a network when the Survey spans more than one field book or point file. Networks are usually a day of field work, for example. The larger the area of interest, the greater number of networks needed. At least one network is necessary when importing files to create linework and points.

Before importing a Survey, you create a named network first or during the importation process. To create a new network, select the Survey's network heading, right-click, select New, and enter the network's name. After creating a named network, Survey creates five nodes below its name: Control Points, Non-Control Points, Directions, Setups, and Traverses, as shown in Figure 3-11.

§ Toolspace

^ Or ^

Survey Databases yjg Survey Datal&■■ Import Events ! 0 - R o a d - S u r v e y . f b k ! EE- Site-Survey2.txt | S-.Q Site-Survey3.fbk Networks S ExRoad j— A Control Points S ' O Non-Control Points Directions ^ Setups

o-ct—nTraverses Site Topo j-- [H?] Network Groups

® Figures ;•• [Eh] Figure Groups S O Survey Points •••••[pj] Sur/ey Point Groups Equipment Databases Figure Prefix Databases Linework Code Sets

Figure 3-11


%

0

B-

B

a

S-

iH,

A-IS


You can import one or several field books or LandXML files into the same network. By default, each import supplements the previous import. When you re-import a file, Survey automatically deletes the information from the original file import and recalculates the observations from the re-imported file.

Importing multiple files with the correct settings creates a single network whose data is the combination of the imported files. This allows you to create traverse(s), or perform a Least Squares analysis from data that spans more than one file.

When importing a file, Survey sequentially processes each line, creating setups and processing the setup's observations. When processing the setup's observations, Survey stores them in the observation database and calculates a point's preliminary coordinates from the observation values.

When toggling on interactive graphics, Survey displays the setups, draws figure linework, and populates the Control Points, Non-Control Points, Directions, and Setups.

When completing the import, Survey populates all or some of the nodes under the Networks heading.

Control points are NE or NEZ entries in a field book. Directions are azimuth entries between points used in the stationing process. Survey points are initially calculated coordinates from the file's setups and observations. Any NE SS entries become non-control points. These points have coordinates, but are not control points (not used in a setup or as stationing points). You can promote them to control points by using them as part of a traverse or referencing them as part of a setup.


Survey Level 1

Non-control points can also be the result of importing a point coordinate file instead of an observation-based file.



Creating a Survey Network

In this practice you will create a Survey network. This practice assumes that you have successfully created a Survey Database.

Task 1 - Open drawing and database.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice or open the file SUV1-A1-Survey.dwg.

2. Select the Survey tab.

3. Continue with the opened survey database from the previous task, or close the survey database that is currently open, and open Surveyl Data B. Refer to Appendix A-1 Opening a Survey Database, on how to open a survey database.

Task 2 - Create a network.

1. In the Survey tab, under Survey Databases, select the opened Data Base (it will be highlighted in bold), or open Surveyl Data B, select the Networks branch, right-click, and select New.

2. In the New Network dialog box, enter Site Topo for the network

name, as shown on the left in Figure 3-12, and click -——-----------------------------------------------------------------------------to create the network. The new network appears under the Survey Data1>Networks collection, as shown on the


Practice 3b

Survey Level 1

right. Expand the Site Topo network by clicking on its adjacent + sign.

Figure 3-12


S" T6 Survey Data0 Import EventsmL-

Site Topo ft\ Control

Points 0 Non-Control

Points

Direction

s ^ Setups

t. New Network

PropertyValue

E IS Network

j~ Name

Description


Review Questions

If you need linework, do the point files have to be brought into AutoCAD Civil 3D through the Survey Database? Or can the linework be created by importing points through the Prospector?

What are the major differences between using field books for creating linework and using text files with the P,N,E,Z,D format that use Linework Code Sets?

If you need to analyze the field data using the analysis tools available in the Survey Database, does this require a field book or a text file?


Question 1

Question 2

Question 3

Survey Level 1

Section 2: Civil 3D Points

3.5 Points Overview.......................................................................3-23

Point Marker Styles................................................................. 3-30Task 1: Add a Block Symbol...................................................... 3-30Task 2: Apply the point style.......................................................3-33

3.6 Point Label Styles....................................................................3-35

Point Label Styles ................................................................... 3-43Task 1: Create a Point Label Style's Components.................... 3-43Task 2: Apply a Point Label Style's Components.......................3-47

3.7 Point Settings...........................................................................3-48

3.8 Creating Points.........................................................................3-50

3.9 Transparent Command............................................................3-51

Creating AutoCAD Civil 3D Points......................................... 3-52

3.10Description Key Sets...............................................................3-54

Creating a Description Key Set.............................................. 3-57Task 1: Reset the _AII Points point style................................... 3-57Task 2: Create a new Description Key Set entry........................3-57Task 3: Apply the new Description Key Set to an existingpoint............................................................................................3-59Task 4: Update the Description Key Set to use parameters 3-60

3.11 Importing and Exporting Points.............................................3-63

Importing and Exporting Points Part I................................... 3-69Task 1: Import an ASCII file using the Create Points toolbar 3-69Task 2: Review points................................................................3-70Task 3: Create a new point file format........................................3-71Task 4: Export a Lat Longs point file..........................................3-72

Importing and Exporting Points Part II.................................. 3-74

Task 1: Set the Survey Database and import points................. 3-74

3.12Poont Groups...........................................................................3-76

Creating Point Groups............................................................ 3-82Task 1: Create Point Groups (Boundary Pin Survey)................ 3-82

Task 2: Create point groups (No display)...................................3-83

3.13Reviewing and Editing Points.................................................3-85

Manipulating Points................................................................ 3-87

Task 1: Modify the position of the labels................................... 3-87

3.14Locking/Unlocking Points.......................................................3-89

Point Locking and Editing...................................................... 3-913,15Point Reports..............................................................................3-93

Point Reports..............................................................................3-95



Task 1: Create Point Reports......................................................3-95

3.5 Points Overview

Points are often most heavily used at the beginning and end of a project. Surveyors collect data about existing site conditions (elevations, utilities, ownership, etc.) and set out the points for those who are going to build the design. Their world is coordinates, which are represented by points. Each point has a unique number (or name) and a label containing additional information (usually the elevation at the coordinate and a short, coded description).

There are no national standards for point descriptions in the Surveying industry. Each company or survey crew needs to work out its own conventions. There are no standards for symbols either; each firm can have its own set of symbols. The symbols used in a submission set can be specified by the firm contracting the services.

The lack of standard descriptions and symbols adds time to preparing and converting contracted work. AutoCAD Civil 3D contains a layer and point description translator to assist in preparing a project's point data. These tools export the points and layer data needed by those who build the design.

In the design process, points might not be part of the tasks performed in the office; they could instead be reference material that does not need to change or be displayed. In other cases, points are data for a surface and after building it, are not needed for later tasks.

At the end of the design process, points can be used to represent critical coordinates of the design. These points and their coordinates become the cornerstone of the design construction process. Again, these tasks might never be a part of an office's daily routine.In other Civil/Survey software, coordinate geometry (cogo) points are commonly a node or block. When using a block, its insertion point is the point's coordinates. Associated with the node or block is text that labels the point's number, elevation, and description. A point's marker and label can have different layers. Civil 3D cogo points are a single object with two elements: a point style and a point label style. A cogo point definition is shown in Figure 3-13.

Field Points in Civil 3D - Simple Breakdown

Ixf II


Survey Level 1

T i____ . _iPoint-----1 L p0jnt Labej

Style stylePoints

(Symtotogy)Figure 3-13

The following is important cogo point information:

A point style (no matter what it displays), an AutoCAD node, a custom marker, or a block is selectable with AutoCAD NODE object snaps.

A point label is not limited to the point's number, elevation, and description. A point label can contain lines, blocks, and other point properties. For example, point labels may display only an elevation or description. This text can be manually overridden (as shown in the example in Figure 3-14) or it can consist of intelligent variables that represent point characteristics (such as its convergence angle). In state plane coordinate systems, the convergence angle is the difference between a geodetic azimuth and the projection of that azimuth onto a grid (grid azimuth) of a given point.

Creating the first point automatically creates a point group named _AU Points. This point group is similar to layer 0; it cannot be renamed or deleted. Every imported or created drawing point resides in this point group.


Figure 3-14


Additional point groups can use all or a subset of drawing points. Usually, additional point groups contain a subset of all points. Each of these groups can display the originally assigned point style and label, or change one or both through overrides.

The Point collection in the Settings panel manages all of the styles affecting points: Point Styles, Label Styles, Description Key Sets, Table Styles, and Commands, as shown in Figure 3-15.

B ^ Point

ffi & User-Defined Property Classifications IS

Point Styles ; ffi £> Label Styles Ei Point File

Formats EES 23* Description Key Sets

Fxtprnal Data References i £B

G> Table Styles EE) Commands

Figure 3-15

AutoCAD Civil 3D point styles define a cogo point's visibility, layer, color, and linetype. A style can use the layer properties or override them. To use AutoCAD layer properties, a style sets the properties' value to By Layer, as shown at the top in Figure 3-16. To have the style control layer properties, the style sets a specific color, linetype, etc., as shown at the bottom in Figure 3-16.

13! Point Style - Benchmark

Information barker 130 Geometry Display Summary

View Direction:Ian

Component display:

Component Type Marker

Label

Color Linetype ■

BYLAY... ByLayer □

BYLAY... Bylayer

Liriewe... Plot SI Bylayer

Byw v 8yLayet &,-sye


Visible

2 'o *

Layer V-

CTRL-BMRK

V-CTRL-BMRK LT Scale

1.0000

1.0000

Survey Level 1

13 Point Style - Benchmark

Information |( Marker j 3D Geometry I Display Jsummary


View DirectionPlan

Component display:Componert Type WsWe Leyer Color Lnety

peLT Scale

Linewe..

Plot Style

Marker V-CTRL-BMRK mz

oo

DASHED 1.0

000

ByBlock

■■ J V-CTRL-BMRK □ 211 DASHED 1.0

000

iBveiock ~]l •••

Figure 3-16


Point Marker Styles

A surveyor interacts with points daily and to easily use Civil 3D points, you need a basic understanding of them and the related styles.

If opening a drawing with no Civil 3D content, or starting a drawing from a template with no Civil 3D content, AutoCAD Civil 3D will provide a single style (Standard) using one layer 0. Every new style will start from this point style and can be edited, copied, and renamed.

AutoCAD Civil 3D provides metric and imperial template files that contain several point styles: Civil 3D Imperial (NCS) and Civil 3D Metric (NCS). These two templates use the National CAD standards for their layers and provide examples of styles you can use in a project. To customize these styles, you will have to modify and expand the list of point styles. When installing AutoCAD Civil 3D, the first thing you should do is set one of these two templates as your default template. Alternatively, you can develop your styles and use your template.

A point style defines a point's display, its 3D elevation, and its coordinate marker size. In the example shown in Figure 3-17, the point style is an X for a ground shot.

The Point Style dialog box top has five tabs, as described below.

The Information tab sets the point style's name and description, as shown in Figure 3-18.


; Information ; Marker : 3D Georretry Display Summery

Name:i Benchmark

Description:

Style for benchmark.


Figure 3-17

Survey Level 1

Figure 3-18



Figure 3-19

• Use AutoCAD POINT [node] for marker: All points in the drawing follow AutoCAD applications's PDMODE and PDSIZE system variables. You have no independent control over points using this method.

• Use custom marker: This method creates markers similar to an AutoCAD point (node), but the marker is under AutoCAD Civil 3D application's control, and each point style can display a different combination of marker styles. When using this method, you select the components of the style from the list of Custom marker style shapes. A custom marker can have shapes from the left and right sides. The first comes from one of the five icons on the style's left side, and you can optionally add one or both shapes from the right.

• Use AutoCAD BLOCK symbol for marker: This method defines

the marker by using a block (symbol). The blocks listed represent definitions in the drawing. When your cursor is in this area and you right-click, you can browse to a location containing drawings you want to include as point markers.


O Use AutoCAD BLOCK symbol for markerJ3|_AEC_GRIPS_NONE

i§lAeccAr-ow

CTJ-losedBlank l3)AeccAr<vUosedHlled

£3) ClosedFllled CjlAeccSectionMark

_OowsFoot-End tJlAeccSectionPntr

j3)_CrowsFoot-Start i^lAeccTickQrde

Cjl _Wipeout_Circle CjlAeccTickLine

<

Marker rotation angle:j 0.0000(d) ~] [V]

The Markertab supports three marker definition methods, as shown in Figure 3-19, and as described below.


Information Marker 3D Geometry Display

Summary O Use AutoCAD POINT for morter

@ Use^custom. marterj Custom irarker style:

Survey Level 1

At the marker panel's top right corner are options to scale the marker. The most common option is Use drawing scale, as shown in Figure 3-20, which takes the marker size (0.100) and multiplies it by the current drawing's annotation scale, resulting in the final marker size. When the annotation scale changes, AutoCAD Civil 3D application automatically resizes the markers and their labels to be appropriate for the scale.

bizeOptions:Use drawing scale

Use fixed scaleUse size in absolute unitsUse size relative to screen

i LOGO

Figure 3-20

The other options are described in the table below.

Use fixed Specifies user-defined X, Y, and Z scale values.

scale

Use size in Specifies a user-defined size.absoluteunits

Use size Specifies a user-defined percentage of the screen.

relative toscreen

The 3D Geometry panel affects the point's elevation. The default is Use Point Elevation, as shown in Figure 3-21, which displays the point at its actual elevation value.


inches v

0.1000"

1.0001.000



Information Marker 3D Geometry Display Summaryj Property 0 Value

B 3D GeometryPrint Display Mode Use Point Elevation

Paw Elevation Use Point Elevaticn .1Scale Factor |Hatten Points to tlevation lExaqqerate Points by Scale

Factor

Figure 3-21

Survey Level 1

The other options are described in the table below.

Flatten Points to Elevation

Specifies the elevation to which the point is projected (flattened). The Point Elevation cell will highlight if this option is selected and by default is 0 elevation. When using an AutoCAD object snap to select a marker using this option, the resulting entity's elevation will be the default elevation: 0 (zero). If selecting by point number or point object, the resulting entity will be the point's actual elevation.

Exaggerate Points by Scale Factor

Exaggerates the point's elevation by a specified scale factor. When selecting this option, the Scale Factor cell highlights.

The Display tab assigns the marker and label layers, and sets their visibility and properties. Setting the property to ByLayer uses the layer's properties. Alternatively, you override the original layer properties by setting a specific color, linetype, or lineweight.

A style's view direction value affects how the point and label components display in the plan, model, profile, and section views, as listed in Figure 3-22.

The Summary tab is a report of all the style's settings. Controlling a leader arrow from a label in the dragged state, points to the boundary of the marker (yes) or the center of the marker (no). It is also changed under Marker>Leader and stops at marker. You can also edit style variables in this tab.


Information Marker 30 Geometry Display Nummary-View Direction:

Plan

Plan

Model Profile Section si

ble

Layer Color Linetype

LT Scale

Linewe...

Plot Style

V-CTRL-BMRK

■ 200 DASHED

1.0000

ByBlock

lLabel MBB 9 V-CTRL-BMRK

□ 211 DASHED

1.0000

ByBlock

EiyLaysi

Figure 3-22


Point Marker Styles

In this practice you will create a new point style and apply it to an existing group of points.

Task 1 - Add a Block Symbol.

1. In the previous practice, you only set up the working environment and created a survey database. No changes have been made to the drawing.

Continue working on the drawing from the previous practice or open the file SUV1-A1-Survey-.dwg from one of the following folders: Metric:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-M\Drawings\Survey

Imperial:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-l\Drawings\Survey

2. The arial imaginary used in this module was attached via the

AutoCAD® Map 3D FDO connection. (For more information on Map FDO functionality, please refer to the program help file).

To turn off the arial imaginary, at the Command prompt, enter Mapwspace and when prompted, type ON. In the Task pane, Display Manager tab, uncheck MainSite, as shown in Figure 3-23.Close the map Task pane.

Current Map: ISOQ XData -•■--■••

Tool*;

3. In the Toolspace, select the Settings tab, expand the Point collection until you see Point Styles. Expand the Point Styles collection.

4. Review the Point Styles list and notice that there is no light pole style.


•g Groups: El Map

Base |□

Default

□Main Site >

Figure 3-23

Practice 3c

Survey Level 1

5. From the Point Styles list, select the Guy pole style, right-click, and select Copy...

6. In the Information tab, change the point style's name to Light Pole, as shown in Figure 3-24.

t Point Style - Light Pole

Information |Marker j 3D Geometry ] Display ] Summary j

Light Pole

Description:Style for street light pote|

Figure 3-24

7. Select the Marker tab. Select the Use AutoCAD BLOCK symbol for marker option. In the block list, scroll across as needed and select the AutoCAD block ST-Light, as shown in Figure 3-25.

Point Style - Light Pole

Information ; Marker j3D Geometry jjDispiay [Summary \ Use AutoCAD POINT for marker

: Use custom marker

Cl^oro Riarl er -.•.f.yte:

mo

Use AutoCAD BLOCK smW for

ISuperRic:IglSuperfWjglTestf* CpTree 6 ] KlTreeOf iRlTree-Evi1

mMaricef rotaton angle:

0.0000(d)

Figure 3-25


SireOptions:

yiSTA

C\\SuperLeftDownEmpty fJlSupeneftUpEmptY


8. Select to the Display tab and notice the layer settings are from the Light Pole point style, as shown in Figure 3-26.

t. Point Style - Light Pole

Information j Marker 30 Geometry Display jsummary View

DreCOon:

Ptan -IComponent tispiay:

L7 Scale Lineweight Plot Style 1.0000 ByLayer Ey Ls/ar1,0000 ByLayer SyU.c-

Figure 3-26

9. You can reassign the marker and/or label layer by clicking the layer name. Select the layer name to view the drawing

layer list.

New...10. If you need to create a new layer, click

right corner of the Layer Selection dialog box. The Create Layer dialog box opens, as shown in Figure 3-27, enabling you to create new layers without having to use the Layer Manager.

in the top

Figure 3-27

to exit the Create Layer dialog box. Click

to exit the Layer Selection dialog box.


Visible

9Color

[Hj BYLAYER m BYLAYER

Layer

V-NODE-POLE V-NOCe-POLE

Linetyp

e

ByLaye

r

ByLaye

r

Componen...

Marker Label

Layer source:

Drawing?.dwg

Layers: Layer

C-TOPO-WSHE

Defpoints

V-BLDG-OTLN

V-CTRL-BMRK

V-CTRL-HCPT

V-CTRL-LINE-D

V-CTRL-LINE-N

V-CTRL-LINE-S

V-CTRL-NODE-

V-CTRL-NODE-

V-CTRL-NODE-

V-CTRL-TRAVV-CTRL-TRAV-I

V-CTRL-VCPT

V-NODEV-NODE-BNDY

V-NODE-BORE

V-NODE-NGAS

V-NODE-POLE

OK | | Cancel

Caned11. Click

Caned

Survey Level 1

to create the point style.


OK

12. Click


13. Review the Point Styles list and note that Light Pole is now a point style, as shown in Figure 3-28.

Toolspace

% o aActive Drawing Settings View

3 & Point Styies

■$3)

Benchm

ark

Bound

Catch

Basin

Drill

Hole Gas

Valve

Guy Pole

Horizontal Curve Point

Hydrant (existing)

Hydrant (proposed) Iron

Pin

Sanitary Sewer Manhole

Figure 3-28


Task 2 - Apply the point style.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous task, or open the file SUV1-C2-Survey-.dwg.

2. In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Survey Points style, as shown in Figure 3-29.

Pa* (-4b Ort'. *

Extents *

f4av?gate

ISC3D-Survey Previous View

•_ j Tc'p - \a*ned Views Q; Bottom s

Views »

Figure 3-29

3. In the Toolspace, select the Prospector tab, expand the Point Groups collection until you see the Street Light point group. Select the Street Light group, right-click, and select Properties.


Survey Level 1

4. In the Information tab, in the Default styles section, select Light Pole in the Point style drop-down list, as shown in Figure 3-30.

it, Point Group Properties - Street Light Information jPomt

Groups j Raw Desc Matching j Include | Exdude

Name; Street LightDescription;

Default styles

Point style:

^ Light Pole ^ Point

label style:

Figure 3-30


OKClick to accept the changes and close the dialog box.The symbols for the Light pole points have now been

changed. Save the drawing.


3.6 Point Label Styles

The AutoCAD Civil 3D point label style annotates point properties beyond the typical point number, elevation and description. A typical point label style is shown in Figure 3-31.

PSS

All AutoCAD Civil 3D label style dialog boxes are the same. The basic behaviors for a label come from the setting found in the Edit Label Style Defaults dialog box. The values in this dialog box define the label layer, text style, orientation, plan readability, size, dragged state behaviors, and more.

In the Settings tab, the drawing name and object collections control these values for the entire drawing (at the drawing name level) or for the selected collection (Surface, Alignment, Point, etc.) To display the Edit Label Style Defaults dialog box, select the drawing name or a heading, right-click, and select Edit Label Style Defaults..., as shown in Figure 3-32.

Refresh

Alignment

Figure 3-32

The Label Style Composer dialog box contains five tabs, each defining specific label behaviors. They are described below.


Figure 3-31

© O f a % s 4

B Qt

Idb s

E Toolspace

% o m

Active Drawing Settings View .............mEdit Drawing Settings... Edit Label Style Defaults... Edit LandXML Settings... Table Tag Numbering...

Survey Level 1

The Information tab names the style, as shown in Figure 3-33.

m Label Style Composer - Point#-Elevation-Description

The General tab contains three properties: Label {text style and layer), Behavior (orientation), and Plan Readability (amount of view rotation before flipping text to read left to right), as shown in Figure 3-34.

L2 Label Style Composer - Point#-Elevation-Descripti

Information General Layout Dragged State Summary

Text Style Standard

Label Visibility trueLayer V-NODE-TEXT

I BehaviorOrientation Reference Object

Forced Insertion None

I Plan ReadabilityPlan Readable true

Readability Bias 110.0000(d)Flip Anchors with Te*t false


Information Tab

Information General Layout Dragged State Summary Name:Point#-Elevation-Description

Description:

Figure 3-33

] [

General Tab

Property

a Label

Value

Figure 3-34


The Behavior property sets two variables that control the label's location. The Orientation Reference variable offers three label orientation options, as described in the table below.

Object Rotates labels relative to the object's zero direction. The object's zero direction is based on its start to end vector. If the vector changes at the label's anchor point, the orientation updates automatically. This is the default setting.

View Forces labels to realign relative to a screen-view orientation in both model and layout views. This method assumes the zero angle is horizontal, regardless of the UCS or Dview twist. If the view changes, the label orientation updates with it.

WorldCoordinateSystem

Under the Behe optional values This setting apf Object and the

None

Labels read left to right using the WCS X axis. Changing the view or current UCS does not affect label rotation; the label always references the world coordinate system.

ivior property, the Forced Insertion variable has three that specify the label's position relative to an object, sites only when the Orientation Reference is set to objects are lines, arcs, or spline segments.

Maintains label position as composed relative to the object.

Top Adjusts label position to be above an object.

Bottom Adjusts label position to be below an object.

Note: If you select Top or Bottom, the value of Plan Readable should be True.

The Plan Readability property has three variables that affect how text flips when rotating a drawing view. The result of these settings is to flip text to be left-to-right readable.

Under the Plan Readability property, the Plan Readable variable has two options, as described in the table below.

Allows text to rotate to maintain left-to-right readability.

Does not allow text to flip. The resulting text maybe upside down or read from right to left.


True

False

Survey Level 1

The Readability Bias variable is the amount of rotation required to flip a label to become left-to-right readable. The angle is measured counter-clockwise from the WCS 0 (zero) direction.

The Flip Anchors with Text variable has two options, as described in the table below.

If the text flips, the text anchor point also flips.

False The label flips, but maintains the original anchor point. The behavior is similar to mirroring the original text.

The Layout tab defines the label contents, as shown in Figure 3-35. A label component is an object property it labels. Point properties include northing, easting, raw description, etc. A label may have one component with several properties, or several components each containing an object property.

131 Label Style Composer - Point#-Elevation-Descriptio

Info-mation General Layout Dragged Stats Summary

Property Value

3 General

3 Text

3 Border


True

Layout Tab

Component nams:

Point Description

Figure 3-35


Depending on the label component type, it may have any combination of three sections: General, Text, and Border. General defines how the label attaches to the object or other label components, its visibility, and its anchor point.

If the label component is text, the Text property values affect how it displays its object property. To set or modify a label's text value, clickin the cell beside Contents to display the ml icon shown in

Figure 3-37. Click n to open

the Text Component Editor dialog box.

Property Value

0 General

□ Text

Contents <[Full Description.

Text Height 0.1000"

Rotation Angle 0.0000 (d)

Attachment Top left

X Offset 0.0000"

Y Offset 0.0000"

■ Color ■ BYLAYER

Lineweight ByLayer

El

Border

Figure 3-37


The remaining icons in the Layout tab are described in the table below.

Survey Level 1

The Text Component Editor dialog box, as shown in Figure 3-38, defines what property the label annotates. When creating a label component, first double-click on the text in the right side panel to highlight it. Select the property to add from the left side panel, set theproperty's format values, and click dJ to add the new property to the label component.

It is important to maintain the process order and to remember that the text on the right within brackets needs to be highlighted before revising its format values on the left.

The Dragged State tab has two properties: Leader and Dragged State Components, as shown in Figure 3-39. This tab defines how a label behaves when dragging a label from its original insertion point.

Information General Layout Dragged State Summary

Property Value

0 Leader0 Dragged State Compone...

Figure 3-39


Dragged State Tab

Figure 3-38


The Leader property defines if a leader appears and what properties it displays. You can use the label's layer properties in the General tab (ByLayer) or override them by specifying a color, as shown in Figure 3-40.

El Dragged State Compone...

Figure 3-40

The Dragged State Components property defines the label component's display after it is dragged from its original position. Click in the cell beside Display to view the two display options, as shown in Figure 3-41.

These two options are described in the table below.

As

Composed

The label maintains its original definition and orientation from the settings in the Layout panel. When you select As Composed, all other values become unavailable for editing.

Stacked Text

The label text becomes left-justified and label components are stacked in the order listed in Layout's Component Name list. When you select Stacked Text, all blocks, lines, ticks, and direction arrows are removed.


Property

B Leader

Value

Informaton General Layout Dragged State SummaryProperty Value

a Leader

□ Dragged State Compone...

Display Stacked Text V

Border VisibilityBorder Type im*. y .J* ■

i9Ripc9pHHHBackground Mask false

Border and Leader Gap 0.0250"

Text Height 0.1000"

Leader Attachment Middle

Leader Justification true

Color ■ BYLAYER

Linetype ByBlock

Lineweight ByLayer

Figure 3-41

Survey Level 1

The Summary tab lists the label component, general, and dragged state values for the label style. The label components are listed numerically in the order they were defined and report all of the current values.



Point Label Styles

In this practice, you will create a label style and use it with the point style from the previous practice.

Task 1 - Create a Point Label Style's Components.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice, or open the file SUV1-D1-Survey.dwg.

2. Select the Settings tab.

3. Expand the Point collection until you see the Point Label Styles list.

4. From the list of point styles, select Point#-Elevation-Description, right click, and select Copy.

5. In the Information tab, change the name to Point#-Description-N-E.

6. Select the Layout tab. Select Point Number from the Component name drop-down list. Because you want the Point Number label to link to the point object, set the Anchor Component to <Feature> and the Anchor Point to Top Right, as shown in Figure 3-42. Finally, set the Attachment to Bottom left. These settings will attach the bottom left of the label to the top right of the point object.

HfA^ f f l XProperty Value

□ General

Name Point Number

Tn Ic.

f Anchor Component <Feature> ^

Anchor Point T°P Right J.............

B Text

Contents < [Point Number...

Text Height 2.50mm

f^tatio^Anole jLOMOtol

(T* Attachment Bottom left*^

xWse^ oTJomrri

Figure 3-42


Practice 3d

Survey Level 1

7. Because you do not need the elevation label, you can delete it. Select Point Elev in the Component name drop-down list and

click J*., as shown in Figure 3—43. When prompted "Do you

want to delete it?" click

8. To set the properties for the description label, select Point Description in the Component name drop-down list. Set the Anchor Component to <Feature>, the Anchor Point to Bottom Right, and the Attachment to Bottom left, as shown in Figure 3—44.

jfc, Label Style Composer - Point—Descriptlon-N-E

fc. Label Style Composer - Poirrt*~Elevaticm-Description-N-E

Information j General Layout jDragged State | Summary ]

(D ® ISValue

Information j General Layout ^ragged State | Summary


Figure 3-43

Yes

Preview Po

X

RANDOM

Comnonj

Qpptnt Cx

Point Description

Property

B

General


£oint Description^ - [Ad lDSOProperty Value

a General

Name Point Description

Visibility True

( f Anchor Component <Feature> "N

^ Anchor Point Bottom Right J

B Text

Contents <[Full Descriptio...

Text Height 0.1000"Rotation Anqle 0.0000 (d)

<Attachment Bottom left

Tnffsei •WW---------Y Offset 0.0000"

I Color ■ BYLAYER

Lineweight ByLayer

Mavimiim WIHth nnrmn"


NameVisibility

Point Description

True

5

0.00mm

Survey Level 1

9. You will now add a new text component to display the Northing and Easting. Click the Create Text Component icon shown in Figure 3-45 and select Text to create a text component.

10. AutoCAD Civil 3D creates a text component with some default values. Change the default Name text.1 to Coordinates and set the Anchor Component to <Feature>. Then set the Anchor Point to Bottom Right and the Attachment to Top left.

11. You will now change the contents from the default labei set by

AutoCAD Civil 3D to display the coordinates. Click Zll in the Contents cell, next to Label Text, as shown in Figure 3-46.

Property B General Name

VisibilityAnchor Component Anchor Point B Text

Contents

Figure 3-46

12. In the Text Component Editor dialog box, double-click on the text in the right side panel to highlight it and type in N.


Figure 3-45

Component fwne: Coordnate

- fM m VnLo

Value

Coordinate True

<Featgre>

Bottom

Right

Label Te*t


13. Select Northing in the Properties drop-down list. Change the

Precision to 0.001 and click HU, as shown in Figure 3-47, to add the code to display the northing.

jfc. Text Component Editor - Contents

14. To place the easting on a new line below the northing, you need to insert a line feed at the end of the code of the northing. Click at the end of the code. Press <Enter> to insert a new line followed by the letter E. Then select Easting in the Properties drop-down list and add it to post the code in the right side panel. You should see the following:

N<[ Northing(Um|P3|RN|AP|GC|UN|Sn|OF)]> E<[ Easting(Um|P4|RN|AP|GC|UN|

Sn|OF)]>

Note the difference in code between the metric and imperial style. The metric style will have "Northing(Um" whereas the imperial style will have "Northing(Uft".

15. In the easting, the value will be displayed to the 4th decimal, "P4". You need to change it so that it matches the northing. The only way to do this is re-insert the code. AutoCAD Civil 3D does not yet have the ability to edit or add a specific section of code. Select all of the code for the easting. Change the Precision to

0.001 and click HJ to revise the easting code.

16. Select the Format tab and verify that Justification is set to

Left.


Format PropertiesNorthing J

Modifier Value

Unit jnete^^

Precision

RourSng round normal

Decimal character period '.'Figure 3-47

Survey Level 1

Click------—----to accept the changes in the Text

Component

Editor dialog box, and click - —---- again to accept thechanges in the Label Style Composer.

17. Save the d rawi ng.



Task 2 - Apply a Point Label Style's Components.

Continue working with the drawing from the previous task or open the file SUV1-D2-Survey.dwg.

In the Toolspace, select the Prospector tab, expand the Point Groups collection until you see the Street Light point group. Select the Street Light group, right-click, and select Properties.

In the Information tab, select Point#-Description-N-E in thePoint label style drop-down list, as shown in Figure 3^8.

t Point Group Properties - Street Light

Information jpoint Groups j Raw Desc Matching ! ] Indude j Exdudt

m

to accept the changes and close the dialog box.

The symbols for the Light pole points have now been changed. Also, both the point symbols and point labels

are annotative. In the Status Bar at the bottom, click the drop-down arrow next to the annotation scale and change the scale of the drawing from 1:1000 to 1:500 [1"=60' to 1"=30"], as shown in Figure 3-49. The size of the labels and point symbols change.


1

.

2

.

3.

Defoult styles Point style:

Ught Pole

Figure 3-48

c

OK

Click4.

5.

MODEL S SjflA'LlfXxH/

Figure 3-49

Survey Level 1




3,7 Point Settings

When creating new points, you must determine the next point number, as well as what elevations and descriptions to assign and how to assign them. To set the current point number, default elevations, descriptions, and other similar settings, you use the Create Points

toolbar's expanded area. Display this area by clicking on the Create Points toolbar. The two sections, Points Creation and Point Identity, as shown in Figure 3-50, contain the most commonly used values.

Points Creation Values

The Points Creation section affects prompting for elevations and/or descriptions. The two properties in this section are Prompt For Elevations and Prompt For Descriptions. These properties can be set as described in the table below.

None Does not prompt for an elevation or description.

Manual Prompts for an elevation or description.

Automatic Uses the Default Elevation or Default Description value when creating a point.


Create Points <• ®[5r ■

Create Points K3lK3ii3

I +<s>, i f ^ ^ 3 » © & ^ ^ j @I Parameter Value A j Parameter Value

I Bj|Joefault Layer BfjDefault Layer

B jF] Points Creation B10 Points CreationLocal Coordinates North

ing- Easting B^ Default Styles

Grid Coordinates Grid Northing • Grid Easting

B "^Default Name Format

Geographic Coordinates Latitude -

Longitude B"^"Point Identity

Prompt For Elevations Manual Next Point Number 299

Prompt For Point Names None Use Sequential Numbering true

Prompt For Descriptions Manual Point Number Offset I 1Default Elevation 0.000' Sequence Point Numbers From 100

DefauR: Description If Point Numbers Are Supplied Use

Match On Description Parameters ($1,... true Force Names false

Disable Description Keys false If Port Numbers Already Exist Notify

Echo Coordinates to Command Line true If Point Names Alreadv Exist Notify

B ^Default Styles ! _____ __ __________________ ____ _ Mtti

If Point Numbers Need To Be Assigned Use next point number

_ 4. _ ....................... - : '_______________________________________________________Select a command from the point creation tools Select a command from the point creation tools

Figure 3-50

Survey Level 1

Automatic- Object

Creates points along an alignment whose description consists of the Alignment name and Station. This description is not dynamic and does not update if the alignment changes or the point is moved.

Point Identity Values

The Point Identity section sets the default method of handling duplicate point numbers. If there are duplicate point numbers, you have three ways to resolve the duplication. You can overwrite the existing point data, ignore the new point, or assign it a new number.

This section's most critical property is Next Point Number. It is set to the first available number in the point list. If a file of imported point data uses point numbers 1-131 and 152-264, the current point number is 132 after importing the file. This value should be set manually to the next desired point number before creating new points with the Create Points toolbar.

3.8 Creating Points

You create points using commands in the Create Points toolbar. The commands include:

° Miscellaneous - Manual: Creates a new point at specified coordinates.• Alignments - Station/Offset: Creates a point at an alignment's specific station and

offset. These points and their descriptions do not update if the alignment is modified or the point is moved. If you prefer a dynamic station and offset labels, consider an Alignment label instead.

• Alignments - Measure Alignment: Creates point objects at a set interval, which is useful for construction staking. Again, these points do not update if the alignment changes.

- Surface - Random Points: Creates points whose elevation is from a specified surface. These points do update, but you must manually force the update. If you prefer a dynamic spot label, consider a Surface label instead.

Each icon in the Create Points toolbar has a drop-down list. If you expand this list, you can select a command from the list to run, as shown in Figure 3-51.




Create Points t*

0®

Parameter Station/Offset ue

El |g~|pefault La

it Divide Alignment

EllDPoints Cre Measure Alignment At

fiRnmetry PninK Radial or

Perpendicular

EX^ Default St

E) "^Default NaEl Point Iden tP

Import From File

it Profile Geometry Points

| Select a command from the point creation tools

Figure 3-51

Survey Level 1

3.9 Transparent Command

Several methods for placing points can use other existing points to help define the location of a new point. For example, you may want to locate a new point at given distances from two existing points. AutoCAD Civil 3D uses the point filters in the Transparent Commands toolbar to reference point objects in a drawing. The Transparent Command toolbar is shown in Figure 3-52.

i- jQi___t— _ B

Figure 3-52

The point filters reference points by Point Name, Point Number, or by selecting a point on the screen (Point Object). You can access the transparent commands from their respective toolbars or type an apostrophe letter pair: 'PA for Point Name, 'PN for Point Number, and 'PO for point object. Point Object is the easiest, because you only need to select a point on the screen.

The AutoCAD Civil 3D transparent commands work with most AutoCAD Civil 3D and AutoCAD commands that can use a point's coordinates. AutoCAD commands using transparent commands include Line, Pline, and Circle. To exit a transparent command, press <Esc> or <Enter>.


I r i / K kD iQ ' t jVI & -.01-, e <S>


Creating AutoCAD Civil 3D Points

In this practice, a fire hydrant was located by GPS. You will add a point object to locate it manually.

Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice, or open the file SUV1 -E1 -Survey.dwg.

In the Home tab > Create Ground Data panel, select Points-Point Creation Tools to access the Create Points

toolbar. Expand the toolbar by clicking V , as shown in Figure 3-53.

Create Points

Select a command from the point creation tools

Figure 3-53

Note: Alternatively, you can select the Settings tab and expand the Commands collection under the Point collection. Select CreatePoints, right-click, and select Edit Command Settings..., as shown in Figure 3-54.

Efe a m

Active Drawing Settings View

O Baseplana* % General S-4"

Point

S> & User-Defined Property ... £ fe?

Point Styles a & Label Styles *■ Point

File Formats ® I2> Description Key Sets

External Data References a &

Table Styles a £> Commands

0 AddPointTable 151

ConvertPointsToSds... HP

CreatePolntGroup

S5SShowGeodettcQ 13

ShowPointGroup © (£) SurfaceCreate Points


Practice 3e

3.

1 .

2.

\JEdit Command Settings...

"HTRefresh

TTT

Survey Level 1

+<g> , „ jg. ^ ^ ^ ^ „ ^^

Parameter Value

0 B Default Uyer

0 0 Points Creation

0 Default Styles

E Default Name Format

B^ Point Identity

Next Point Number 260 3

Use Sequential Numbering True

Point Number Offset 1

c -------m ___________t — c ---- 1 r>r\

Figure 3-54



In the Point Identity section of the dialog box, set the Next

Point Number to 260 and collapse the toolbar, by

selectingK

Select the Manual option from the miscellaneous group on the toolbar as shown in Figure 3-55.

Figure 3-55

6. When prompted for a location, enter 1906852.13, 620768.56 [6256069.30,2036634.25]<Enter> at the Command Line, for easting, northing. When prompted for a description, enter HYD <Enter>. When prompted for an elevation, press <Enter> to accept the default value <.> (period), since it is unknown. The period is simply a placeholder for the elevation field. Inputting a zero is not correct because 0 is a valid elevation.

7. Press <Enter> again to finish the command and click on X in the Create Points dialog box to close it. In the Prospector tab, under the Point collection, select the All Points group, and select point 260, right-click, and select Zoom to, as shown in Figure 3-56.

Zoom to

Panto

Lock Unlock

Export LandXML...

Add to Project...


4.

5.

Create Points ! i t ? Ma*

+<S>~ $ *S Cp* Manual

Geodetic Direction and Distance

i-4

ffi-

Point Nil...

253

254

** Line Shading255

256 Copy value to clipboard Copy to clipboard

IHTHTnilliMBSBm—

Survey Level 1



Figure 3-56


3.10 Description Key Sets

Description Keys categorize points by their field description (raw description). If a point matches a Description Key entry, the point is assigned a point and label style, and a full description (possibly a translation of the raw description). Description Key Sets can also scale and rotate points. The Description Key Sets collection is shown in Figure 3-57.

The Description Key's first five columns are the most used entries, as shown in Figure 3-58.


Toolspace

■Active Drawing Settings View v

£3 Q Drawingl A •aCL

I? % General o fl

£ 5 Point

ffi- \2? User-Defined Property Classifi...

ffi Point Styles

£§ & Label Styles

IS |2> Point File Formats irt On

cy^ ^Ey Description Key Se"ts"*,%,s^

JLJ

a)

% ^fe Civil 3D

txternai Data References

ffi- Table Styles —1

4) (2? Commands

Figure 3-57

Survey Level 1

Note: To create a new Description Key row, select an existing code, right-click, and select New. To edit a code, double-click in the cell.


X 00

Code Style Point Label Style Format Layer «|

o

■%STA*

0STA 0Point#-Elevation-Des $* 0V-CTRL-HCPT

E"O UJ

■^SWMH*

PI Storm Sewer Manhole

0 Point#-Elevation-Des $* 0V-MODE-SSWR

E "D

i •^TREE* 0Tree 0Point#-Elevation-Des $3"$2$0 0V-NODE-TREE

E &t_ o10

a

n—

< >

Figure 3-58


Code, Point, and Label Style

Description code is a significant part of data collection. Code assigned to a raw description will trigger action by the Description Key Set. Each entry in the set represents all possible descriptions a field crew would use while surveying a job. When a raw description matches a code entry, the Key Set assigns all of the row's values to the matching point, point, and label style, translates the raw description, and possibly assigns a layer. Codes are case-sensitive and must match the field collector's entered raw description.

A code may contain wildcards to match raw descriptions that contain numbering or additional material beyond the point's description. For example, MH* would match MH1, MH2, etc. or UP* would match UP 2245 14.4Kv Verizon. Look up "wild cards, in description keys" in the Help menu for more information.

Matching a Key Set entry for the code assigns a Point Style at the point's coordinates. If the Point Style is set to Default, the Settings tab's Point feature Point Style is used (set in the Edit Feature Settings dialog box), as shown in Figure 3-59.

Matching a Key Set entry for the code assigns a point label style to annotate important point values; usually, this is the number, elevation, and description. If the Point Style is set to Default, the Settings tab's Point feature Point Label Style is used (set in the Edit Feature Settings dialog box), as shown in Figure 3-59.

Too Is pace

13 Fdit Feature Settings - Point

Property StjGenerai SQlabelmg S 4-Default Styles Pont Style Point Label Style E «'>Defautt Name Format B ^Update Points fflCjUniUeK BDoiitance E' ^Dimension fflUcoordinate

EjQcrld Coordinate S LjElevatlon fflf lArea1.1 i ^J'J.


Active Drawng

Settings View - O DrdWttiglA General

Override CI*iOv... Lock -

Edit Feature

Settings... I Edit Label Style

Defaults...\ Refresh

ae a

BasicPolrvt*-Elevatiori-Des«rtitjon

'*■ SI* (3>sn -=> a yS :>j

!t j SB £a &Si•> ?aa 31a 6?* ©* IB* $

Profie

Profte

View

Sample

Lme

Secbon

Section

View Mass

Kaii Line

Mass Haul

View Pipe

Network

Pipe

Structure

Corridor

Intersection

(E

Of I | Cancel | | Apply | i Help

Survey Level 1

Figure 3-59



Format

The Format column translates the raw description into a full description. When including spaces in a raw description, AutoCAD Civil 3D assigns parameter numbers to each description element. Parameters are represented by a $ sign followed by a number. For example, the description PINE 6 has two elements: PINE and 6, with PINE as parameter 0 ($0) and 6 as parameter 1 ($1). To use the raw description as the full description, the Format column contains $* (use the raw description as the full description). The Format column can reorder the parameters and add characters to create a full description. For example, the raw description PINE 6 can be translated to 6" PINE by entering $1" $0.

The function of parameters in the Format column is to translate a cryptic raw description into a more readable full description. Parameters are defined by spaces in a raw description. The first element is assigned $0 and the maximum number of elements is 9 (i.e., $0„..$9). The following is a complex raw description:

• TREED MAPLE 3

For the raw description to match the Description Key Set entry, the entry TREE must have an asterisk (*) after TREE (see the example shown in Figure 3-60). The raw description elements and their parameters are TREE ($0), D ($1), Maple ($2), and 3 ($3). The Format column entry of $3" $2 $0 creates a full description of 3" MAPLE TREE.

If a point does not match any Description Key Set entry, it receives the default styles assigned by the _AII Points group.


X 00

Code Style Point label Style Format Layer 1 ;

&

0STA 0 Point#-Elevation-Desr 0V-CTRL-HCPT E

~TD UJ

■^jSWMH*

p] Storm Sewer Manhole 0 PoinW-Elevation-Des$* 0V-NODE-SSWR E <

D

£ %TREE* 0Tree 0 Point#-Elevation-Des$3" $2 $0

0V-NODE-TREE E0 Q

l— ©

1X3CL

rr—'

< >

Figure 3-60

Survey Level 1

The Layer column assigns a layer to the matching point. If the Point Style already has a marker and label layer, this entry should be toggled off. The Description Key Set also contains the Scale and Rotate Parameter columns. In the above example, the 3 for the trunk diameter can also be a tree symbol scaling factor when applied to the symbol's X-Y.



Creating a Description Key Set

In this practice you will learn to create a new Description Key Set

entry and apply it to an existing point. In addition you will update the

Description Key Set to use parameters.

Task 1 - Reset the _AII Points point style.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice, or open the file SUV1 -F1 -Survey.dwg.

2. In the Prospector tab, select the point group _AII Points, right-click, and select Properties....

3. In the _A.II Points Properties dialog box, select the Information tab.

4. Select Basic from the Point style drop-down list. Select Elevation and Description from the Point label style.

5. As the Hydrant is the only point that is exclusively in the _AII Points group, it is the only point that is impacted by the style. This concept is explained in more detail in the Point Groups material.

to exit the Properties dialog box.

Task 2 - Create a new Description Key Set entry.

1. In the Toolspace, select the Settings tab.

2. Expand the Point collection until you see the Description Key Set collection and its list.

3. Select C3D-Training from the list, right-click, and select Edit Keys...

4. Right-click in any Code cell and select New..., as shown in Figure 3-61.


Practice 3f

OK

6. Click

(vj utility Hole |^j<aetauit>

■^SANMH" 0 Sanitary Sewer Manhole □< default* S*STMIv

Sh"

Delete...Figure 3-61

■^gHH"

ifeSWL

Survey Level 1

5. Double-click in the Code cell of the newly created row and enter HYD, as shown in Figure 3-62.

6. In the Style cell, toggle on (check box) the Point Style and click in the Style cell to open the Point Style dialog box, as shown in Figure 3-63. Select Hydrant (existing) from the drop-down list

and click 1- -—----' to assign the style to the code.

7. Leave <defau!t> selected as the Point Label Style and $* as the Format. This means that the label will be the same as what was entered by the surveyor. Leave the check box toggled off in the Layer column. You do not have a scale parameter and will not be using a fixed scale. However, you want to scale the symbol based on the drawing scale, so toggle on the Yes option in the Use drawing scale column, and toggle off the check box for the Scale Parameter, as shown in Figure 3-64.

8. Close the DescKey Editor vista by clicking cLJ in the top right corner of the dialog box, as shown in Figure 3-65.

00


c ode Style Point Label... F... Layer

Scale Param...

Fixed ...

Use dra

■t

jHYD 0 Hydrant (existing) 0<default> S* □ I | Parameter 1

□ 1.000

0Yes

Figure 3-64

V Point Style

Hydrant (existing) ■*■ in

L OK I Caned Help

I ^ III 1 III IIIHBMHil^Figure 3-63

UJ

Code Style

^HYD <default>

o.

Figure 3-62


E

Figure 3-65


Survey Level 1

Task 3 - Apply the new Description Key Set to an existing point.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice, or open the file SUV1 -F3-Survey.dwg.

2. Zoom in to the hydrant so that you will see the changes to the hydrant symbol when you apply the updates. In the Prospector tab, expand the Point Groups collection and select the _AII Points group, as shown in Figure 3-66. In the grid view, select the hydrant point number 260, right-click, and select Zoom to.

(S«\ Pninfr C\ni iHc

Point Nu...

Easting

Northing Poin

253

5814.6858m

620902.2202m

<f> 254

5830.4158m

6208443708m

255

5823.4839m

620797.4515m

256

5840.8136m

620757.9967m

%257

5823.2578m

6206573262m

260

5852.1285m

6207685612m 3

Figure 3-66

3. In the Prospector tab, select the _AII Points group, right-click, and select Apply Description Keys. The point updates to show the Hydrant symbol and new description, as shown in Figure 3-67.


B O Survey-Comptete-SUVl

(» ■<§? Points ;-..[<§>] Point Groups id

Figure 3-67

Survey Level 1

Task 4 - Update the Description Key Set to use parameters.

1. In this task you will use the Parameters feature to control the display properties of symbols in your drawings. The most common parameter is the Scale parameter. With this parameter, a surveyor will enter the size of a tree as part of the description and the description key file will insert a symbol scaled to the value provided by the surveyor. In this case, you want the pumpers on the hydrant to display correctly (i.e., running parallel to the road).

2. In the Settings tab, expand the Point collection and expand the Description Key Sets collection. Select C3D-Training, right-click, and select Edit Keys..., as shown in Figure 3-68.

In the HYD row, Code column, enter HYD*. The asterisk symbolizes a wildcard, i.e. any character after the letters HYD, which in this case is -5, parameterl that we will enter in Step 6.

In the HYD row, toggle on the check box in the Marker Rotate column, then click in the cell to select Parameterl from the drop-down list. The selected parameter is shown in Figure 3-69.

Point labe... Format L... Scat... Fixed... Use d... Appl... Appl...

□ □Par* □1.000 QNo QNo QNo□ O; □Parameter 2 □O.O Counter Clockwise

□ □Part □ 3. .000 0Ves QNo HNo <|7| Parameterl ^ jo.' □ Parameterl QOfl Counter

Clockwise

0Yes QNo □Parameterl [ |0.' □ Parameterl □ OA Clockwise


Figure 3-68

PI Benchmari

C3D-Training

^SANMH*

Point

0- & User-Defined Property Classifications $ &

Point Styles 5 (3> Label Styles l$) £> Point File

Formats Description Key Sets

|j Civil 3D: External Data Referen' E t& Table Styles

Si & Commands

Code Style Marker Rotate..

□ Parameter 2

M... Label Rotate P... Lab... Rotation Direction

HDWAIL QTopo [3 < default* S'_ HYD' J(3 Hydrant {existing) 0<deiautt> S""jPine' (3Pine " 0<default>iV Pirn QV 0Pari □!.(*>I □No

5.

6.


Figure 3-69

Click b_J in the top right corner of the dialog box to close the Panorama view

In the graphics screen (Model Space), select the Hydrant point object, right-click, and select Edit Points. Set the Raw Description from HYD to HYD -5. The -5 indicates the required rotation.


Survey Level 1

7. Select the row, right-click, and select Apply Description Keys, as shown in Figure 3-70.

Click in the top right corner of the dialog box to close the Panorama view.

The hydrant has now been rotated to show the hydrant pumpers following the rotation of the road, as shown in Figure 3-71.

10. The label also displays the rotation angle text -5, which you do not want. In the Settings tab, expand the Point collection and expand the Description Key Sets collection. Select C3D-Training, right-click, and select Edit Keys...

11. In the HYD row, change the Format from $* to Hydrant, as shown in Figure 3-72.

12. Click in the top right corner of the dialog box to close thePanorama view.


Point Nu... Easting Northing P... N. Raw Description Full Descript... Description For... Grid (

260 5852J2S5m 3768.56! 2ir, J HYD -5 Renumber...

Datum...

Elevations from Surface... ----___________ ^ Apply Description Keys J

Figure 3-70

Code Style Point Label Style Format

to™A . _

0 Hydrant (existing 0<default> ^Hydrant > [

Figure 3-72

Figure 3-71

8

.

9

.


13. You still need to apply the changes. In the graphics screen (Model Space), select the Hydrant point object, right-click, and select Apply Description Keys. The changes are now applied, as shown in Figure 3-73.



Survey Level 1

3.11 Importing and Exporting Points

AutoCAD Civil 3D has methods to import point data from ASCII text files, AutoCAD Land Desktop point databases, Autodesk LandXML files, as well as methods to convert AutoCAD Land Desktop points to AutoCAD Civil 3D points. The Survey tab also inserts points from a survey to a drawing.

There are two methods of invoking the import point feature, one is via the Ribbon Insert tab and the other is through the Points creation tool in the prospector tab.

Ribbon Insert tab method

1. On the Ribbon's Insert tab, select Points from File. Alternatively,

you can click ^ on the Create Points toolbar. This opens the Import Points dialog box.

2. In the Import Points dialog box, set the file format, select the files

to import, set any advanced options, and click the points.

Point Creation tools method

1. Open the Create Points dialog box by expanding Points on

the Ribbon's Home tab, and selecting a Create Points option from the drop-down list, as shown on the left in Figure 3-74. Alternatively, in the Prospector tab, select Points, right-click and select Create..., as shown on the right.

' loo Is pace

; Master View

£ O Open >av*ngs

_

3 D baseplan

« posits


To Import Points

OK

to import

: ' AutoCAD Civil 3D 70lint Annotate Modfy Analyze View Output

Point Creation Tools

Press FX for more help


fff

Create...

I © Export...

H Transfer...

» SI

Edt Points...

IS

Select

ffi

Zoom to 1

i I Panto

$lode

rt

Unock vl

< Refresh _\

Point Num...

Eastng Northiig Po

rt EN

4 1 7961.4587 9440.4902' IT

Figure 3-74


te □ [>]aHome

0 Import Survey Data •

B V - X m m -nw^r

Priettes »

Toospace

C^ate Points -

MeceBaneous Create

Points - Intersections

Create Points - Ailments

Create Points - Surface

Create Points - Slope

Create Points -

Interpolate

= Toe ts pace

Q.Master View

B Q OpenOa M? Create

Point GroupP D hvw I^S Create COGO Poins Iron Corrvlcr ^ fc

Create Stocks frorr COGO Poirrsffl W Pt convert Land Desktop Pores

^ Si- Convert AutoCAD Points i "D M ^ "'P^1

Softdesk Point Btodts

Survey Level 1

All commands on the Create Points toolbar can also be accessed through the Points pull-down menu, as shown in Figure 3-75.

Click 45 (Import Points) to open the Import Points dialog box. In the Import Points dialog box, select a point file format from the

Format drop-down list.

After setting the format, click IMI to the right to open the Select Source File dialog box.

In the Select Source File dialog box, browse to the import point file, select it, and click Open. You can select multiple files as long as they have the same file format. You can assign the imported points to a new or existing point group by selecting the Add Points to Point Group option and selecting the point group from the drop- down list. Select any Advanced options as needed. The Import Points dialog box is shown in Figure 3-76.

12 Import Points


2.3.

4.

Create Points c B®

¥Select a command from the point creation tools v^ Import Points

—

I%Figure 3-75

5.

m

HelpOK| Cancel

Figure 3-76

The Duplicate Point Number dialog box opens if there is a conflict between point numbers in the ASCII file and the drawing (e.g., both contain Point Number 1).

Format:PNEZD (comma delimired)

Source File(s):

Advanced options

□Do elevation adjjstment f possible □Do coordinate transformation if possible


To import points directly from an AutoCAD Land Desktop point database, select the External Project Point Database format and browse for the project's COGO subfolder. Then locate and select the Points.mdb file.

If a drawing contains all or a subset of all points, you only need to convert the points into Civil 3D cogo points.

Duplicate Point NumbersIf an imported file creates duplicate point numbers, AutoCAD Civil 3D software overwrites, merges, or reassigns them during the import process. When encountering duplicate point numbers, AutoCAD Civil 3D software can assign the next available number, add an offset (add 5000 to each point number that conflicts), overwrite (replaces the current point values with the file's values), or merge (add the file's values to an existing point's values).

If using the offset method, the new point numbers are kept unique in the drawing. If using the next available number method, the new points blend into the original points and are difficult to identify.

The offset method is preferred when resolving duplicate point numbers. When importing points that will potentially duplicate point numbers, the Create Points toolbar's Point Identity settings, as shown in Figure 3-77, is the default when handling duplicate point numbers.


Create Points c' 0 ®

□\- ^

D

Parameter value

0 jjO Default Layer

BfjPoints Creation

B<§> Default Styles

0 "<§> Default Name Format

S <§> Point Identity

Next Point Number 2

Use Sequential Numbering true

Point Number Offset J______ ____________________________________

Sequence Point Numbers From 100

If Point Numbers Are Supplied Use

Force Names false

If Point Numbers Already Exist Notify

If Puini Nantes Already Cxftl NuUfy

If Point Numbers Need To Be Assi... Use next point number

| Select a command from the point creation tods

Figure 3-77

Survey Level 1

Transforming Points on

Import or Export

When importing points, the assumption is that the file's and drawing's points are in the same coordinate system. When the file's points are in a different coordinate system, you must define a point file format identifying the point file's coordinate system.

To identify that a point file contains coordinates from a different system, you must define a new point file format. When using this file to import points, the import routine knows the points are from one system and the drawing is assigned another. Therefore, when importing

the points, it transforms them to the drawing's coordinate system.

When using the file

format to export points, the export routine transforms the points from the drawing's coordinate system to the point file format's coordinate system.

The point file format must have two values: the coordinate system and the keywords Grid Northing and Grid Easting.


In the Point Identity settings, set the duplicate point resolution method for the If Point Numbers Already Exist variable. The four methods are Renumber, Merge, Overwrite, and Notify, as shown in Figure 3-78. The import process never overwrites point data unless you specify it.

If Point Numbers Are Supplied Use

Force Nanes false

If Point Numbers Already Exist Notify V

If Point Names Already Exist Renumber

If Point Numbers Need To Be Assi... Metge Overwrite

Figure 3-78

When encountering a duplicate point, the Duplicate Point Number dialog box opens. After you define a resolution, it can be assigned to the current duplicate point or to all encountered duplicate points.


The coordinate system assignment is similar to assigning a system to a drawing. In the Point File Format dialog box, toggle on the

Coordinate zone transform option and click IMJ beside the Zone field, as shown in Figure. In the Select Coordinate Zone dialog box, set the category and coordinate system, as shown at the bottom in Figure 3-79.

!k. Point File Format

Format name: PENZD (comma defeated)

Default fite extension.: . txt

Coordnate zone transform Zone:

Point Nu.. Easting Northng Point Ele... RawD

Format options Columnated o Deknitedby:

Q Read no more than

SgaBjkarag___________

Select Coordinate Zone ZoneCategories:

AvadabJe coordinate systems:

NAD83 California State Planes, Zone VI, Meter

Selected coordnate system code: CA83-VI Description:

NAD83 Catfbma State Planes, Zone VI, Meter Projection: LMDatum:

Figure 3-79


Comment Tag:

• ■■ .-i Hi

USA, Cakfarnia

22

point

s

pants

Help

Survey Level 1

You then need to change the Northing and Easting headings to Grid Northing and Grid Easting. Select the heading and in the Select Column Name dialog box, select the new heading: Grid Northing or Grid Easting, as shown in Figure 3-80.

13 Point Hie I pnrwt

Format options

PNEZD (comma deimited) - NAj

Default file extension.: ■txtSelect the name of this column from the list of available names. If the column

contains data that is not used, choose cunusedx

0 Coordinate zone transform Zone: I OH-NPoint N... Northing E

Column name: || InvaSd indicator:

Help

Load...


Format name:

13 Point File formats - Select Column Name n

point

s

point

s

<unus8d> Curiuse

Help

Cancel


Figure 3-80


Survey Level 1

Importing and Exporting Points Part I

In this practice you will import an ASCII file created in the field.

Task 1 - Import an ASCII file using the Create Points toolbar.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice or open the file SUV1 -G1 -Survey.dwg from one of the following folders:

Metric:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-M\Drawings\Survey Imperial:


2. You may have to change the draw order to be able to view the other objects. In Model Space, select the image, right-click, select Display Order > Send to Back.

3. In the Ribbon Home tab, select Points and in the drop-down list select the Point Creation tool.

Click " (Import Points) on the toolbar.

Click ^ and in the Selected Files section of the dialog box,browse to the ASCII file's location

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-Geomatics\Survey-Pickup and select the survey of the property pins as the file you want to import. Following are the files to be opened: For metric: Site-Property-M For imperial: Site-Property-I


4.

5.

Practice 3g


6. In the Import Points dialog box, select PNE2D (comma delimited) from the Specify point file format (filtering on) drop-down list, as shown in Figure 3-81.

He, Import Points

Figure 3-81

7. Click 0K to import the file. When done, click on the X to close the Create Points toolbar.


Task 2 - Review points.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice, or open the file SUV1-G2-Survey.dwg.

2. In the Prospector tab, select Points to preview the points in the Prospector's preview area.

3. From the point list, select point 249, right-click, and select Zoom to.

4. In the Prospector's point preview list, select point 249, right-click,

Yesand select Delete. Click------------- in the dialog box thatopens to delete the point.

5. In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Survey Main.

6. Save the drawing.Task 3 - Create a new point file format.

In AutoCAD Civil 3D, you are able to create an output format based on an independent coordinate system. Using this output file, you can then open multiple drawings that each


Survey Level 1

have their own coordinate systems and export the points to one common coordinate system.

1. Select the Settings tab.

2. Expand the Point collection until you see the Point File Formats collection and its format list. From the Point File Formats list, select PNEZD (Comma delimited), right-click, and select Copy...

3. In the Point File Format dialog box, change the format name to PNEZD (Comma delimited) Lat-Long.

4. Toggle on the Coordinate zone transform option and click l® beside the Zone field.

5. In the Select Coordinate Zone dialog box, set the Categories to Lat Longs and the Available coordinate systems to WGS84 datum, Latitude-Longitude; Degrees, as shown in

Figure 3-82. Click----—----to return to the Point File Formatdialog box.

Zone

Categories: [ut longs

Avaiable coordnate systems: WGS84 datim, Latitude-longitude; Degrees

Selected coordinate system code: LL8f

Description:____________________________________________________

WGS84 datum, latitude-Longitude; Degrees Projection: a

Datum:WGS84

Figure 3-82



Select the Northing heading, as shown in Figure 3-83, and in the Select Column Name dialog box, select

Latitude from theOK

Column name drop-down list and click

7. Select the Easting heading, as shown in Figure 3-83, and in the Select Column Name dialog box, select Longitude from the

Column name drop-down list and click ———--l

J t e . P o i n t l i t Format

Format rume: Pf-£ZD (corrma sci.'rttccj La'^orjj

Detect fee extension.: Corneiii Tag:

,tXt » £

J Cowdnste zone trarsfvrm

/ /Por* Nu L«*uete PontEte RawDe

Figure 3-83

to create the new point file format.

Task 4 - Export a Lat Longs point file.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice, or open the file SUV1-G4-Survey.dwg.

2. Select the Prospector tab.

3. If necessary, expand the Point Groups collection.

4. From the list of point groups, select _AII Points, right- click, and select Export Points... to open the Export Points dialog box.

5. In the Export Points dialog box, change the file format to PNEZD Comma delimited) Lat-Long.


Zone:

U.84;<3>

OK

8. Click

6. Click

Survey Level 1

to open the Select Destination File dialog box.



7. Browse to the C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training\Geomatics\ Survey Datal folder. Enter Site-Lat-Long for the file name and

click i2pen to create the file.

8. In the Export Points dialog box, toggle on the Limit to Points in Point Group option and select Street Light from the drop-down list on the left.

9. Toggle on the Do coordinate transformation if possible

option, and click OK to export the points.

10. Open Windows Explorer and browse to the C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training\Geomatics\Survey Datal folder. Open the file Site-Lat-Long.txt using Notepad and review its lat and long coordinates.


Survey Level 1

Importing and Exporting Points Part II

One method of importing points is to import a points file directly into AutoCAD Civil 3D. In this practice you will examine another method. You will use the Survey Database features to import a points file.

Task 1 - Set the Survey Database and import points.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice or open the file SUV1 -G4-Survey.dwg from one of the following folders.

Metric:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-M\Drawings\Survey

Imperial:


2. You will now use the survey database that was created and opened in a previous practice. Continue with the previously opened database in Practice B Creating a survey Network, or close the currently opened survey database, and open Surveyl Data C. For information on how to open a survey database refer to Appendix A-1.

3. Import a point file into the survey database and drawing. Select the opened current survey database (step 2 above), right-click, and select lmport>lmport point file, as shown in Figure 3-84.

j™ ifzl Import Events OrjS Networks I ffl- EH Site

Topo i-"[US] Network Groups ! & Figures \~M Figure

Groups i-0 Survey Points 1 • pi) Survey Point Grou| ^np/pyl

Data I_______________________

Properties...

Close survey database Display change report... Translate

Survey Database-

Edit survey database settings... Manage extended properties-

Export Survey LandXML.. Refresh


Practice 3h

I-] ITop] |2D Wireframe)

i Toolspace

,% q m

Survey Data Surveyl Data BSurveyl Data C

£a

m

Import survey

data... Import point

file... Irawi


' Import Survey LandXML..

---------------------


Figure 3-84

Survey Level 1

4. In the Select Source File, browse to C:\Civil 3DProjects\Civil3D-training-Geomatics\Survey-Pickup and select Site-Survey2.txt to open it. For the Specify Point file format, select PNEZD (comma delimited). Click OK when done, as shown in Figure 3-85.

Jt, Import Point File isH^fil

Figure 3-85

5. Note that AutoCAD Civil 3D software has created an import event that can be used to re-process the points files when changes are made to them, as shown in Figure 3-86.

I Tooispace

J 8. ^_____________________________fe D IE ' Surveyl DataComplete

E3- & Import Events | f0 Site-

Survey3.fbk ! 3 0 Road-

Survey.fbkliaPH Srte-S jrveyl.ta ff^l Properties...

j-PI Networks[Hi! Figures Re-import

ft -E^ Survey Points Process Linework...

n 3-EH Networks Insert into drawing

12 Site Topo Remove from drawing...

i- ES Ex Roadr®l Nrtwnrlr firming Delete...

Figure 3-86



Caned

Property Value

Point file format PNEZD (comma delimited) 0 IPoint file name C:\Civil3D Projects\Civil3D-training-Geomatics\Survey-

Picku...Point type

Current figure prefix database

C3D Training RProcess linework during import

□ No

Current linework code set Sample ('IProcess linework sequence

By import order

Import event name Site-Survey2.txt

Import ev'ent description

Assign offset to point identifiers

□ No

Point identifier offset

Insert network object □ No

^Insert survey points □ Yes ^ I

Help


3.12 Point Groups

Point groups organize points that share common descriptions and characteristics (such as existing storm, gas lines, building corners, etc.). Point groups also allow points to display different point or label styles. For example, a Landscape Architect wants to see different symbols for each tree species, while an Engineer only needs to see a generic tree symbol. The Description Key Set enables you to assign the tree species symbols for the Architect, and a point group enables generic tree symbols to override the symbols for the Engineer. Another function of a point group is to hide all points.

In AutoCAD Civil 3D, point groups can be defined in the template along with a Description Key Set. When you create a new drawing from this template and import points, they will be assigned their symbols and be sorted into point groups.

All points in a drawing belong to the _AII Points point group. Consider this point group as the point database. It cannot be deleted and initially, it is not in a drawing until you add points. All new point groups will include all drawing points or a subset of drawing points (copied points from the _AII Points point group).

Defining Point Groups

To create a new point group, go to the Prospector tab, right-click on the Point Groups collection and select New... Alternatively, in the Home tab, select Points>Create Point Group.

After selecting New... or Create Point Group, the Point Group Properties dialog box displays. This dialog box has nine tabs, each affecting the point group's definition.

The Point Groups, Raw Desc Matching, Include, and Query Builder tabs add points to the point group. The Exclude tab removes points from a point group.The Information tab defines the point group's name. The Point style and Point label style should remain at their defaults, unless you want to use either style to override the assigned styles of the points in the point group. The points in the point group will display their originally assigned styles until you toggle on the override. A point group can be locked by toggling on the Object locked option to prevent any changes to the group. The Point Group Properties dialog box appears as shown in Figure 3-87.


Survey Level 1

13 Point Group Properties - Point Croup - (1)

Information Point Groups Raw Desc Matching Include Exclude Query Builder Overrides Point List Summary Name:

Point Group - (1) Desrription:

LDefault styles Point style:

Standard - | J ' I

Point label style:

<5 Standard ~ I J ' I

□ object locked

OK I I Cancel j | Apply j | Help

Figure 3-87

The Point Groups tab lists the drawing's groups. A point group can be created from other point groups. By toggling on a point group name, the group and its points become members of the new point group. For example, the point group Trees is created from the point groups Maple, Walnut, Oak, etc.

The Raw Desc Matching tab lists codes from the Description Key Code set. When you toggle on the code, any point matching the code becomes part of the point group.

If you cannot select a point with the previous two methods, the Include tab enables you to include points by specifically entering in the selection criteria. The criteria include the point number (point number list or by selection), elevation, name, raw description, full description, and all points.• With numbers matching: This option selects points by a

point number range or list. When creating a list, sequential point numbers are hyphenated (1-20) and individual numbers are in a comma delimited list. A point list can include sequential and individual points (1-20, 14, 44, 50-60). Click Selection Set in Drawing to select the points in the drawing and list their point numbers at the top of the Include tab.

• With elevations matching: This option enables you to select points by entering a specific elevation or by specifying a minimum and/or maximum elevation. For example, valid entries include >100,<400 and >100. The first entry includes only points whose elevation is above 100, but



less than 400. The second entry includes only points whose elevation is greater than 100. A point with NO elevation cannot be selected using this method. An elevation range, defined by separating the start and end numbers with a hyphen, includes points whose elevation falls within the range (1-100). This can be combined with greater or less than symbols.

• With names matching: This option selects points based on matching their point names. Enter one or more point names separated by commas.

o With raw/full descriptions matching: This option selects points based on matching an entered raw or full description. Enter one or more descriptions separated by commas. You can use the same wildcards as the Description Key Set. Generally, this method uses the asterisk (*) as the wildcard after the description (e.g., PINE*, CTV*, CL*, etc.).

• Include all points: This option assigns all points in the drawing to the point group. When this option is toggled on, all other Include options are disabled.

The Exclude tab has the same options as the Include tab, except for the Include All Points option.

The Query Builder tab creates one or more expressions to select points. Each query is a row selecting points. As with all SQL queries, you combine expressions using the operators AND, OR, and NOT You can also use parentheses to group expressions.

The Overrides tab overrides the points in the point group's raw description, elevation, point style, and/or point label style. For example, you can override specific tree species symbols with a generic tree symbol, override a label style when displaying this group, or override the point and label style with none (to hide all points).

The point group display order affects points and their overrides. To change how the point groups display, manipulate the Point Group display order.The Point List tab displays the point group's points. This tab enables you to review points currently in the point group.

The Summary tab displays the point group's settings. You can print this tab as a report by cutting and pasting it into a document.

Updating Out-of-Date Point Groups

After defining point groups and then adding points to a drawing, the group goes out of date before assigning the


Survey Level 1

points to the group. This allows you to verify that the point(s) should become a part of the group. To review why a group is out of date, select the group, right-click, and select Show Changes... If the changes are correct, click Update to add the points to the group. If you know all the groups showing as out of date should be updated, right-click on the Point Groups collection and select Update. At this level, the command updates all point groups.

Overriding Point Group Properties

When working with points, you may want them to display different labels, not be visible, or show different symbols. Each desired change is a function of a point group override. A point group that contains all points and overrides their symbols and labels with none displays no points. This is similar to freezing all layers involved with points. A point group that changes what symbols a group displays overrides the label styles assigned to the point in the point group. To display a different symbol, the point group overrides the assigned point styles. To set the style and override the assigned styles, toggle on the point group in the Overrides tab and set the styles in the Override column of the point group, as shown in Figure 3-88.


13 Point Group Properties

Surveyor Smith

I Information Point Groins Raw Desc Matching Include Exdude Query Builder Overrides Pont list Summary

Prooerty Override

Q fc] Raw Description □

Point Elevation

0 E«5styteEl f^Pomt Label Style

O.OOO' %

Basic

Elevation and Description

Figure 3-88


Point Groups Display Properties

When creating a point group, it is placed at the top of the point group list. The point group list is more than a list of point groups; it is also AutoCAD Civil 3D's point draw order. AutoCAD Civil 3D draws the point groups on the screen starting from the bottom of the list to the top. If _AII Points is the first drawn point group and the remaining point groups are subsets of all points, you will not see the individual point group, just all of the points.

To view point groups that are a subset of all points, you must create a point group whose purpose is to hide all points. Many users call this popular point group No Display. With this group, any point group drawn after it displays its members without 'seeing' the other points.

As mentioned above, AutoCAD Civil 3D draws point groups from the bottom to the top of the list. To manipulate the display order, right-click on the Point Groups collection in the Prospector tab and select Properties. The Point Groups dialog box opens, enabling you to modify the point group display order with the arrows on the right side, as shown in Figure 3-89.

Cancel

Figure 3-89

These arrows enable you to select the desired point group and move it up or down in the list (or all the way to the top or bottom of the list

with one click, S3) in the hierarchy for display purposes. The Point Groups dialog box has two additional icons at the top. The first icon displays the difference between point groups and the second icon updates them all.

If you use Description Key Sets, a point will show the assigned point and label style when it is part of any point group. The only time the point displays another style is when you override the style (in the Point Group Properties dialog box, in the Overrides tab).


^.Pomt Groups

Name

Surveyor Smith _AD

Points No display Street

Light Boundary Pin

Survey

Description

3) E9

Apply

HelpOK

Survey Level 1

With the Description Key Set and display order shown in Figure 3-90, the points will show their originally assigned point label styles.

X !<► is

00Code

Style Point Label Style

Format

Layer Scale Param.

fcS

■^BLDG

0Bu*ing corner

0 Butong corner

0X-Bullding

pi Parameter

■&CB

0 Catch Basin

0Ex. Catch Basir label

r 0X-Storm

Q Parameter

t>*

0 Hydrant

0 <defaJt>

t* 0: -Water

PI Parameter

s

0Gas Valve

0<defau*>

t* 0X-<3as

p] Param


m


eter

01 Pin Found

0 <defau*>

t* ;0X-Survey Control

0 Parameter

rp-

-&LP

[3 Light Pole

[2] <dcfoult>

t* 0x notes

PI Poromctcr

■^HON

Hon Box

0<default>

t* 0X-Sirvey Control

p] Parameter

•^SMH

0SanMh

0Ex. San

SAN. MH.

0X-San*ary

PI Parameter

■^STMMH

0StmMh

0Ex. Stm

STM. MH.

0 X-Storm

p] Parameter;

<c c3

•SfcTREE

0Tree 0 Tree label

0X-Vegetatcn

@ Parameter

4&UP

0 Utility Pole

0 <default>

0x-Poles

0 Parameter

=

>0

■fewV

0 Water Valve

0<default>

0x-Water

p] Parameter

i_5. >

Figure 3-90

The No Display point group includes all points, but overrides the originally assigned point style and point label styles with <none>. When No Display is moved to the list's top, no points display. The Point Groups dialog box is shown in Figure 3-91.


Survey Level 1

Q Point Groups

Name Description

[<S>] Poles

[<s>] No Display

[<?>] _AII Points

[■€>] Water Structures

[<§>] Surveyor Smith

OK | | Cancel ~| | Apply [ | Help

Figure 3-91



Creating Point Groups

In this practice you create point groups.

Task 1 - Create Point Groups (Boundary Pin Survey)

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice or open the file SUV1-l1-Survey.dwg.

2. In the Prospector tab, select Point Groups, right-click, and select New..., as shown in Figure 3-92.

Master ViewG O Open Drawings6 Q Survey-Complete-SUVl

Points- —

Street Li • [<8>] .All Poir © Point Clouc ¥ Surfaces

Figure 3-92

3. In the Point Group Properties dialog box, in the Information tab, enter Boundary Pin Survey in the Name field, set the Point style to Iron Pin, and set the Point label style to Elevation and Description, as shown in Figure 3-93.

Jfe, Point Group Properties - Stogndsry Pin Su«vey

Infenr^twi jPocrt Groups j £usv. ZJesc MaUhng j Inciuclc j E>ckx

fismc:

BauRdaryPiri Survey Descr vtan:

DefaJt styles Pont style:iron Pn »

Pont label styte:BevKxsn arxi D e s - c n c » L*V ^

Figure 3-93


Practice 3D

Survey Level 1

4. Select the Include tab. Select the With raw descriptionmatching option and set it to yes (check mark). Enter *IP. (make sure a period follows IP) in the field to select all points that have the last three characters "IP." (iron pin). You can confirm this by going to the Point List tab, as shown in Figure 3-94.

Point Group Properties - Boundary Pin SurveyInformation j Pont Groups j Raw Desc Matching {Indude ] Exclude j:Query8uilder ] Overrides Point List Isummary J

Point Nu.

Easting

Northing

Point Elevati...

Name Raw Descripti..

Full Descript..

Descriptit

i 7286.7724m

3917.5908m

51.896m

Fd. IP.

Fd.IP.

S*

2 7145.0343m

3930.0483m

50287m

Fd.IP. Fd.IP.

S*

3 7067.3102m

3964.1860m

50.084m

Fd.IP. Fd.IP.

IS"

4 5990.8853m

3997.5930m

50.460m

Fd.IP. Fd.IP. S*

5 59613987m

1010.4823m

50.748m

Fd.IP. Fd. IP. S*

6 5942.3418m

1014.4780m

50.940m

Fd.IP. Fd.IP. s-

7 5971 rawm

1074.8413m

S1.(K4m

FH IP,

FH !P

s*

Figure 3-94

5. Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the changes.

Task 2 - Create point groups (No display).

Continue working with the drawing from the previous task. In this task you will use the point group to control the points display. Not only will you be able to display the same point differently, but you will also be able to control the visibility of the points. This eliminates having to use the Layer command to thaw and freeze layers.

1. As in Task 1, select Point Groups, right-click, and select New... to create a new point group. In the Infoirnation tab, enter No display for the Name.



2. Select <none> for both the Point style and the Point label style, as shown in Figure 3-95.

Default styles

Point style:

<none> |P^J

Point label style:<none> - | - ]

Figure 3-95


Survey Level 1

3. Select the Overrides tab and select the check boxes for Style and Point Label Style, as shown in Figure 3-96.

JjL Point Croup Properties - Mo Dwplay

Infarrwon J Por.l Ztouy. | Raw | Include j j Qwe* * 6uk*f OvcOn J

)Figure 3-96

4. Select the Include tab and select the Include all points option and set it to True (check mark). Select the Point List tab to confirm that all points have been included.

5. Click ------— -----to create the point group. Notice the points havedisappeared.

6. To control the hierarchy and the display of the point group style, go to the Prospector tab, select Point Groups, right-click, and select Properties.

7. In the Point Groups dialog box, select the Boundary Pin Survey

point group and move it to the top of the list by using the EB icon,

located to the right. Click ' ------- - - -----to apply the changes. Onlythe points in the Boundary Pin point group are now displayed. If you do not see the property pins, the image may be hiding them. You may have to type regen at the command prompt (type RE, and press <Enter).

8. Experiment with moving point groups up and down the list to control the display of points.

9. Save the drawing


Property Overrate KHfUw Owcc^O".

-f .U!5v.sr»ie <3*me>•f HH Per.! -atxH styfe C? <nooe >c


3.13 Reviewing and Editing Points

Reviewing and editing point data occurs throughout the AutoCAD Civil 3D environment. It is as simple as selecting a point in the drawing, right-clicking, and selecting Edit Points.... You can also edit points using the shortcut menu of the Points heading in the Prospector tab, as shown in Figure 3-97. Alternatively, you can click in a point entry in the Prospector's preview area.

I Toolspace ■—W Mi1<3 4 m

Master View ▼

b-D Open Drawings

& D SUVl-Sec3-Survey

i-41

$ Bs9] Point Groups j [<3>] Street Light j t[<S>] _All Points I }- <£!> Point Clouds E- (f) Surfaces

Alignments 5!-® Sites ® 39 Pipe Networks h® Corridors j • Assemblies ]— Subassemblies; I"

Intersections © S u r v e y L-M View Frame GrouDS

Figure 3-97

When selecting Edit Points..., AutoCAD Civil 3D displays the Point Editor vista inside the Panorama, as shown in Figure 3-98.


Create...

Export...

Transfer.

..

c

Edit Points..

Select

Zoom

to

Panto

Lock Unlock

Refresh

Survey Level 1

00

5a

Point Number

Easting

Norttsng |

Point Elevation

Name I Raw Description

1 Full Description | Description Format

GridE^I

4 2 46056.4068'

64751.9899'

42.051'

a a _)

1 3 46066.2621'

64753.6848'

42.451'

a a



4>

4 46076.1174'

64755.3798'

42.785'

Cl a

♦ s 46085.9727*

64757.0748'

42.977'

a a

6 46095.8280'

64758.7699*

43.078*

CL a

7 46105.6621'

64760.5825*

43.178"

CL a

4- 8 46115.4S28"

64762.6170*

43.292*

CL a

9 46125.1949*

64764.8722*

43.487*

CL a

in

46134.8S37*

54767.3470'

43.773*

CL a

<1

_3


Survey Level 1

Figure 3-98



Repositioning Point Labels

Each point label style has Dragged State parameters. These parameters affect the label's behavior when moving the label from its original label position. Depending on the Dragged State parameters, a label can change completely (Stacked text) or display as it was originally defined (As composed). An example of a label is shown in Figure 3-99.

48

1 2 8 . 6 4 EOPFigure 3-99

When selecting a point, it displays multiple grips. Be careful to not grip select the move point grip when your intention is to

relocate the label.

A point displays two grips when selected. The Rectangle label grip to Move, Rotate, Toggle sub item grips and Reset label. The second is the Diamond point object grip to Move, Rotate both label and marker, Rotate just the marker, reset marker rotation and Reset all, as shown in Figure 3-100.

Figure 3-100

Each label component can be modified and the change is only for that point.

Point objects can be set to automatically rotate to match the current view through style settings. If this is not preferred, they can have a rotation assigned directly through the AutoCAD Properties dialog box.

You can reset a label to its original position by selecting the point, right-clicking, and selecting Reset Label.


\ Ik.

/ Move point

Rotate label and marker

Rotate marker Reset

marker rotation Reset all

Move label Rotate label Toggle sub item grips Reset label

Survey Level 1

Manipulating Points

Task 1 - Modify the position of the labels.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice or open the file SUV1-J1-Survey.dwg.

2. In the Prospector tab, select Points to preview them in the Prospector's preview area, typically located at the bottom.

3. In the preview point list, scroll down until you see point number 249. Select it, right-click, and select Zoom to. This positions the point at the center of the screen.

4. In a typical drafting workflow, points can overlap, making them illegible. Since the Point Style's text height is a function of the drawing scale, changing the Annotation Scale changes the text size. In the Status Bar at the bottom of the window, set the Annotation Scale to 1:500 [1"=40'], as shown in Figure 3-101, to change the point size in the drawing.

2MODEL| E Im ISt[A 1" jjj&j® WK1

Figure 3-101

5. Zoom into point 249 and select it to display its grips. Select the Drag Label grip, as shown in Figure 3-102, to relocate the label.

\6. With the label still showing grips, hover on the rectangle grip and

select Reset Label.


Practice 3j

Figure 3-102


With the label still showing grips, hover over the square label grip to display the options for moving, rotating, and additional sub item grips, as shown in Figure 3-103. Select Rotate label and rotate the label.

\—it—

Move label Rotate

label Toggle sub item

grips Reset label

Figure 3-103

8. With the label still showing grips, hover over the dimond point grip to display the options to move, rotate label and marker, and Rotate marker, as shown in Figure 3-104. Select Rotate marker and rotate the marker.


Figure 3-104

Move point

Rotate label and marker

Rotate marker Reset

marker rotation Reset all


Survey Level 1

3,14 Locking/Unlocking Points

AutoCAD Civil 3D has point locking that prevents its properties from

edits. A locked point displays the >v (Lock) icon.

To lock all points, select Points in the Prospector tab, right-click, and select Lock, as shown on the left in Figure 3-105. You can also lock points in a point group. To lock individual points, select the point, right-click, and select Lock, as shown on the right. You can also select points in a drawing and use the same right-click method to lock them.

You can select a range of points by selecting a point from the list and while holding down <Shift>, select another point from the list. This selects all points between the first and second selected points. Select individual points by holding down <Ctrl> and selecting points.

5 Too Is pace

a _Master View

S O Open Drawings A0 D baseplan

m®

[<S>] Point Gr.

Create...

Surface; Export...

m "!> Alignmer

Transfer...

® ® Sites SR

Pipe Net

Edit Points...

I " IE Corridor Select

Assembl Zoom to

0j Subasse

Intersec ^

Panto

s Unlock

Survey

f"*1 View

Frc

,-M. « j

< Refresh

EdrtPonts...

Renumber... Datum...

Elevations from Surface... Apply

cescripcion Keys

Delete...

Select Zoom to Panto

Unlock

Export .andXML..

Add to Project.. * Line Shading

Point Num... Easting Northing

2 2207990.5899' 31383.1270'

3 2207978.C234' 31281.S713'

4s" 4 2207971.5609' 30954.4349'

4 5 2208148.5540' 32981.2322'

4 6 2208062.5231' 31723.0935'

4" 7 2208901.5900' 31397.3883'

<&■ 8 2208901.5938' 31384.2748'

4-..............2

Copy value to clipboard Cupy Lu

UipLudfd

l3l

4 4 2207971.9609' 30954.43491

X4> 5

2208148.55^0' 32981.2322' I f: -rt -


Toolspace

a% □ sMaster View

S Q Op

fa Q9

ffi

ml m

%! i m


4 6 2208062.5231' 31723.0935" — o

7 2208901.6900' 31397.3883


Survey Level 1

Figure 3-105



Reviewing/Editing Points

Review and/or edit points using one of the following methods: Use the tools in the Modify tab > Points panel; select the Points heading, right-click, and select Edit Points...; select points in a drawing, right-click, and select Edit Points... These commands enable you to edit all or selected points, revise the points' elevation, reassign point elevations from a surface, or renumber the points.

In the Point Editor, use <Shift> or <Ctrl> to a select a range or set of individual points. After selecting the points, right-click and select the desired editing option, as shown in Figure 3-106. You can also select points graphically and then right-click to edit the points.

Em


Survey Level 1


Pant Number Northing Easting Point Elevation RawDe. .

Fid Description

0e

4 11 631369.6791' 2208832.128S' 809.210' APR

APR

Export... I APP

32 631364.1470

L APR

•#' 33 631354.0019

Renumber... Datum...

Elevations fnm

Surface... Apply

Description Keys

L* APR

k> 34 631353.8269

APR

4 35 631357.8617

APR

4" 36 631369.0573

L . . ....... APR

H 631397.7820

Delete... M APR!

K >5 <.t . APR!

4 16 631413.6262

Select ti APR1

4 22 631413.5767

Zoom to Panto M APR1

4 23 631407.5446

[r~h

APR1

A . .. -----------------------------------------------------------

— .jtjj_Lock i — >

UnlockExport LancfcML...



Line ShadingCopy value to clipboard Copy to diptoard

Figure 3-106

A

£

3-

-i> X

Survey Level 1

Point Locking and Editing

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice, or open the file SUV1-J1-Survey.dwg.

2. In the Prospector tab, select Points to display a point list in the Prospector's preview area at the bottom.

3. Scroll through the list, select point number 10, right-click, and select Zoom to.

4. In the drawing, select point 10 and notice the move grip at its marker, as shown in Figure 3-107.

P..

In the Prospector tab, select Points, right-click, and select Lock, as shown on the left in Figure 3-108. Notice the points in the Prospector's preview area now display the lock icon, as shown on the right.

bJ -Q Op?n Drawings

* 4 ' 1

E [^j Point Grou

• W -AllPo* Street

Create..Expe

rt- Transfer.

..

i«i Bound

Edit Points-

I'M Nodi!

Select 7 5921.0059m

10248413m

© Point Clou

fo 8 5890 3306m

10403957m

ffi-£) Surfa

Zoom to P

>9 59

803986.741



ces Panto .

<*

1372m

2m

Alignment

10

59758815m

39843635m

S) Sites

■SSBIHI 11

58745934m

39911886m

+ SB Pipe Netw

Unlock 12

5825.2984m

3931.2675m

Figure 3-108

Select point 10 and note that although the move grip is displayed, you are not able to move the point, as shown in Figure 3-109.

_ 51 1 n oD . 5 l > F d . I P

fFigure 3-109


Practice 3k

Survey Level 1

7. In the Prospector tab, select Points. Right-click and select Edit Points...., as shown on the left in Figure 3-110. The points display the lock icon and the editor now has a gray background, as shown on the right in Figure 3-110.

Master View

9 1906980.1372

m520986.7412m 51.101

m

+0

10

1906975.8815m

620984.3635m 51306m

11

1906874.9934m

6209911886m 56.025m

12

1906825.2984m

620931.2675m 60.468m

Figure 3-110

8. Select point 5 from the list of points. Scroll down the list, press <Shift>

and select point 10. With points 5 to 10 highlighted, as shown on the left in Figure 3-111, right-click, and select Unlock. Note the points no longer display the lock icon and have a white background, as shown on the right in Figure 3-111. These two things indicate that the points are available for editing.

r Eas

ting

Northing

Point Elevati... Nan

3 70673102m

39641860m

50D84rn

4 59905853m

39975930m

50.460m

5 S 86} 3987m

UOlMBBm

50.748m

6 59423418m

! 1014.4780m

50 mm j

7 iwnsmm

jl024«13m

53.064m

8 'sms306m

16409957m

49124m

9 'mornim

5986.7412m

51101m |

10 S975.8815m

139343635m

51.306m ;

11 5874.9934 m

39911886m

56.025m

12 58252984m

39312675m

60.468m

ID CCO"> CI —Point Number

Easting

Northing

Point Elevati... Nan

40 3 70673102m

3964.1860m

50.084 m

4-0 4 5990.8853m

3997.5930m

50.460m

4 5 59613987m

1010.4823m

50.748m

6 59423418m

1014.4780m

50.940m

7 5921.0059m

1024.8413m

51.064m

4 8 5890.8306m

1040.9957m

49124m

9 59801372m

3986.7412m

51101m

❖ 10

5975.8815m

3984.3635m

51306m

4-0 11

5874.9934m

39911886m

56.025m

4-0A <7?

12

58252984m

3931.2675m

60.468m


Ej] Open Drawings J S O Survey-Complete-SUVl

i ♦JBHBBBBB®V ?8>] Pointii H .A % H Str i

f<S>]

So '" Nt

Create...Export- Transfer...

I Point

WW MK-


Figure 3-111

9. In the Point Editor dialog box, double-click on point 10. The cell goes into edit mode now that it has been unlocked.

10. Close the Panorama by clicking without making any changes.

11. In the drawing, select point 10, right-click, and review the editing options in the shortcut menu.

12. Review the commands displayed on the Ribbon. Because this is a contextual object, all entries are tools that are applicable to a point.



in the top right corner

Survey Level 1

3.15 Point Reports

The surveyor needs to produce point reports. These can include a record list for the project, a checklist to find errors, reference for field crews, stakeout, etc. Incorporating survey data with an AutoCAD Civil 3D engineering project is unique in that it relies on connection and communication with third party survey equipment and software. Autodesk has collaborated with the major survey equipment vendors and they have developed applications that interface their equipment with AutoCAD Civil 3D. The following is a list of these vendors:

• TDS Survey Link • TOPCON Link<> Trimble Link 8 Carlson Connect (Not yet

• Leica X-Change available for Civil 3D 2011)

Civil 3D points can be exported and then uploaded to the survey equipment without relying on manually created lists. However, a documented point list may be desirable. There are several ways to create reports about points.

Point Reports - Reports Manager

The Civil 3D Reports Manager produces several point reports. To create reports from the Reports Manager, the Toolbox tab must be available in the Toolspace. To display the Toolbox tab, go to the Home tab and select Toolbox in the Palettes drop-down list. Then select the Toolbox tab and expand the Reports Manager collection to display a list of object type reports, as shown in Figure 3-112.

1% o a

OB Ports Jn.CSV EB Poirts_List HQ Radal_Stakeout OB Station Offset to Foints

ffi IB Profile£6 IB Surface

5 Subscription Extension Manager

6 Miscellaneous Iftilities

Figure 3-112


I


Points are easily organized into a convenient, legible list that displays the point number, northing, easting, elevation, and full description (see the example in Figure 3-113). Another point report lists the points' station and offset values relative to an alignment. Another report calculates distances and angles from an occupied and a backsight. You can transfer points to Microsoft Excel spreadsheets using a CSV report.

To create these reports, select the report's name, right-click, and select Execute...,

Number

Northing Eastina Elevation

Description

l 632055.919 2208068.041 900.655 MON

2 031390.407 2207989.483 900.171 MON

3 630834.659 2207979.534 898.369 MON

4 631382.131 2207989.229 900.174 MON

Figure 3-113Point Editor Reports

Another report method is to use the Point Editor vista. In the Prospector tab, select Points, right-click, and select Edit... to display the Point Editor vista, as shown in Figure 3-114.

Point Nu.

Easting

Northing

Point E...

N.. Raw.-

Full..

0_

Gnd Easting

Grid Northing

Longitude

Latitude

Scale F«...

Converge.-

S...

17286.7724m

3917.5908m

51.856m

Fd. IP.

Fd. IP.

i-

1907286.7724m

620917.5908 m

W117* 14-41.97-

N33M5'10.74"

1X100

0" 32 4835"

Iror

27145.0i4im

3930XM83m

50.287m

Fd.IP.

Fd. IP.

s-

1907145.0343m

620930.0483m

W117-14'47.45'

N33" 15* 11.10"

1.000

O- 32* 51.36"

Iror

3706731

5964J8

50.

Fd.

Fd.

$■ 190

706731

620964J

W117e 14

N33' 15*

1.0

0- 32'

Iro


Survey Level 1

02m

60m

084m

lP.

IP.

02m

860m

5046'

1229*

00

53X12'

r

iS908S53m

3997.5930m

50.460m

Fd. IP.

Fd. IP.

s-

180u990.88S3m

620997.5930m

W117"14' 53.43"

N33" 15* 1335"

1.000

12* 54.65"

Iror

559613987 m

1010.4823m

50.748m

Fd.IP.

Fd. IP.

s-

19069613987m

6210104823m

WU7" 14' 54.57-

M3ri5*1366-

1.000

0" 32'55.28"

Iror

658423418m

1014.4780m

50.940m

Fd. IP.

Fd.IP.

s-

19069423418m

621014.4780m

W117* 14*5531-

N33-15* 13.78'

1.000

0* 32' 55.69"

Iror

75921.0059m

1024.8413m

51.064m

Fd.IP.

Fd.IP.

5'

1906921.0059m

621024.8413m

Wlir 14*56.14"

N33-15*14J1"

1.000

«• 32' 56.14"

Iror

Figure 3-114

In the vista, you can select individual points using <Ctrl> or select blocks of points using <Shift>. When done selecting points, right-click and select Copy to clipboard. You can then paste the copied points into Excel, Notepad, or any application that accepts the points, as shown in Figure 3-115.

lft t>igt Layout

- IS - A" Aa • '± & -A

Fort*.

JjS*C O1 Point NunEasting

2 11907286.7 620917.59 51.896m

Fd. I

Fd. I

$•


Beak; - MtettMft

Ewel Dfvtlocfi

AdO-lma *>"i *—' -j

I^r- Wrap Text

i|C ijt -ij ttei<)* ci Certtei

»

A-iqnm<nt

•a a


P.

P.

3 2 1907145.0 620930.04 50.287m

Fd. IP.

Fd. IP.

s*

4 3 1907067.3 620964.18 50.084m

Fd. IP.

Fd. IP.

$■

5 4 1906990.8 620997.5 5 50^60m

Fd. IP.

Fd. IP.

5*

6 S 1906961.3 621010,48 50.743m

Fd. IP.

Fd. IP.

S-

7 6 1906942.3 621014.47 50.940m

Fd. IP.

Fd. IP.

$•

8 7 1906921.0 621074.84 51.064m

Fd. IP.

Fd. IP.

S"

Autoflejk v«uB

-MmConditional fcrr.U Ce»! *orp»«<flfl - Tabic • Stytej -

5tf.fi

3-108 © 2011, ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge®S- ft— ... tl I .. ...I? JJ

Insert Delete Poena!

Cfih

fcj F 6_______H___ I | J ___V . | -M N ; CNorthing Points lev Natr Raw Oescr FuilDescr-Dr.se Grid Eastii end Nortl Longitude Latitude Scale Converge! Style1907286.7 620917.69 Wlir 14' N33' IS' li

1907145.0 620930.04 Wlir 14' N33' IS' 1

190VB6/.3 620964.18 Wlir 14' Hi3' 15' 11906990.8 620997.59 Wlir 14' N33-15' 1. 190696L3 621010.48 Wlir 14' N33' 15' 1 1906942.1621014.47 Wlir 14' N33' 15' 1 1906921.0 621024.84 Wlir 14' N33' 15' !•

Point LatH Point uy< Project V( X-Y s0 0

Survey Level 1

Figure 3-115



Point Reports

Task 1 - Create Point Reports.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice, or open the file SUV1-J1-Survey.dwg.

2. If the Toolbox tab is not displayed in the Toolspace, go to the Home tab and click the Toolbox icon, as shown in Figure 3-116. The Toolspace should now show the Toolbox tab.

[egte

<?Ss>

Toolspace

U HFigure 3-116

3. Select the Toolbox tab and expand the Reports Manager collection to view the list of object type reports. Expand the Points collection to see the list of point reports, as shown in Figure 3-117.

if Toolspace

&iB 'IO Reports Manager 5 Eg Alignment t IQ Corridor ft- [0 Parcel j ? FQ Pipes ■ i E0 Points

Points _in_CSV EQ Points_List [0 Radial.Stakeout HQ Station Offset to Points ; f IS Profile ff f£] Surface S Ell BreaklineS Subscription Extension Manager S Miscellaneous Utilities

Figure 3-117

4. Select Point List, right-click, and select Execute.


Survey Level 1

5. In the Export to LandXML dialog box, click ---------** 1 togenerate the report. In the Save As dialog box enter a file name or accept the default CivilReport.html, and save the file. If the file exists, you will be asked if you want to replace it.

6. The point list is displayed in Internet Explorer. Review the report and when done, close it.

1 0" 32*56.: Iron Pin


France 3;


Review Questions

Where can you control the appearance of a point label when the point label grip is selected in the drawing and moved away from the point itself?

What is attached to a drawing that prevents you from having to recreate all Civil 3D styles and settings every time a new drawing is created?

How do you control the next point number to be used in a drawing?

Explain the display of the point style if the point is tagged by a Description Key Set and a Point Group?

Where do all points permanently reside in the drawing?

Can the_/4// Points point group be deleted?

Can a point group be made out of point groups?


Question 1

Question 2

Question 3

Question 4

Question 5

Question 6

Question 7

Survey Level 1

Section 3: Civil 3D Survey Figures

3.16Survey Figures...........................................................................3-98

Creating Figure Prefixes........................................................ 3-102

3.17lmporting a Field Book..............................................................3-104

Importing a Field Book........................................................... 3-107Task 1: Import a field book into the network............................ 3-107

Task 2: Create a new network..................................................3-108

3.18Working with Figures................................................................3-110

Field Book Edits, Styles, and Figure Prefixes.......................... 3-112Task 1: Edit the field book....................................................... 3-112Task 2: Re-import the field book...............................................3-114Task 3: Create a figure manually..............................................3-114

3„16 Survey Figures

Survey figures consist of linework generated by coding and placed ina file that is imported into the Survey Database. A figure representslinear features (edge-of-pavement, toe-of-slopes, etc.)

A figure thus has many functions, as follows:

• A figure displays linework in a drawing.• All preset figures in a drawing can be defined as breaklines for a

surface definition with just one step.° All preset figures in a drawing can be defined as parcel lines.• A figure can be drawn as a pipe run. For example, a surveyor notices

that only one pipe comes through a manhole. The surveyor therefore invokes a figure command to draw a survey figure that denotes the location of a pipe run. The Elevation Editor in AutoCAD Civil 3D enables you to lower each survey figure at each manhole to the distance of what was measured in the field, and what was written on the manhole field notes as the flow elevation at the invert of the pipe run. The pipe functionality can make this line represent various types of locations within the circumference of the cross-sectional pipe and convert the survey figure into an existing pipe run.

• All figures can be targets for Width or Offset Targets within a Corridor.• All figures can be targets for Slope or Elevation Targets within a

Corridor (e.g., Limits of construction for a road rehab project might be to the face of walk, which exists in the drawing as a Survey Figure, hence a target).

- The Figure Prefix database should be set up before importing any survey data to obtain the desired entities in a drawing. As point and label styles and the Description Key Set need to exist before importing points, figure styles and entries in the Figure Prefix database need to exist before importing survey data.



The Drawing Settings dialog box, as shown in Figure 3-118, sets a universal layer for figures. You can access these settings by selecting the drawing name in the Settings tab, right-clicking, and selecting Edit Drawing Settings... When selecting the Object Layer tab and scrolling to the bottom of the list, you see the default layer names.

Your office will likely have one or more default layers for each of the linework types. For example, edge-of-pavement, sidewalk, etc. all each have their own layers in the drawing. To accomplish this, you need to define figure styles.


I 5T

Figure Styles

12 Drawing Settings bascplanllntfs and Zone Transformation i Object Layers Abbreviations Ambtcnt Settings

Object Layer Modifier

Value

Locked

UJi Section C-

R0AD-5CTN

Nmc

a

Secbon-Labeing

C-ROAD-SCTN-TEXT

None

f

Section View

C-ROAD-SCTN-VIEW

None

£ -

Section vievH-abelng

C-ROAD-SCTN-TEXT

None

;

f"j Section View Quaritty Tafcecfl..

C-ROAD-SCTN-TAbt

None

a

Li Sheet C-AWX>

None

a

§ Structure

C-STRM-

srRC

None

a

Structue-Labetaig

C-STRM-TEXT

None

r

Subassembly

C-ROAD-ASSM

None

i

PI Surface legend JaN*

C-TOPO-TABl

None

a

SixveyNetwork

V-SURV-NTWK

None

a

Tin Surface C-

TOPONone

a

Tn Su-face-tabeing

C-TOPO-TEXT

None

a

It] view Frame

C-

A'JMO-VFPr*'

None

a

^ View Frame-labetevi

C-ANNO-VFRM-TEXT

None

»

C\) Enter 3 sn3'e * (asterisk) in the value fteM to include the object name as the prefix or suffix value ri a layer name.¥□ Irr*r»ediate and Independent layer on/off control of dispiay components

Survey Level 1

Apw | 1 Help |

Figure 3-118

Figure styles affect how survey linework appears in a drawing. They should be part of your template file. These styles are not critical, but to make figures work, you should at least define the layers they will use in the drawing.

Figure styles are tied to the Figure Prefix database. The Figure Prefix database assigns a figure style to a figure that is imported into a drawing.

A figure style includes the layers for its linework and markers. You should make these layers match the layer names in the figure styles.

A marker is a symbol placed on the figure's segment midpoints and end points. They call attention to the figure's geometry. Even though a figure style includes marker definitions, they do not need to display.

Like points, figures are three-dimensional and use the layers set in the Display tab of the Figure Style dialog box. The Information tab assigns the style a name. The Plan, Profile, and Section tabs define how the marker displays in each of these views.


Drawing Settings


The Figure Style dialog box is shown in as shown in Figure 3-119.

13 Figure Style • Road Centerline

I W | | Cancel | [ Apply | | Help |

Figure 3-119

The 3D Geometry tab defines a figure's vertical behavior. By default, the elevation of the point defines the figure. The Display tab defines which figure's components display and what layers they use for plan, profile, and section views, as shown in Figure 3-120.

12 Figuie Style - Road Center line

Information Plan and Model : 3D Geometry Profile Sector Display Summary

Plan V

ModelProfileSection

Vertex Markers

Midpoint Markers 9Endpoint MarkersAdditional Markers

LT ScaleLinewe... Plot

Style

1.0000 ByLayer SyBteek

1.0000 ByLayer Bydhd.

1.0000 ByLayer feSUI.

1.0000 ByLayer ByE&rck

1.0000 ByLayer Byfftvl


Information ' Plan and Model 30 Geometry Profile Section j Display SummaryProperty valu

ea Vertex Markers

Marker styleAign markers with figure

yes

B Midpoint Markers

Marker styleAlign markers with figure

yes

B Endpoint Markers

Start point marker styleEnd pant marker style

Align markers with figure

yes

B Additional Markets

Marker styleAdditional marker placement method Non

einterred ; pj.acVjr

Dt.ide fijurg. by 1 S

Place marker at figure start point no

Place marker at figure end point

no

Align markers with figure

yes

<—___—-------------—--------------------------------------------------- - - -------------------------------------------- --------------------—.........——----------------------------

View Direction:

sible

Ccjor_ IBYLAYER

IBYLAYER

I

BYLAYER

I

BYLAYER

I

BYLAYER

Linetyp

e

ByLaye

r

ByLaye

r

ByLaye

r

ByLaye

r

ByLaye

r

Layer V-ROAD-CNTR V-ROAD-CNTR V-ROAD-CNTR V-ROAD-CNTR V-ROAD-CNTR

Survey Level 1

1 OK I | Cancel | [ Apply | | Help [

Figure 3-120



The Figure Prefix database assigns the figure a style, a layer, and defines whether the figure is a surface breakline or lot line (parcel segment). If you did not define any figure styles, you should at least assign a layer to properly place the figure in the drawing. Toggling on the Breakline property, as shown in Figure 3-121, enables you select all tagged survey figures and assign them to a surface without having to insert or select from a drawing. Toggling on the Lot Line property creates a parcel segment from the figure in the drawing and if there is a closed polygon, assigns a parcel label and an entry in the survey site.

12 New Figure Prefix

Property Value

Name IfeGUT i

Breakline 0Yes

Lot Line □ Mo

Layer ^X-Storm VStyle Hjg Pavement VSite Survey 5ite V

Figure 3-121

If the Name is GUT, in the example show above, then any figure starting with GUT uses these settings. This is similar to using a Description Key Set, except the entry in the Figure Prefix database does not need an asterisk (*). The entry GUT matches GUT1 through GUT100. When inserting survey figures in the drawing, Survey looks at the Figure Prefix database for style or layer values.


Figure Prefix Database

m

Survey Level 1

Creating Figure Prefixes

Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice or open the file SUV1-J1-Survey.dwg, from one of the following folders:

Metric:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-M\Drawings\Survey Imperial:


You might have to change the draw order to be able to view other objects. In Model Space, select the image, right-click, and select Display Order>Send to Back.

Select the Survey tab. Select Figure Prefix Databases, right-click, and select New... Enter C3D Training for the name.

Select the newly created C3D Training Figure Prefix database, right-click, and select Make Current.

Select the C3D training Figure Prefix database again, right-click, and select Manage Figure Prefix Database..., as shown in Figure 3-122.

B Figure Prefix Databases

■■931 C3D Trainina 1r Qi Sample Manage Figure Prefix Database-

l-rh Trainina Make current

--------------------------------------Figure 3-122


Practice 3m

3.

4.

5.


Click ^ to create a new Figure definition. AutoCAD Civil 3D creates a default Figure. Change the Name to Trail, and set the Breakline to Yes and the Style to Road Centerline, as shown in Figure 3-123. Any figure starting with Trail will now be selectable for a surface breakline and use the style Road Centerline. As noted earlier, unlike the Description Key Set, an asterisk (*) is not necessary to match Traill, Trail2, etc. Click

to exit the dialog box.


OK

Name Breakline Lot Line Layer Style Site

& Trail 0 Yes QNo OgjRoad Centerline

^J Survey Site

Figure 3-123

Survey Level 1

7. Click "tj3 to create a new Figure definition. Change the name to Building, and set the Breakline to No and the Style to Buildings.




3.17 Importing a Field Book

To import a field book, you use the Survey's Import Events collection. Import Events provides access to an import wizard, which takes you through the steps of importing a file. To open the import wizard, select the Import Events in the Survey, right click, and select Import survey data...

The import wizard's first screen, Specify Database, is shown in Figure 3-124. This screen sets the survey, creates a new survey, and edits a survey's settings.

12 Import Survey Data - Specify Database

Select an existing survey database, or create a new one.

Survey databases

Name cc-loop

Closed-Connected Commercial Site CPL ASCII DUDLEY Jewel ^ Kean LINEWORK Monroe Topo jfe

Newton-Dudley Nichols PEORIA Road Survey fie, RUSH STREET

STEWARTS-

KILUNGTON Survey

Working TEST

Travetse and TODO

Edit Survey Database Settings.

31 **»

Figure 3-124


► Specify

Patafrjse

Specify Data

Source

Specif v Network

import

Potion;

Create New Survey Database..

Cancel

Survey Level 1

C l i c k — — T h e Specify Data Source screen, as shown in Figure 3-125, defines the file import type, the file's path, and—if it is a coordinate file—its format.

13 Import Survey Data - Specify Data Source

Specify the data source type and select the data.

Data tout* tvpe © Field Boot Fie OLereKMLFie O Point File O Points from Drawing

Source file

Selected (fa_________________________________

C:\Civil 30 2010 Survey Exercise FlesMinewoiklbk

Help

Figure 3-125

C l i c k — — ' . T h e Specify Network screen, as shown in Figure 3-126, enables you to change the network or create a new survey network.

13 linpoit Survey Data - Specify Network

®SwtlfYCsMte*' !

5BCtfvDtf45W« ►

seecfY Network Inuwt

Ootions

Select an existing suvey network, or create a new one.Survey networks ............................................ ............................................-................ ..............................

Name Description

jgsfce Topo HHHHHHHI H HI


(D

SfiseftOaSabjs

s > Soeoty

Pat* Soiree SC-

M*V NftviOTK

ti.ipcrtOuUyc.

Survey Level 1

Wpvt

Click ---------------. The Import Options screen, as shown inFigure 3-127, sets the values for the import. These settings affect what the import does and what support files it uses.

a Import Survey Data - Import Options


LS

Soect'y Data Source Specfv Network ►

taaaijJEtfflBf

Speedy the fnport settings tot the selected data source

Import setingt —----—■■—Property

Field book filename (.FBK)

C:\Qvil3D20l0SurveyEjterdseF3esVin...

Current equipment database

cj MyEqupment v

Curent equipment

jify Imperial v

Show Interactive graphics

0 Yes

Current figure prefix database

Sample v

Process inework during Import

E]ves

Current fcrework code set

Sample v ;

Process Snewcck sequence

By import order v

Import event name

bneworkibk

Import event descriptionAssign offset to point identifiers

□ No

Point identifier offsetInsert network object

□ no

Insert figure objects

0Yes

Insert survey points

0Yes

Display tolerance errors in Event Viewer

Elves

Back | | F«reh | | Caned | | Help [


Figure 3-127

If the field book has figure coding from a conversion, you do not need to toggle on the Process linework during import property. This is for files with Linework Code Set commands and no CONT or END lines.

Inserting figures requires entries in the Figure Prefix database and figure styles in the drawing. This is required to point figure and linework to the correct layers in the drawing and to specify if the figure is also a breakline in a surface.

When inserting points, it is necessary to have a Description Key Set defined to assign point, point label styles, and layers, and to translate raw descriptions to full descriptions.


Survey Level 1

Importing a Field Book

Task 1 - Import a field book into the network.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice or open the file SUV1-J1-Survey.dwg.

2. Continue with the previously opened survey database, or close the currently opened survey database, and open Surveyl Data I. For information on how to open a survey database refer to Appendix A-1.

3. To import a field book file, expand the current opened survey database collection and expand the Networks collection. Select the Site Topo network, right-click, and select Import > Import Field Book, as shown in Figure 3-128

S Toolspace MBH

HI^ r m


Practice 3n

' flQ Surveyl Data C

Surveyl Data 1

I $ Import Events

j SI .0 Site-Survey2 : £S

Networks

j j B-EESESij~ [ES] Network Group: ; j

— Figures

1 [&] Figure Groups p-, i ® t?

Survey Points ' ffl- ^ Survey Point

Gn Siitvevl DataN? !

Properties...

I-] |Top] |2D Wireframe

onr0 O Mo o <3

Importfiel^jook^^^^Import point tile... Import points

from drawing..

a. o

Insert into drawing Remove from

drawing...

Report tolerance errors

Automatic update Update

network

Reset-

Survey Command Window-

Edit field book- Export field

book...

Figure 3-128

For the Field book filename (.FBK), browse to C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-Geomatics\Survey-Pickup, select Site-Survey3.fbk, and open it.


to accept the changes when done.

Property Value

Field book filename (.FBK) C:\Civii 3D Projects\Civil3D-trainin...

Current equipment database Jjj) Sample -

Current equipment jif Sample -

Show interactive graphics 0 Yes

Current figure prefix database & C3D Training

Process linework during import □ No

Current linework code set Sample

Process linework sequence By import order

Import event name Site-Sun/ey3.fbk

Import event description

Assign offset to point identifiers □ No

Point identifier offset

Insert network object □ Yes

Insert figure objects 0 Yes

Insert survey points □ Yes

Display tolerance errors in Event Viewer □ No

Figure 3-129

Task 2 - Create a new network.

You have now imported the field book file into the existing network, Site Topo. In this task you will create a new network and import the field book file into it.


OK

Yes. Click5. In the import Field Book dialog box, set the following values, as shown in Figure 3-129: Show interactive graphics to Yes, Process linework during import to No, Insert network object to Yes, Insert figure objects, to Yes, and Insert survey points to

OK

Cancel Help

Survey Level 1

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice or open the file SUV1-N2-Survey.dwg.

2. Continue with the previously opened database, or close the currently opened survey database, and open Surveyl Data N2. On how to open a survey database refer to Appendix A-1.

3. In the Survey Databases>current opened survey database collection, select Networks, right-click, and select New..., as shown in Figure 3-130.



4. Enter ExRoad for the name.

5. To import the existing road Mission Avenue survey, select the

network ExRoad, right-click, and select lmport>!mport FieldBook.

6. For the Field book filename (. FBK), browse to C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-Geomatics\Survey-Pickup\ and select Road-Survey.fbk and open it.

7. In the import Field Book dialog box, set the following values: Show interactive graphics to Yes, Process linework during import to No, Insert network object to Yes, Insert figure objects to Yes,

and Insert survey points to Yes. Click ' --------— -----to accept thechanges.

8. Under the Survey Databases>current opened database>Import Events collections, note that AutoCAD Civil 3D software keeps a record of the imported events. You can re-import the data, as shown in Figure 3-131, if any changes are made to the original field book file.


Report tolerance errors

Itj [0] Survey Point Group

: [Eh] Figure

Groups i* O Survey

Points

Insert into drawing

Remove from drawing...

PToolspace

HL « «

-- Networks A ICS SiteTopo i- IB Ex Read

jjjll Properties...

Re-import Process Linework...

Insert into drawing Remove

from drawing...

Figure 3-130

~[)CS] Network Groups

Figures "" [&] Figure Groups Delete...

Survey Level 1



Figure 3-131


3.18 Working with Figures

Figures can be surface breaklines. The layer they reside on can be turned off before the final deliverable plots. A figure does not need to be inserted into a drawing to review its location. By selecting a figure from the survey's figure list, it is previewed in the drawing, as shown in Figure 3-132.

Right-click on a selected figure under the Figures collections to access a list of options, as shown in Figure 3-133, that enable you to remove the


Command:

Figure 3-132

Survey Level 1

figure from the drawing, display its properties, insert the figure into the drawing, or insert its points into the drawing.

fe o m 1B & Figures

Lb5a

Properties...

Edit...

&a , a

Modify Figure ►

Update figure

B a a a a

Display inverse...

Display mapcheck...

Insert into drawing

Remove from

drawing...

&a a art.

Identify figure

Export field book...

5how properties

Preview settings...

Delete...

Points ►

Zoom to Pan to

Refresh

Figure 3-133

Access the Panorama's Grading Elevation Editor tab by selecting the figure in the drawing, right-clicking, and selecting Elevation Edit... Icons in the editor enable you to raise or lower its elevation for all or single vertices, as shown in Figure 3-134. You can also click in each cell and edit its elevation. The edits made in this Panorama transfer back to the survey when you select Update Survey Data from Drawing (select the figure and right-click to access this option).

Pi

U—I LJ



Uu,

ci ^ a tt "0- ci LI

I &J?Z -' J, O Eft

Station

Bevabon

Length

G>«te Ahead

Grade Back

A 0+00.00

809.2101

3.392-

-0.36%

0.36%

1 0+08.39

eos.iso'

6.698'

0.90%

0.90%

0+15.09

809.120T

12.655'

•0.32%

0.32%

£ A 0+27.74

809.080'

35.96!'

0.11%

-0.11%

S 0+43.71

809.120*

4.9S4'

0.20%

-0.20%

i A 0+68.66

809.13tf

21.989-

0.27%

-0.27%

Q A 0 80


Survey Level 1

. +90.65

9.19ff

When a figure is selected in the drawing, the Ribbon displays all tools applicable to the figure. If you click the Edit Geometry icon on the Ribbon, you can also add or remove vertices, and offset figures to create new figures (e.g., top-face-curb from the gutter figure).



Practice 3o

If the No Display Point Group is at the top of the Point Group>Properties heirarchy, then all of the points will disappear after the update. The order of point groups listed under the category of Point Groups often does not reflect the true order in the hierarchy.

Field Book Edits, Styles, and Figure Prefixes

In this practice you edit the field book and manually create a figure.

Task 1 - Edit the field book.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice or open the file SUV1-01-Survey.dwg.

2. Continue with the previously opened database, or close the currently opened survey database, and open Surveyl Data O. On how to open a survey database refer to Appendix A-1

3. In the Prospector tab, expand the Point Groups collection and notice that the point groups are out of date. Select Point Groups, right-click, and select Update, as shown inFigure 3-135. This updates the point groups with the newly imported points.

S-O Survey-Comptete-SUVl

• Points

mms ammrj 4 f^T1 No display i » ® .All Points I S Street Light

■it"HH Boundary Pin Survey Point Clouds


Properties-

New...

Show Changes...

Survey Level 1

Figure 3-135

To zoom to and view a particular figure, in the Survey tab, select Figures. In the preview area at the bottom, as shown in Figure 3-136, select Buildingl, right-click, and select Zoom to, or double-click on Buildingl. In the graphics window (Model Space), you will be zoomed into the figure Buildingl.

[Ht] Figure Groups

i* 0 Survey Points

[6; Survey Point Groups

- ) [

Name Breakline Lot Line Layer Style

[^ButLDiNa :»!Qno ~fi£|g<|£| 0 Standard

£jBUILDING2 DNO DNO 0 J» Standard |

Figure 3-136



5. The survey crew in the field shot the building corners, but some minor work is still needed to close the linework in the area shown in Figure 3-137.

Figure 3-137

6. In the Survey tab, expand the Networks collection. Select Site Topo, right-click, and select Edit Field Book.

7. For the Field book filename (.FBK), browse to C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-Geomatics\Survey-Pickup\ and select Site-Survey3.fbk and open it to display the field book in Notepad.

8. Scroll down to the line containing point number 574. Notice that for Buildingl and Building2, you have an End for the figure, as shown in Figure 3-138, instead of a Close. Change the End to Close, which will close the figure.

Begin Buildingl NE SS 571 620894. NE SS 572 620888. NE SS 573 620883. NE SS 574 620889. End Buildingl Begin Building2 NE SS 575 620834. NE SS 576 620820. NE SS 577 620820. NE SS 578 620834. End Building2

4701 1906908. 7293 1906903. 9411 1906908. 5634 1906913.

9955 1906904. 588 1906904.; 588 1906911.? 9955 1906911.Buildingl571 620894.

572 620888.573 620883.574 620889, Buildingl Building2575 620834.576 620820.577 620820.

578 620834. Building2 4701 1906908. 7293 1906903. 9411 1906908. 5634 1906913.

9955 1906904. 588 1906904.; 588 1906911.! 9955 1906911.

NE SS 579 620827.5755 1907112. NE SS 580 620820.3717 1907112. NE SS 581 620820.(3717 1907105. NE SS 582 620827.5755 1907105.

NE SS 579 620827.5755 1907112. NE SS 580 620820.3717 1907112. NE SS 581 620820.3717 1907105. NE SS 582 620827.5755 1907105.

Figure 3-138 Exit Notepad and when prompted, save the edits.


Begin NE SS NE SS NE SS NE SS close Begin NE SS NE SS NE SS NE SS Close

Survey Level 1

Task 2 - Re-import the field book.

1. Now that the field book file has been revised in the previous task, you will need to update the drawing. In the Survey tab, expand the current opened survey database->lmport Events collections (if not already expanded).

2. Under the Import Events collection, select Site-Survey3.fbk, right-click, and select Re-import, as shown in Figure 3-139.

fcr i^J Im p o rt Events j 83 ,0 Site-Sur»ey3.fbk

Properties...j ffl- ijd Site-

Survey2.txt?■ IS. Networks ^^Smport^^j + • £3 Site Topo Process

LineworL..

| ®'-ES Ex RoadL frsl Moh.r^rL. r.rr.,,™

Insert into drawing

Figure 3-139

3. In the Re-import Field Book dialog box, click ---------— -----to resetthe survey and re-import the network.

4. Select Figures. In the preview area at the bottom, double-click on Buildingl, then on Building2. As AutoCAD Civil 3D zooms into each of these figures, notice that each one is now closed.

Task 3 - Create a figure manually.

1. In the Prospector tab, expand the Point Groups collection and select the All Points point group.

2. In the preview area at the bottom, scroll to point number 579, as shown in Figure 3-140. Select it, right-click, and select Zoom to.


ii ToolspaceR. Efc EMaster View

B O Open Drawings



B Q Survey-Completc-SUVl

Points £i-[<5>]

Point Groups

£L

#, 1<S>] .AM Points » Wi' No display [■$>] Street Light

* ,eS» Boundary' Pin Survev

Point Number Easting

Northing

Point Elevati... Name *

e 577 1906911.9850m

620820.5880m

57914m

c 578 19069119850m

620834.9955m

56.793m

579 l»ni2.388m 6268/7.57S5m 64,673m ^0 580 1907112.3030m 6208203717m 65562m

rt SS1 icjn7in5.09,»m 670a?0.3717m SO^rr,Figure 3-140

Survey Level 1

Using the AutoCAD 3D Polyline command (enter 3P at the Command Line) and the Node object snaps, draw a polyline connecting the nodes, as shown in Figure 3-141. You might need to regen your screen to see the changes.

__3y n 4 . 6 7 OWE4 I OVVF R

TO WE ^ TO WE R

Figure 3-141

In the Survey tab, under the Survey Databases>current opened survey database collections, select Figures, right-click, and select Create figure from object..., as shown in Figure 3-142. In the drawing, select the polyline just drawn.

B S3 Survey Datal

©-JJ9 Import Events 6 £3

Networks | © 05 SiteTopo 8 0

ExRoad [IS] Network Groups

if a I[Sj Figure Groups M' 0 Survey Points ! [£}] Survey Point Groups © Equipment Databases £?J Figure

Prefix Databases ch C3D Training Sample Pr} Linework Code Sets

Identify figureCreate figure interactively... Create figure from object-

Modify FigureAutomatic update

Figure 3-142

In the Create Figure From Object dialog box, enter Tower for the

to create theOK

Name, as shown in Figure 3-143. Click 1

new figure. Press <Enter> to exit the command.

Create Figure From ObjectProperty Value

Name i Tower

Current figure prefix database §JC3D Training Fl

Associate survey points to vertices □ Yes

Figure 3-143


/ ■- j -V-4 :>..=v

JWEK TOWER

Ki

/ TOWL

Insert into drawing

Remove from drawing-

Create breakiines...


"BB

Breakline

□ NoIUILDING1

Edit figures...

Update

figures


6. To update the drawing with the figure, select Figures, right-click, and select Insert into drawing, as shown in Figure 3-144.

• -IN V.WW^-t

-[&] Figure Groups

m Edit figures-

*

►i-0 Survey Points

Update figures

Survey Point Groups

Equipment Databases

c Insert into drawing ^

Remove from drawing...

Figure 3-144

7. Review the figure's properties.

8. In the Survey tab, under the Survey Databases>Survey Datal collections, expand the Figures collection.

9. Select the Tower figure, right-click, and select Properties.

10. Review the figure's properties, as shown in Figure 3-145. If necessary, change the Style to Buildings. When done, click

-----— -----' to exit the dialog box.

I V Figure Properties 'W SfS

: O

Property Vaiue

[h Fiquref- Name TO

WER

Breakime □ No

Lot Line □ No

Layer 0 -

Styh 8tf fo&iOS

U Site Survey Site

-

:••■• Closed

0Yes


Survey Level 1

Vertices Length Area Network j—

Import event Auto-generated

□ No

42852

360000 51325 (0.005 hectares)

A <£> •• S, j. u.Number

Name

Description

Geometry

Ess

& 582 ft TOWER

Point

- 1907105.0

o 579 ft TOWER

Point

- 190711231

0 580 ft TOWER

Point

- 190711231

a 581 ft TOWER

Point

- 1907105.0-

Figure 3-145




12. Close the database. Select Current opened survey database, right-click, and select Close Survey Database. Exit the drawing.


Survey Level 1

Remew Qyes:j©r!s

What are some of the many functions of a survey figure in AutoCAD Civil 3D?

What are the three options to define a survey figure?


Question 1

Question 2

Module

Surfaces Level 1


Section 1: Civil 3D Surface OverviewS Surface ProcessS Surface PropertiesS Contour DataS Other Surface DataS Breaklines and Boundaries

S

Surface Analysis Tools

Section 2: Civil 3D Surface Editing S Surface Editing S Adjusting Surfaces through

Surface Properties

4-1

4

S Viewing Surfaces in 3D

Section 3: Civil 3D Surface Labels and Analysis S Surface Labels y Surface Volume

Calculations S Surface Analysis Display

5-1

Surfaces Level 1

Section 1: Civil 3D SurfaceOverview4.1 Surface Process.......................................................................4-4

4.2 Surface Properties.................................................................4-10

Creating an Existing Ground Surface Part 1....................... 4-12Task 1: Set up the survey database........................................ 4-12

Task 2: Create a surface and set properties............................4-14

4.3 Contour Data...........................................................................4-15

4.4 Other Surface Data.................................................................4-19

Creating an Existing Ground Surface Part II....................... 4-20Task 1: Define surface with contour data................................ 4-20Task 2: Define surface with point data.....................................4-22Task 3: Create a surface contour style.....................................4-23

4.5 Breaklines and Boundaries...................................................4-25

4.6 Surface Analysis Tools..........................................................4-30

Creating an Existing Ground Surface Part III...................... 4-31Task 1: Add surface breaklines............................................... 4-31Task 2: Add field book figures as breaklines............................4-33Task 3: Add a Wall Breakline...................................................4-36

4.1 Surface Process

The surface building process can be divided into the following steps:

1. Assemble the data.

2. Assign the data to a surface.

3. Evaluate the resulting surface.

4. Add breaklines, assign more data, modify the data, or edit the surface as needed.

1. Assemble Data

The first step in surface building is to acquire the initial surface data. This data can be points, contours, 3D polylines, feature lines, AutoCAD objects, ASCII coordinate files, or boundaries. Each data type provides specific information about a surface.

AutoCAD® Civil 3D® can open approximate, non-survey grade terrain models directly from the Google Earth utility. Although rough, this DEM-based data could be useful for conceptual designs. See the AutoCAD Civil 3D Help documentation for more information.



2. Assign Data to a Surface

Acquired data is assigned to a surface. Once assigned, AutoCAD Civil 3D immediately processes this data and a surface object is created.

Surfaces are listed individually under the Surfaces collection in the Prospecfortab. Each surface contains content information, as shown in Figure 4-1. The surface content includes Masks, Watersheds, and Definition elements. The Definition contains a list of all surface data that has been applied, including boundaries, breaklines, and points. The Prospector tab displays data for each type of surface data in the list view when one of these types is selected.


Surfaces Level 1

Master Viewr Q Open Drawings

- D Baseplan - Mod Z Complete

• Points E (<!»] Point Groups 5 f2)

Surfaces

S 0" Existing Ground 1 0 Masks

Watersheds E 0

DefinitionA

• Boundaries

B

• 0 Centertne. ($>EOP

• <St> Swale• (t) Storm Culvert

• Contours fj>,

DEM Files

• Drawing Objects• 0 Edits <§?] Point Files• [❖] Point Groups

Figure 4-1

The Definition tab in the Surface Properties dialog box shows the allowable Build, Data, and Edit operations for that surface. The Operation Type column is a record of the surface data addition and edits. Using the checkboxes, you can toggle off individual actions in the history and view the resulting changes to the surface. The entries can be on or off no matter where they appear in the history. This helps you isolate possible errors or review features (such as surface slopes) that are greatly affected by the addition of a headwall or retaining wall.


r:A

ca. % r; s


You can change the order of items in the list of operations. Operations higher in the list are applied to the surface before items further down in the list. Open this dialog box by right-clicking on the surface name in the Prospector (or by selecting the surface in the drawing and right-clicking) and selecting Surface Properties.... The dialog box is shown in Figure 4-2.

13 Surface Properties - FxKtmq Ground

Information Definfticn jAnafysis StatisticsPehnfton Qptons* Build+ Data operations♦ Edit operations

j Operation Type | Parameters Jwp~- Pcent Group Name: Earning GroundIff7 Q Acd brea^e

Type Standard; Descrpbon: Centerme

C>Aod break»ne

Type- Standard, Descrpbo-i: EOP

Aod breaWne

Type Standard, Descrpbon: Swale

M i ( ■ Aod boundary

Type: Data Op, Descrction: vokimeArea

& Drawing Objects

Added points from Block object(s)

|F (n AOd Contour Data

Elevation range: 106.000' -154.000"

Wp" Minimize flat areas

Fi! gaps, add points to fiat triangle edge?,add points to fla.

'jUj Deiete multiple line-;

First passes through (3313.7940\5441.6826"

Figure 4-2

Civil 3D processes the initial data into one of two types of surfaces. The first type, the Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN) surface, is the most

common. With triangulated surfaces, surface points are connected to adjacent points by straight lines, resulting in a triangular mesh. Surfaces generated ffom contour lines have surface points created at their vertices, modified by weeding and supplementing factors. An example of this type of surface is shown in Figure 4-3.


JDJXJ

d

C* | Caned | Atply | Help |

Surfaces Level 1


Figure 4-3


The second type of surface is a Grid surface. This surface interpolates and assigns an elevation from the surface data to each grid intersection. Most of the elevations at grid intersections are interpolated. Digital Elevation Models (DEMs) are a type of grid surface used in GIS applications. An example of this type of surface is shown in Figure 4-4.

DEM level X-Y Units Elevation Units Mkwnum Elevation Maximum Elevation X Spacing Y Spacing

Properties .- DEM file

CS Code: Ascription Projection Datuir, - Current drawing CS Code:

Description Projection Datum

Figure 4-4

3. Evaluate the Resulting Surface

Surfaces, especially ones created from points, typically need some attention in order to represent them as accurately as possible. For any four adjacent surface points, there are two possible triangulations, as shown in Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5


Add DEM File

DEM file name:

C:\Oocuments and Settlngs\Administrator\My Documents\Ascent Civil 3D\Duf

DEM file information:

1meters feet649.000000 831.000000 30.000000 30.000000

Value

HS3-EF

NAD83 Binois State Planes. East r

TM >

NAD83 "it

Surfaces Level 1

The differences can be difficult to envision when viewing the triangles from above, but these two configurations provide entirely different geometries. Take, for example, the surface shown in Figure 4-6.

The triangulated points A, B, C, and D have a TIN line running from A to B. This configuration ignores the fact that C and D are both part of a continuous swale (SWL), shown with the dashed line. In a 3D view, this configuration would resemble the image shown on the left in Figure 4-7. The correct triangulation has the triangle line following the linear feature rather than crossing it, as shown on the right.

c

Figure 4-7

When creating surfaces, representing linear features correctly is extremely important. Examples of linear features include road center lines, edges-of-pavement, road shoulders, swales, berms, tops and bottoms of banks, and headwalls. Adding breaklines that follow linear features ensures that a terrain model is triangulated correctly along the features, rather than across them.

Other types of issues to watch out for include bad elevations (blown shots), elevations at 0 where there should be no chance of such elevation values, and points that were surveyed above or below the ground (e.g., the tops of fire hydrants). Unwanted triangles along the edges of the surface may connect points that should not be connected, which could also present problems.


Figure 4—6


In addition to the casual inspection of the triangles, surfaces can be evaluated by creating contour lines, reviewing the surface in 3D, and using the Quick Section command.

4. Add Breaklines, Assign More Data, Modify the Data, or Edit the Surface as needed

After you have evaluated the surface, you can add the necessary breaklines or edit the surface directly to make adjustments. If the triangulation errors are isolated, editing the surface directly might be faster than creating and applying breaklines. For example, the triangulation issue above could be addressed by "swapping" the edge that crossed the swale center line. To do this, right-click on Edits under a Surface's definition in the Prospector tab and select Swap Edge, as shown in Figure 4-8.

B 0 Surfaces

S 0' Existing Ground I- 0

Masks j- Watersheds

E 0 Definition

♦ 0 Boundenes ffl ($> Breaklines♦ [£] Contours

DEMFtes

♦ 0! Drawing Objects

Figure 4-8

Other options enable you to add, move, modify, or remove points from the surface (but not change or erase the point object on which they were based), as well as add or remove triangle lines directly. Minimize Flat Areas is a group of algorithms that can be used to minimize the number of flat areas created by contour data. Raise/Lower Surface enables you to raise and lower the entire surface by a set amount, and a Smooth Surface enables you to smooth surfaces using the Natural Neighbor or Kriging method. (Contour smoothing is handled through surface styles. These techniques smooth the actual surface geometry itself.)


s 5

Add Line© Point FH

• [<5>] Point Gt Li; 0

Proposed Pond 83

Alignments 3 ® Sites 3 3ft

Pipe Networks IB Corridors

[$] Assemblies 5]

Subassemblies

Intersections i Survey

[Ej View Frame

Groups Projects ' Data

Shortcuts [C:\CM 3D /N cc------

Swap Edge

Add Pomt

Delete

Port

Modify

Point Move

Pomt

Minimize Flat

Areas..

Rase/Lower

Surface

Smooch Surf ace..

Paste Surface...

Simpffy Surface..,

Refresh

Surfaces Level 1

4.2 Surface Properties

All surfaces have properties that can be reviewed and adjusted through the Surface Properties dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-9.

Operation Type Parameters |

3 [ ]❖ Point GroupName: Existing 'Sound

3 Add breaklme Type: Standard, Description: Centerllne

3 £2) Add breakineType: Standard, Description: EOP

3 £v> Add breafclmeType: Standard, Description: Swale

|~~] (h Add boundary Type: Data Clip, Description: VokjmeArea

0 Lp Drawing Objects Added points from Block object(s)

3 (n Add Contour Data Elevation range: 106.000' - 154.000'

3 C? Minimize flat areas fill gaps,add points to flat triangle edges,add points to fla

3 Qf multiple lines First passes through (3313.7940',S441.6826')

The Information tab enables you to rename the surface, edit the description, apply a surface object style, and render material, which controls how the surface looks in a rendered view.

The Definition tab enables you to review the surface's build options and the history of data added and edited. The Data Operations and Edit

Operations sections enable you specify the kinds of data and edits that

are permitted for this surface. By default, all are enabled for new surfaces.

The Statistics tab displays the current surface slope, elevation, and triangulation. It contains three sections:

• General: provides an overall view of the surface. The Minimum, Maximum, and Mean elevations are the important entries in this section and provide the first hint of bad or incorrect data.

• Extended: reports the 2D and 3D surface areas and Minimum, Maximum, and Mean slope values.

• TIN: reviews the number of triangles, minimum and maximum triangle areas, and leg lengths in the surface.


Q Surface Properties - Existing GroundInformation Definition | Analysis | Statistics |

Definition Options I Value *

- Build

Cop-/ deleted dependent objects No

Exclude elevations less than No

Elevation < O.fflW__

Exclude elevations greater than No

Elevation > o.ooff

Use maximum triangle length Yes

Maximum triangle length COO.OOff

«l I M

I-

jnjxj

zl

2) ll

±lM

OK | Cancel [ Apply | Help ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Figure 4-9


The areas of triangles, along with the minimum, and maximum triangle side lengths are indicators of data consistency. Generally, the longest triangles form around the perimeter of the surface. Limiting the length of triangle edges removes these types of triangles from the surface. You can delete these lines rather than try to set an optimum length, or you can create a boundary to prevent these types of triangles from being created.

When surfaces are created, they are assigned properties based on the Build Options area in the Edit Command Settings dialog box, as shown on the right of Figure 4-10. To access this dialog box, right-click the CreateSurface command and select Edit Command Settings, as shown on the left.

Q Surface f & Surface

Styles ■3: Label

Styles £ 1 T a b l e

Styles fcj &

Commands

SH AddContourlabeling j~l

AddContourlabeiingGroup l~l

AddContourlabelingSingle E

AddSpotElevLabelsOnGrid Ft AddSurfaceBoundaries Ft AddSurfaceBreaklmes Fi AddSurfaceContours E

AddSurfaceDemFile E

AddSurfaceDrawingObtects

E AddSurfaceSlopeLabel

E AddSurfaceSpotElevLabel

E CatchmentArea E

CreateCropSurface

H 7E CreateSurfaceF Ft CreateSurfaceC

in Traafsti irf^Ea Edit Command Settings - CreateSurface


Refresh

Surfaces Level 1

Property Value OvemdeClQGeneralGjLj labelingS Hi Surface CreationsjO&uBd Options

Copy Deleted Depende...

No

bdvde Elevations less...

Ves

Elevation <

-1000.000m

Exclude Elevations Gre...

No

Elevation >

0.000m

Use Ma»mum Triangl...

No

Maxrmum Tnangle Le...

0.000m

Convert Proximity Brea...

Ves

Allow Crossing Brealdi...

No

Elevation to Use

Use first bteaklin.

Figure 4-10

Surface Rebuilding

Some surface edits and point modifications can render a surface out of date. At that point, the surface is flagged as being out of date in the Prospector tab, as indicated with the drawing item modifier icon shown in Figure 4-11.



When this occurs, you can right-click on the surface in the Prospector tab and select Rebuild. This updates the surface to reflect the recent changes. Alternatively, you can right-click on the surface in the Prospector and select Rebuild-Automatic, which updates the surface automatically as necessary without input from you.


Figure 4-11

Surfaces Level 1

The next step in the design project is to create an existing ground terrain model. You will use this model to create existing ground contours and for reference during the design. You will begin the model with the previously created Existing Ground point group.

Task 1 - Set up the survey database.

1. Open the file SUF1 -A1 -Surface.dwg from one of the following folders:

Metric:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-M\Drawings\Surface

Imperial:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-l\Drawings\Surface

2. At some point, you will have to incorporate survey data into the surface. To do this, you must first establish a connection to the survey database. If you have not completed the practices in the Survey Level 1 module, you will have to open survey database Surveyl Data_Complete. For information on how to open a survey database refer to Appendix A.1 "Open Survey Data Base" or follow the steps below.

3. If the Survey tab in the Toolspace is not enabled, click ^ in the Home tab > Palettes panel to toggle it on, as shown inFigure 4-12.

4. In the Survey tab>Toolspace, right-click Survey Databases and select Set working folder, as shown in Figure 4-13.

{h Fig-test Refresh

Figure 4-13


Figure 4-12

Practice 4a Creating an Existing GroundSurface Part I


Select the Civil3D-training folder from the folder C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-Geomatics\Survey-Projects, as shown in Figure 4-14.

Browse For Folder

Set Working Folder

* Civil 3D Projects * CiviBD-training-

GeomaticsSurvey-Pickup Survey-Projects Survey Data Surveyl Data B

Make New Folder

OK Cancel

Figure 4-14

Select the survey database Survey Data_Complete, right-click, and select Open for edit, as shown in Figure 4-15.

m

ffl

Q-

w O

Save the drawing.


S Survey Databases

Survey Data

Surveyl Data B

Surveyl Data C

Surveyl Data 1

Surveyl Data

N2 Surveyl

Data 0

h

Equipm gh Figure P E Linewo Open for read-only

Display change report...

Figure 4-15

1

Surfaces Level 1

Task 2 - Create a surface and set properties.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice or open the file SUF1-A1-Surface.dwg.

2. In the Prospector tab, select Surfaces, right-click, and select Create Surface.

3. Select TIN surface as the surface type, enter ExTopo for the surface name, and select Contours 2m and 10m (Background) [Contours 2' and 10' (Background)] for the surface Style, as shown in Figure 4-16.

V Create Surface

Surface layer: H C-TOPO

Properties B Information

Surface from ExTopo contours

Contours 2m and 10m (Background) ByLayer

. J Selectng OK w® create a new surface which wil appear in the list of surfaces in Prospector.

OK_____ Cancel [ Help

Figure 4-16

4. Click -------—— to accept the changes and close the dialog box.



Type:

mTIN surface

Value

Name

Description Style

Render Matenal


4.3 Contour Data

Contour data is available from many sources. Large sites are often surveyed using aerial photogrammetry, which provides contour polylines and spot elevations. Contour data can also be obtained from other AutoCAD Civil Engineering applications, such as AutoCAD Land Desktop.

In AutoCAD Civil 3D, polylines with elevation are useful as custom contour objects. Whether using polylines or AutoCAD Land Desktop contour objects, AutoCAD Civil 3D builds a surface by triangulating between contours. The end of each triangle side connects to a vertex of two different contours.

When processing contours for surface data, AutoCAD Civil 3D inspects the contour vertices for two conditions: too many data points representing similar data (e.g., 10 vertices on 15 units of contour length in an almost straight line), and not enough data points over the length of a contour.

You can set the values for these conditions in the Add Contour Data dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-17, when you add contour data.

Add Contour Data

Description:

Mnimize flat areas by:P Filling gaps m contour data J~ Swapping edges W Adding points to Rat triangle edges W Adcrig points to fiat edges


*iWeeding factors Distance:

Angie:ay 14.0000(d)

15.00C

Supplementing factors Distance:

Mid-ordmate ((stance11.0001

Surfaces Level 1

Cancef

Figure 4-17


Heb


Weeding Factors

Supplementing Factors

Contour IssuesThe weeding process removes redundant vertices from contours. The first step in the

weeding process is to inspect three adjacent contour vertices, whose overall distance is shorter than a user-specified distance (e.g., three vertices in less than 15 units of contour). When encountering this situation, the weeding process asks about the change in direction between the three vertices. For example, does the direction from vertex 1 to vertex 2 change more than four degrees when going from vertex 2 to vertex 3? If not, the vertices are almost in a straight line and are too close. AutoCAD Civil 3D considers vertex 2 to be redundant and removes it from the surface data. This process repeats for the next three vertices. If the distance is under 15 units and the change of direction is less than four degrees, the next vertex 2 is removed from the data.

If a contour has three vertices in less than 15 units, and turns more than four degrees, vertex 2 is kept because the change in direction is significant. If there are more that 15 units between the three vertices, AutoCAD Civil 3D moves on to the next group.

An important feature of weeding is not what it removes from the data, but what is left over. If not enough data remains, the numbers for the weeding factors should be set to lower values.

When AutoCAD Civil 3D inspects contour data, it uses supplementing factors to add vertices to the surface data. The first supplementing factor is the distance between contour vertices. When the distance between vertices is over 100 units, AutoCAD Civil 3D adds a vertex to the data along the course of the contour. The second supplementing factor is a mid-ordinate distance for the curve segments of a contour. If curves are distributed throughout the contour data, a setting of 0.1 is a good starting point.

• All weeding and supplementing factors are user-specified.• Weeding and supplementing does not modify the contours or

polylines in a drawing, only their data.• There is no "correct" setting for weeding and supplementing.

Varying the values creates more or less surface data.

You should be aware of two issues when working with contour data: bays and peninsulas within the contours and the lack of high and low point elevations. These two issues affect triangulation and the quality of a surface.


Surfaces Level 1

Bays and peninsulas within contours represent gullies or isolated high points on a surface. As long as there is data to work with, AutoCAD Civil 3D builds a surface by triangulating between contours of different elevations. When AutoCAD Civil 3D cannot triangulate between different contours, the triangulation switches to connecting vertices on the same contour.

The Minimize Flat Faces command helps mitigate this situation by forcing the triangulation to target different contours, as shown in Figure 4-18. However, this method, similar to the edge swap method, does not correct every problem on a contour surface.

• To access the Minimize Flat Faces command, right-click on the Edits heading under the Definition collection of a surface and select the command.

The second issue with contour data regards the loss of high and low points. Contours represent an elevation interval (120, 122, 123, etc.). However, the top of a hill could be 123.04 or 136.92 and the only contours present are for the elevations of 123 or 136. Spot elevations are needed in the surface data to help correctly resolve the high and low spots of a surface.


Figure 4-18


• Flat spots and the loss of high and low points affect the calculation of volumes for earthworks, as shown in Figure 4-19.

By default, the Add Contour Data dialog box suggests using the Minimize flat areas by: options shown in Figure 4-20.

Minimize flat areas by: 0 Filling gaps in contour data 0 Swapping edges 0

Adding points to flat triangle edges 0 Adding points to flat edges

Figure 4-20

Together, these three methods attempt to detect and resolve peninsulas, bays, and other issues by adding additional points and filling in gaps based on surface trends. Generally, these provide the most expected results. The Swapping edges option is provided as a way of emulating how other terrain modeling software (such as AutoCAD Land Desktop) traditionally approached minimizing flat areas.


Figure 4-19

Minimizing Flat Triangle Strategies

Surfaces Level 1

4.4 Other Surface Data

Digital Elevation Models (DEMs) are grid-based terrain models primarily used by GIS applications to represent large areas. Since they are large-scale and grid-based, they are generally only used in AutoCAD Civil 3D for preliminary design and other approximate tasks.

AutoCAD points, text, blocks, and other objects can be used as surface data. Individual AutoCAD Civil 3D point objects can also be selected through the Drawing Objects option. Selected objects need to have a valid elevation value.

• All data added as drawing objects is considered point data.

• You can add 3D lines and polyfaces using this method, but each end point is treated as if it were a point object. Linework is not treated as contours or breaklines. The Add Points From Drawing Objects dialog box is shown in Figure 4-21.

Points in an ASCII point file can be used as surface data. The point data is used, but point objects are not created.

• You can use any import/export file format.

• This is an excellent way to create a large surface from a massive number of points, as it bypasses creating point objects, thereby reducing drawing overhead.


211

Point Files

13 Add Points From Drawing Obtect*Object type:

Points ▼

PointsLinesBlocksText3D FacesPolyface

OK | Cancel Help

Figure 4-21

DEM Files

Drawing Objects


Creating an Existing Ground Surface Part II

In this practice you will define the surface with surface data.

Task 1 - Define surface with contour data.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice or open the file SUF1-B1-Surface,dwg.

2. Isolate the layers A-TOPO-MAJR and A-TOPO-MINR. Use the saved layer state. In the Layer State Manager, restore the layer state C3D-Contours Topo. Alternatively, you can use the

AutoCAD ~~v (Isolate) or type layiso at the Command Line, however insure that layiso does not lock the layer by changing the settings to turn off isolated layers. If this setting is not changed then the C-TOPO layer will lock and AutoCAD Civil 3D will not create the surface.

3. Expand the Surfaces collection in the Prospector tab.

4. Expand the ExTopo surfaces collection and the Definition collection.

5. Select the Contours data element, right-click, and select Add..., as shown in Figure 4-22.

- (2) Surfaces B ExTopo (3$ Masks Watersheds - Definition

Boundaries Breaklines

fft DEM Files (fo Drawing 0 Edits

Figure 4-22


Practice 4b

Surfaces Level 1

6. In the Add Contour Data dialog box, accept the defaults, as shown in Figure 4-

23, and click

a Jjfc, Add Contour Data

Desaipbon:

Weeding factors Distance:15,000m

Supplementing factors

Distance: _____

100.000m

Minimize fiat areas by: / Rftig gaps m contour data _j Swapping

edges ■/ Adding points to fiat triangle edges I Adding points to

fiat edges

I

Weeding factors

Distance: Angle:

15.000'

Supplementing factors Distance:

ioo.ooo' im

Minimize fiat areas by: J Firtg gaps in contour data j Swapping edges i}

Adding points to fiat triangle edges Jj Adding points to fiat edges

Figure 4-23

When prompted to select contours, use the AutoCAD window or crossing selection method to select all AutoCAD contour objects on the screen, as shown in Figure 4-24. Press <Enter> to end the command.


OK

I Add Contour Data

Description:

Angle:

4.0000 (d)

Mid-ordinate distance:

1.000m

m

4.0000 (d)

Mid-ordmate distance:

1.000'

Figure 4-24


AutoCAD Civil 3D has created a surface. However, only the original two isolated contour layers are visible, so we do not see the surface. You need to restore a layer state that will display the required layers. In the Home tab > Layer panel, select C3D-Contours from the drop-down list, as shown in Figure 4-25. You can also click the Unisolate command in the Home tab > Layer panel.

! Unsaved Layer State_L4YlSO_S"ATtBas^rscosedEnaineering .AY

CBC-CC'OJ'S "OPO

% *BI Ineawcfl I >\,mr Ctat«

UnisolateRestores all layers that were hidden or locked with the LAYISO command

Figure 4-25

If you select the green surface boundary or any contour line, the contextual Ribbon tab Tin Surface: Ex Topo will appear, as shown in Figure 4-26.



8.

33

% o & *uZ 5] £ 4 -/- •Properties 00 gg Q • Modify ~

£ S, XJO-

SII

■4E3 Home insert Annotate Modify Analyze View Output Manage ^^HJ^KS^^SgSJS Tin Surface: ExTopo^M

a »

nAdd Add Laoes " Legend Labels & Tables

|;=3 0 Properties

Q Object View

InquiryO Isolate Oo.eca General Tools

Li &Surface Add

Data Edit

Surface Modify

AP Q Visibility Check - ® Catchment AreaWater Drop Resolve Crossing

Breakiines volumesAnalyze ~

& Exoon

toDEM

Draoe image Extra

ct Objec

ts j

Surface

Tools -

V Create ProSs

„ " [H Shortcut QuickI ProfJe CJ u-ading Crussn Twis Launc"

Pad

1Figure 4-26

Surfaces Level 1

Task 2 - Define surface with point data.

In examining the ExTopo surface more closely, you notice that although the internal site contours correctly reflect the surveyed point elevations, the original contours appear out of date or have missing information in the area of the existing road, Mission Avenue. However, you have a detailed survey of the road. Using this data, you will generate a surface.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous task or open the file SUF1-B2-Surface.dwg.

2. In the Prospector tab, select the Surfaces collection, right-click, and select Create Surface.



3. In the Create Surface dialog box, select TIN surface for the surface type, enter ExRoad for the surface name, and enter Contours 2m and 10m Background [Contours 2' and 10' Background] for the style.

OK


Expand the Surfaces collection in the Prospector tab and expand the ExRoad collection.

Expand the Definition collection, select Point Groups, right-click, and select Add..., as shown in Figure 4-27.

- £) Surface

? £f) bRoad

f Masks0 Watersheds ? 0 Definition

Boundaries £}> Breaklines Contou


Click4.

5.

Surfaces Level 1

rs DEM Files Ct Drawing Objects

Q> Edits Point Files

UHfliSS

RefreshFigure 4-27

In the Point Groups dialog box, select the ExRoad points group,

as shown in Figure 4-28. Click ' -------— ----to accept the changesand close the dialog box.

V Poim Groups

m sMane Caattw

Ml_____W.M PomtsFigure 4-28


Task 3 - Create a surface contour style.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous task or open the file SUF1-B3-Surface.dwg.



2. Since there is very little grade change along the road, the frequency of the contours is small, making the surface difficult to see. Expand the Surfaces collection, right-click ExRoad and select Surface Properties.


Surfaces Level 1

In the Surface Properties dialog box, click arrow) to the right of the Surface style field and select Copy Current Selection from the drop-down list, as shown in Figure 4-29.

(drop-down

uerauH swes

Surface style:

Create fijew

e Wmm&Mm

[??> * Edit Current Selection Pick from Drawing

Figure 4-29

In the Information tab, enter Contours 0.5m and 2.5m (Design) [Contours 0.5' and 2.5' (design)] for the style name, as shown in Figure 4-30.

Information | Borders j Contours j Grid Name:

Contours 0.5m and 2.5m (Design)

Information [Borders j Contotxs | Grid Name:

Contours .5" and 2.5" (Background)

Figure 4-30

In the Contours tab, expand the Contour Intervals collection and enter 0.5 [0.5']for the Minor Interval and 2.5 [2.5'] for the Major

Interval, as shown in Figure 4-31.

Information j Borders Contours |Grid ] Pants j Iriangles

Properties0 Legend ____

0 Contour Intervals

Base Elevation Minor Interval

Major Interval 0

Contour Depressions 0

Contour Smoothing

Value

Properties 0

Legend El

Contour

Intervals

Base Elevation ___________________ 0.000

Minor Interval 0.500

Major Interval 2500' GD Contour

Depressions E) Contour Smoothing

Figure 4-31


Contours 1m and 5m

(Des/gn; Render Material: Q, By

Layer

Information | Borders Contours |Gnd J Points J Triangles

Value

0.000m 0.500m 2500m

OK6. Click

OKand click


to accept and close the Edit Style dialog box, — to close the

Surface Properties dialog box.

Zoom into the existing road at the north end of the site and note the detail contours identifying the crown of the road. Save the drawing.


7.

Surfaces Level 1

4.5 Breakiines and Boundaries

A surface can be assigned point data through point groups. In addition, surfaces can include data from boundaries, breakiines, contours, Digital Elevation Model files (DEMs), drawing objects (AutoCAD points, individual AutoCAD Civil 3D points, lines, 3D faces, etc.), manual edits, and point files. The Boundaries collection appears above the Breakiines collection under the surface's Definition {Prospector tab), as shown in Figure 4-32. However, you should generally add boundaries after adding breakiines to a surface. However, if you use the Data Clip boundary type, any data that you add to the surface (point file, DEM file, or breakline) is added only to the area within the boundary. In that case, breakiines can be added to the surface after a Data Clip boundary type. Surface edit operations are not affected by the Data Clip boundary.

| « (2) Centerllne d> EOP• Swale

• Storm Culvert

• Contours DEM

Files

• Drawing Objects

• & Edits

Point Files

• Point Groups

Description I Type |

(^Center line Standard

^■>EOP Standard

(4) Swale Standard

Storm Culvert

Wall

Figure 4-32


! Toolspace f% a m

Master View

S Q Open Drawings

E O Baseplan - Mod 2 Complete

• Points ffi [<8>] Point Groups B C) Surfaces

S £) r Existing Ground Masks (% Watersheds B Definition ♦ (jy Boundaries

" B C


Breaklines affect surface triangulation and are important in point-based surfaces. They ensure that terrain models are triangulated correctly along linear features, as shown in Figure 4-33.

Surface before breaklines have been applied along the centerline of a road.

• When adding a breakline to a surface, AutoCAD Civil 3D creates

an entry under the Breakline > Definition collections, based on a description that you supply.

• When you define multiple breaklines at the same time, AutoCAD Civil 3D creates a single entry under the Breaklines collection. However, they are listed separately in the Prospector tab's List View.

• Breaklines can be defined as one of four types: Standard, Proximity, Wall, and Non-Destructive.

Standard Breaklines

A standard breakline is one that has valid elevations assigned at each vertex.

• Standard breaklines can be defined from 3D lines, 3D polylines, or grading feature lines.


Breaklines

Figure 4-33

Surface after breaklines have been applied along the centerline of a road.

Surfaces Level 1

• The number of points generated along a breakline can be reduced by specifying a Weeding factor or increased by specifying a Supplementing factor, similar to weeding and supplementing factors for contour data.

• Curves in standard breakiines are approximated through the use of a mid-ordinate distance, similar to the way curved boundaries are resolved.

• For AutoCAD Land Desktop users, tasks that you might have applied to 3D polylines in AutoCAD Land Desktop should use grading feature lines in AutoCAD Civil 3D. This is because grading feature lines are more efficient in many ways, including their support of 3D curves.

• When drafting 3D lines, polylines, or feature lines, you can use AutoCAD Civil 3D's transparent commands. For example, using the Point Object ('PO) transparent command to select a point as a vertex of a 3D polyline will tell AutoCAD Civil 3D to assign the point's elevation to the vertex of the polyline.

• Standard breakiines can also be defined from ASCII breakline data files (.FLT file extension).

Proximity Breakiines

Proximity breakiines do not need to have elevations at their vertices.A polyline at elevation 0 could be used as a proximity breakline. Whena proximity breakline is defined, AutoCAD Civil 3D automaticallyassigns vertex elevations from the nearest TIN data point, such as anearby point object or contour line vertex.

• AutoCAD Civil 3D can define proximity breakiines from 2D polylines or grading feature Lines.

• AutoCAD Civil 3D does not support curves in proximity breakiines. Arc segments are treated as if they were straight line segments.

• One of the default options in the surface Build section allows the conversion of all proximity (2D) breakiines into standard (3D) breakiines. After conversion, the breakline is listed as a standard breakline and has the same elevations as the point objects that are at each vertex.

Wall Breakiines

• A wall breakline can be used to represent both the top and bottom of a wall, curb, or other sheer face.

• Wall breakiines are defined by 3D lines, 3D polylines, or feature lines. When defining them from linework, the object itself is meant to define either the top or bottom of the wall.



• The other end of the wall (top or bottom) is defined interactively by entering the absolute elevations or height differences from the defining line.

• If a Wall breakline starts as a 2D polyline or feature line, it can contain curve segments.

• The number of points generated along a breakline can be reduced by specifying a Weeding factor or increased by specifying a Supplementing factor.

Boundaries

Boundaries provide interior or exterior limits to the surface triangulation. Boundaries are typically created from 2D closed polylines. There are four types of boundaries: Outer, Hide, Show, and Data Clip. An outer boundary should be one of the last items added to a surface, because adding data outside of an existing boundary extends the surface past it.

• An Outer boundary excludes data outside of its edge.• A Hide boundary removes an interior portion of a surface to

delineate features (such as water bodies and building footprints).• A Show boundary displays a portion of a surface within a Hide

boundary (e.g., to show an island in a pond).• A Data Clip boundary acts as a filter on all data, including points,

DEMs, and breaklines added to the surface after the creation of the Data Clip boundary.

A boundary can contain arc segments. To better represent surface elevations around an arc, AutoCAD Civil 3D uses a mid-ordinate value to calculate where the triangles interact with the boundary. The mid-ordinate value is the distance between the midpoint of the cord and the arc. The smaller the mid-ordinate value, the closer the surface data is to the original arc. An example is shown in Figure 4-34.


r

Figure 4-34

Surfaces Level 1

A boundary can limit a surface to the data within it. When you want to extend the triangulation exactly to a boundary line, toggle on the Non-destructive breakline option in the Create Boundary dialog box. A non-destructive breakline fractures triangles at their intersection with the boundary. The resulting triangles preserve, as close as possible, the original elevations of the surface at the boundary intersection.

Figure 4-35 shows the following:

1. The surface with a polyline will be used as an outer boundary.

2. The boundary is applied without the Non-destructive breakline option. This is typically used when the boundary polyline is approximate and not meant to represent a hard edge.

3. The boundary is applied with the Non-destructive breakline option. Non-destructive breaklines are often used to create a specific termination limit for the surface (such as at a parcel boundary).


Figure 4-35


4.6 Surface Analysis Tools

AutoCAD's default view, the overhead or plan view, is not the only way to view a surface. The AutoCAD 3D Orbit command and the AutoCAD Civil 3D Object Viewer tilt the coordinate space to show a 3D surface model. How the surface will be displayed is dependent upon the assigned style.

Understanding the effects that breakiines and other data have on a surface is critical to generating an accurate surface. The Analyze > Ground Data > Quick Profile command enables you to produce an instant surface profile with minimal effort.

A Quick Profile is a temporary object and disappears from the drawing when you save or exit. If you are looking for a more permanent graphic, you should create an alignment and profile.

Quick Profiles can be created along lines, arcs, polylines, lot lines, feature lines, survey figures, or by selecting points. In addition to the command being found in the Analyze tab, you can select one of the previously mentioned objects, right-click, and select Quick Profile. Two examples of the Quick Profile are shown in Figure 4-36.

Alignment - (1) PROFILE

| |

—

IK

•

12* ■

n

■I.

1 1

» 130


Viewing a Surface in 3D

Quick Profile

Surfaces Level 1

Creating an Existing Ground Surface Part III

Task 1 - Add surface breaklines.

TIN lines are generally created by using the shortest distance between points. To further define a surface, you may need to supplement it with breaklines of ridges, ditches, walls, etc. that accurately define the surface. These breaklines prevent the software from triangulating directly between points that are bisected by a breakline. The breakline becomes part of the

triangulation between the two adjacent points.

Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice or open the file SUF1-C1-Surface.dwg.

Select any part of the ExTopo surface on the screen (Model Space). The contextual Ribbon will display.

In the Modify panel, select Surface Properties, as shown in Figure 4-37. The Surface Properties dialog box opens.

Home imnt Annotate Modify Aruiyzr View Output Manage Vault Express Took

Vx ^^ FflS * ______________Q Object Viewer

Add AddInquiry Surface Add Data Edit Surface Water Drop resolve CrossingLaoels * Legend % Isolate Objects Property" * "

sreaklmesGeneral Toois •

Figure 4-37

In the Surface style drop-down list, select Contours and

Triangles, as shown in Figure 4-38. Click ' --------— - - - - to closethe dialog box.

Default styles Surface style:Contoura and Triangles

Figure 4-38

Now that you can see the triangulations, you will examine how adding a feature line impacts the surface.


1.

2

.

3

.

Practice 4c

Tf^urface^xTopo1"!

Visibility Check Catchment Are Oh Volumes

£> a Cf

Mod ty Analyze •Labels & Tables

4.


5. In the View tab > Views panel, select C3D-Surface Breakline in the drop-down list shown in Figure 4-39. This zooms into the breakline that is located north of the existing road.

Home

Insert Annotate Modify Analyze | View |

^Par t 13 :3D-SLrface Bre~^

PrevousView LIS

I-<jjb 0-bit •

L'op I* \amed Views Hil

lExte-:s •

^ Bottom tat£i

Navigate

Views

▼

Figure 4-39

6. The triangulation crosses the breakline. Expand the Current Drawing collection of the Prospector tab, then expand the Surfaces > ExTopo > Definition collections. Select Breakiines, right-click, and select Add, as shown in Figure 4-40.

• Points t [<8>] Point Groups © Point Clouds 8 C) Surfaces ■i C) ExRoad E [f> ExTopo ^ Masks Watersheds S

Definition

Q Boundaries

i dbContours f Add...

Figure 4—40

7. Enter Ridge in the Description field, as shown in Figure 4-41.

Accept all the defaults and click 0K to close the dialog box.

V. Add Breakiines IS^s

Description:

Ridge! Type:

(standard "j

Figure 4-41

8. When prompted to select objects, select the breakline (red 3D polyline) and press <Enter> to complete the command.


\ K

gDEMFil« RSDrawing Ot,___.....................

§ & Edits

— V

Surfaces Level 1

9. In the Surfaces collection, notice that the surface ExTopo isi

marked as out-of-date ' . Select the ExTopo surface, right-click, and select Rebuild Automatic. Notice that the triangulation now takes the breakline into consideration, as shown in Figure 4-42.


Task 2 - Add field book figures as breaklines.

In the task, you will add breaklines to the surface from figures thatwere created when the field books were imported.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous task or open the file SUF1-C2-Surface.dwg.

2. Open the survey database Surveyl Data_Complete, if it is not already open. For information on how to open a survey database refer to Appendix A.1.

3. In the Survey tab, expand the Survey Data collection and select Figures. You will see the list of figures in the grid view at the bottom of the Toolspace.


Figure 4-42


Select the figure Rock, right-click, and select Create breaklines..., as shown in Figure 4—43.

Name Breakli

m

IjBUlLDINGl □ No

J3BU1LDING2 □ No

CENTER □ No

IjDAYlIGHT-L □ No

2JDAYUGHT-R □ No

TjDITCH.OUT-L DNo

IjDITCH.OUT-F DNo

iEPS-L □ No

2JEPS-R □ No

IjFENCE □ No

2JLANE-L □ No

!JLANE-R □ No

POWER □ No

h yj, m«n •3 TOWER □ No

"I^TDATl

Figure 4-43

In the Create Breaklines dialog box, select ExTopo for the surface, and toggle on the Yes option in the Breakline column to

create breaklines, as shown in Figure 4-44. Click close the dialog box.


* Line Shading

Remove from drawing-

Create breaklines... 1


Delete...

UndeleteX

a Apply

Points

Zoom

to Pan

to

Copy value to clipboard

Copy to clipboard

□ NoI I Mi*

to

jfc Create Breaklines \rn£3m\

Figure 4-44

Surfaces Level 1

AutoCAD Civil 3D will zoom in to the location of the breakline, then display the Add Breakiines dialog box. Enter Rock pile from site survey in the Description field, and ensure that Standard is selected in the Type drop-down list, as shown in

-i*------to close the dialog box.Figure 4^45. Click

jfc. Add 8realdines

Wall p'le from site survey

[ Standard

Figure 4-45

The Event Viewer vista in the Panorama opens. You have received a number of errors with crossing breakiines. You need to clear these errors from the event log file.

in at the top left corner of the Panorama and

select Clear All Events, as shown in Figure 4-46.


rw<

Action

8. Click

x


Error

11/05/2010

4 20:47 PM

Surface: ExTopo

Mai B.

Zoom to

Export List... Error

11/05/2010

4 20:47 PM

Surface: ExTopo

Mai B.

Zoom to

Error

11/05/2010

4 20:47 PM

Surface: ExTopo

Mai B.

Zoom to

Properties... Error

11/05/2010

.4

20:47 PM

Surface: ExTopo

Mai B.

Zoom to

ii @ Error

11/05/2010

4 20:47 PM

Surface: ExTopo

Mai B.

Zoom to

©Error 11/05/2010

4 20:47 PM

Surface; ExTopo

Mai B.

Zoom to

Figure 4-46

Close the Panorama by clicking corner of the dialog box.

In Model Space, select the ExTopo surface. The Tin Surface: ExTopo contextual tab displays. In the Modify panel, select Surface Properties, as shown in Figure 4-47.

L;~<J Home Insert Annotate Modify Analyze View Output Manage Vault Express Tools

CfWater Drop

Resolve Crossing

Figure 4-47


0

(checkmark) at the top right

10.

Tin Surface E

Visibil

i (§} Catchr Breakiines

§0 Volum Analyze »

f^j (5 Prooerties

Cq, Ooject Viewer Add Add Inquiry

Laoeis * Legend ;?0 Isolate Objects j

Labels & Tables General Tools »

Add Data Edit Surface

Modify

on

Surfaces Level 1

11. The Surface Properties - ExTopo dialog box opens. In the Definition tab, expand the Build collection and set the value of Allow crossing breaklines to Yes. Set the value for Elevation to use field to Use last breakline elevation at intersection, as

shown in Figure 4^48. When you have finished, click --------**

Figure 4-48

12. When prompted to Rebuild the surface or Mark as out of Date, select Rebuild the surface. When you review the surface contours, you will see that the surface has used the figure as a breakline.


Task 3 - Add a Wall Breakline.

In the task, you will add a wall breakline to the surface from figuresthat were created when the field books were imported

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous task or open the file SUF1-C3-Surface.dwg.


£» Surface Properties - ExTopo o © S3

Information Defirrton (Analysis j Stabsccs ]

Definition Options Value

- BuildCopy deleted dependent object: No

Exdude elevations less than Ves

Elevation < -1000.000m

Exdude elevations greater thar No

Elevaoon > O.OOQrsUse maximum triangle length No

Maximum triangle length C.OOCT[ Atow crossing brealdmes A

Elevation to use Use last breakjine elevation at intersection J

* Edit operationsOperation Type 0 dp Add Contot* Data Q] I f Minimize flat areas □ Add breaboe 0 Add brealdrie

ParametersElevation range: 35.000m-96.000m

fil gaps, add poms to flat tnangle edges.add pcmts to flat edgesType: Standard, Description: Podge

Type: Standard. Description: Rodt wall from site survey


2. Open the survey database Surveyl Data_Complete, if it is not already open. For information on how to open a survey database refer to Appendix A. 1.

3. In the Survey tab, expand the Survey Data collection and select Figures. You will see the list of figures in the grid view at the bottom of the Toolspace.

4. Select the Wall figure, right-click, and select Create breaklines.


Surfaces Level 1

5. In the Create Breaklines dialog box, select the ExTopo surface and toggle on the Yes option in the Breakline column to create

breaklines. Click -—°K -------- to close the dialog box.

6. Civil 3D zooms in to the location of the breakline, then display the Add Breaklines dialog box. Enter Rock wall from site survey in the Description field, and ensure that Wall is selected in the Type drop-down list, as shown in Figure 4-49. Click

I - - - -— -- - -J to close the dialog box.

7. At the prompt to pick the offset side, select a point to the south of

the wall break line, as shown in Figure 4-50.

8. When prompted to select the option for the wall height, accept the default of All and press <Enter> since the wall has a constant height.

9. The wall has a constant height of 0.5m from the base. When prompted for the elevation difference or elevation, type 0.5 [1.5'] and press <Enter>.

10. Save drawing.


jfc Add Breaklines |w£a»|

~ e jvjjn rjs^j_______________

Figure 4-49

(Rod; Wall from site survey ^

Figure 4-50


Review Questions

What are the main steps to build a surface?

How does AutoCAD Civil 3D display surface information?

How do you set the lowest and highest acceptable elevations for a surface?

What is a Standard breakline and what is it used for?

What happens to a Quick Profile when you save or exit a drawing?

What does the weeding process remove?


Question 1

Question 2

Question 3

Question 4

Question 5

Question 6

Surfaces Level 1

Section 2: Civil 3D Surface Editing4.7 Surface Editing.......................................................................4-40

4.8 Adjusting Surfaces through Surface Properties.................4-47

4.9 Viewing Surfaces in 3D..........................................................4-48

Surface Edits.......................................................................... 4-49Task 1: Set the maximum triangle length................................ 4-49Task 2: Delete lines..................................................................4-51Task 3: Add a boundary...........................................................4-52Task 4: Set the elevation range................................................4-54Task 5: Review edits in the Prospector tab and the SurfaceProperties dialog box................................................................4-56Task 6: Create a composite surface.........................................4-57



4.7 Surface Editing

There are three ways of adjusting surfaces graphically: using lines, points, and area edit tools, such as Minimize Flat Areas and Smooth Surface. All of these tools are available by right-clicking on the Edits heading under a surface's Definition area (Prospector), as shown in Figure 4-51.

S Toolspace

8 |D0Master View

B O Baseplan - Mod 2 Complete

» Points E [<s>] Point Groups B Q Surfaces

E Existing Ground

(-D Masks Ch Watersheds B (2) Definition i#j (£) Boundaries 0 Breakjines

I* Centerline | ® $ EOP « (3) Swale • £v> Storm Culvert « Contours DEM Files

♦ (^q Drawing Objects

iC H •■ Point Flies

• [<S>] Point Group: (j) Proposed Pond 1

B Alignments ffi ® Sites EE Pipe Networks IS] Corridors i$! Assemblies

Subassemblies ^ Intersections ffi ^f Survey

[3] View Frame Groups jQ Projects B f^l Data Shortcuts TCACivil 3D Proj' li

Figure 4-51

AutoCAD Civil 3D considers each graphical surface edit to be additional data that can later be removed.


IAdd Line Delete Line Swap Edge

Add Point

Delete

Point

Modify

Point

Move

Point

Minimize Flat Areas... Raise/Lower Surface

Smooth Surface... Paste Surface.., Simplify Surface...

Refresh

Surfaces Level 1

Most surface edits apply immediately. If you see the drawing item modifier icon (shown in Figure 4-52), then an edit has rendered the surface out of date. When this happens, a surface should be rebuilt by right-clicking on the surface name in the Prospector tab and selecting Rebuild.

S Surfaces

bQ7 <Pjdo Masks Watersheds B Definition

♦ (f) - Boundary E Q) BreaklinesSi (j) EOP

♦ Swale* |£l> Storm

♦ Contours (J3 DEM Files♦ (^j Drawing O » Q> Edits

Point Files «> [<s>] Point Grou E C) Proposed Pond 1 ffl tD Alignments E ^ Sites B Pipe Networks Corridors

Figure 4-52

To have a surface automatically rebuild as needed, right-click on the surface name in the Prospector tab and select Rebuild-Automatic.To delete an edit from a surface permanently, remove it from the Edits list in Prospector's preview area or from the Operations Type list in the Definition tab of the Surface Properties dialog box.


Existing Gro

Surface Properties... Edit Surface Style...

Rebuild - Automatic

Create Snapshot Remove Snapshot Rebuild Snapshot

Add Label...

Select Zoom to Panto

Lock

Unlock

Export to DEM...

Export

LandXML..

Refresh


The line editing commands include Add Line, Delete Line, and Swap Edge. As their names suggest, the Add Line and Delete Line commands add or remove triangle lines. The Delete Line command is often only applied around the outside edge of a surface to remove unwanted edge triangulation. Deleting lines in the interior of a surface causes both of the triangles next to the removed line to be deleted, leaving a hole in the surface that will need to be repaired by adding another line.

If you are considering deleting a line only to replace it with the opposite diagonal, such as the central line shown in Figure 4-53, you may find using the Swap Line command easier instead.

//

/

Figure 4-53

Adding an interior line that crosses many existing triangles swaps them where possible to adhere to the geometry represented by the added line. This method can be a good way of swapping multiple edges at once.

The Point editing commands can Add, Delete, Modify, or Move surface points. These commands do not affect point objects in the drawing, but rather the surface points created from them. Surface points can be adjusted or deleted as needed. Edits to surface points have no affect on the original AutoCAD Civil 3D point objects on which these surface points are based.

When an AutoCAD Civil 3D point object is adjusted (e.g., moved), the surface containing that point data might not be identified as being out-of-date nor update automatically. In this situation, you should rebuild the surface.


Line Edits

Point Edits

Surfaces Level 1

As the collection methods of surface data continue to evolve, yielding significantly larger data sets, drawing file size will increase in proportion to the surface data contained in the drawing. AutoCAD Civil 3D has a limit of 2.5 million vertices for a surface. Once it exceeds this limit, the software prompts you to store surface data to an external file with an .mms extension. These resulting external surface files can be quite large. To avoid this, you can simplify your surface using the Simplify Surface wizard. Extra points can be removed from a surface without compromising its accuracy. Points you may want to remove include points that are in an external point file or database, or redundant points in areas of high data concentration where the value of this extra information is minimal. There are two simplification methods available.

• Edge Contraction: This method simplifies the surface by using existing triangle edges. It contracts triangle edges to single points by removing one point. The location of the point to which an edge is contracted is selected so that the change to the surface is minimal.

• Point Removal: This method simplifies the surface by removing existing surface points. More points are removed from denser areas of the surface.

When you simplify a surface, you specify which regions of the surface the operation should address. The region options include using the existing surface border, or specifying a window or polygon. The Pick in Drawing icon lets you select the region from the drawing. If a closed line exists in the drawing that you would like to use as the region boundary, you can select the Select objects option, then use the Pick in Drawing icon to select the boundary. Curves in the boundary are approximated by line segments. The line segment generation is governed by a Mid Ordinate Distance value that you determine.

Once you've selected the region, the dialog box displays the Total Points Selected In Region value. You can refine the surface reduction options by setting a percentage of points to remove, the maximum change in elevation, or the maximum edge contraction error.


Simplify Surface


Although not a true surface edit, AutoCAD Civil 3D surface contours can be smoothed to reduce their jagged appearance using the Surface Object Style settings. There are two approaches to this: the Add Vertices method and the Spline Curve method. The Add Vertices method enables you to select a relative smoothness from the slider bar at the bottom of the Surface Style dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-54.

12Surfoic Style Contours Z' oiul 10' (B^iikyrmmd)

Infcmatioft j Borders Contour jsrld ]P«nts (Trianjlej |WM(tmd{ j Aisarystt j Display jSuwfttty j

Properties

| Mnpr Ospljy

SrConkour smoofsrw "

Caned | Act* | Hdc

Figure 4-54

The Spline Curve method generates very smooth contours; however, the contours are more liberally interpolated and might overlap where surface points are close together. This approach is best applied to surfaces with relatively few data points or in areas of low relief, as shown in Figure 4-55.

No Smoothing


Smooth Contours

_LS!*13 Contour Ranges 3 30 Geometry 3 Legend3 Contour Intervals3tjmtouL

MnmRiWiMm,,/aContour Smoothing

^ Smoothing Type-Jrug______Adcve-bces

Nuirtw * " ■ ' ' ; • "

Spline

Figure 4-

55

Surfaces Level 1



The Smooth Surface edit introduces new, interpolated elevations between surface data. It is used to create a more realistic-looking terrain model, though not necessarily a more accurate one. Generally, surface smoothing works best with point-based surface data.

AutoCAD Civil 3D has two smoothing methods: Natural Neighbor and Kriging.

• Natural Neighbor interpolates a grid of additional data points that produce a smoother overall terrain model.

• Kriging reads surface trends to add additional data in sparse areas.

Surface smoothing is applied by right-clicking on the Edits collection under a surface's Definition and selecting Smooth Surface. The Smooth Surface dialog box and example of surface smoothing are shown in Figure 4-56.


*J13Smooth Surfacc Existing Ground

S<noctt*qPyaro«tartE Smoothing Methods

method |Natval neighbor rrerpolation d

;tj Kriging Method□ Point Interpolation Extrapolation Output

(KnginG

OUout bcatiors Gnd based

5e«c'. a/tout regon 00

und X - Soaring 0

Grid Y • Soaring 0

Grid orientation''jjirrjtr of co.BJ. ifcatei

After SmoothingFigure 4-56

Smooth Surface

Before Smoothing

Surfaces Level 1

AutoCAD Civil 3D does not have a copy surface command, but surface objects can be copied using the AutoCAD Copy command (Modify > Copy). When copying surface objects, select the same base and second point to make sure the surface is not moved during the copy. After a copy, a duplicate surface is created and is visible in the Prospector tab. The copy has the same name as the original followed with a number in parenthesis, such as (1). These copied surfaces can be renamed as needed. Surface copies are independent of each other and can be edited.

The Surface Paste command enables AutoCAD Civil 3D to combine multiple surfaces into a single surface. You may want to paste into a copy of a surface if you want to keep the original unmodified. For example, a finished condition surface is needed that includes a proposed surface (Proposed) along with the existing ground (EG) around its periphery. In this situation, you would first make a copy of the EG surface and name this new surface Finished Ground. In the Surfaces collection of the Prospector tab, right-click on the Finished Ground surface's Edit collection and select Paste to merge in the Proposed surface. Once the command has executed, the surface's EG and Proposed surfaces are left unchanged, and the Finished Ground surface represents a combination of the two. If you did not create the Finished Ground surface, but pasted the Proposed surface into the EG surface, you would not have the original EG surface for reference in profiles and other places.

Surfaces remain dynamically linked after pasting. Therefore, if the Proposed surface changes, the Finished Ground surface updates to show the change. You can use this feature to create a dynamic copy of a surface by creating a new surface and pasting another into it.

The Raise/Lower Surface command adds or subtracts a specified elevation value. This adjustment is applied to the entire surface. It is useful for modeling soil removal and changing a surface's datum elevation.


Copy Surface

Surface Paste

Raise/Lower Surface


4.8 Adjusting Surfaces through Surface Properties

In addition to the graphical edit methods, you can adjust surfaces by changing their surface properties. Surface property adjustments include setting a Maximum triangle length or Exclude elevations greater or less than certain values. You can also enable or disable the effects of certain surface data (such as breakiines and boundaries) by disabling them in the dialog box.

To locate these options, as shown in Figure 4-57, right-click on a surface in the Prospector tab and select Surface Properties.

Definition Options Value

- Build

Copy deleted dependent objects No

Exclude elevations less than No

Elevation < 0.000'

Exclude elevations greater than No

Elevation > Q.OOi1'

Use maximum triangle length No

Maximum triangle length

Convert proximity breakiines to standard Yes

Allow crossing breakiines No

Elevation to use i ises : i age brMttf» on & -1 --<; m

t Data operations

t Edit operations

Figure 4-57

4.9 Viewing Surfaces in 3D

You can view a surface in 3D using the Object Viewer or directly in the drawing window using the 3D Orbit command. Both have similar navigation controls, but the Object Viewer enables you to review your surface in 3D without changing your current view.

Both methods can display a wireframe (3D Wireframe and 3D Hidden), conceptual, or realistic view. By default, a Conceptual display shows a cartoon-like rendering without edge lines, while a Realistic display shows material styles with edge lines. Both viewing methods use the AutoCAD ViewCube, which uses labels along with a compass to indicate the direction from which you are viewing a model.


Surfaces Level 1

The Object Viewer method is shown in Figure 4-58.


| 0 Object Viewer 1-fiL. til. •:•'..., i n l xi

0 j| Conceptual © QON?:- II'op d

(Standard 3

jlens 28 |Zoom2 j#0 ^Figure 4-58


Surface Edits

In this practice you will refine a previously created surface. The ExTopo surface has some triangulations that are not valid. You will eliminate these TIN lines using three methods: you will set the maximum triangle edge length, delete TIN lines (triangle edges), and add a boundary to the surface. Each of these methods has its advantages and disadvantages and should be used appropriately.

Task 1 - Set the maximum triangle length.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice or open the file SUF1-D1-Surface.dwg from one of the following folders:

Metric:


Imperial:


2. Ensure that the ExTopo surface is using the Contours and Triangles surface style.

3. In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Surface Edit, as shown in Figure 4-59.

Od)rt - I^Top • tamee V

Extents - i^Sottor •

Navigate Views •

Figure 4-59

4. Notice the long TIN lines, as shown in Figure 4-60.


L121 Hill IS LSI

Practice 4d

Surfaces Level 1

In the graphics screen (Model Space), select the ExTopo surface. The Tin Surface ExTopo contextual Ribbon will display. In the Modify panel, select Surface Properties, as shown in Figure 4-61.

Modify

Figure 4-61

The Surface Properties dialog box opens. Select the Definition tab and expand the Build options in the Definition Options section.

Set the Use maximum triangle length value to Yes and the Maximum triangle length value to 100m [330'], as shown in Figure 4-62. Although there are invalid triangle lengths less than that length in this area, entering a smaller number may remove

some valid triangles within the site. Click C dialog box and accept the changes.

Jt Surface Properties - ExTopoDefinition Options Value

- Btllid

Copy deleted depend...

No

Exclude elevations les...

Yes

Bevation < -1000.000m

Exdude elevations gr,.

toTraitm i

^Jse maximum triangle...

res

^Maximum tnangle length

100.000mJ

resAlio/.' crossing brealdi...

No

Elevation to use ..se averaae breaktme efcr-awo at intersection

i Data operations

------------------M.-----Build

Copy deleted dependent objects No

Exdude elevations less than Yes

Bevation < -2000.000'

Exdude elevations greater than No

Elevation »


0 & Add Data Edit

Surface

Properties

5.

OKto close the

I Statistics j

Information Definition

t, Surface Properties - ExTopo

♦ Edit operations


f Use maximum triangle length Yes N

Maximum triangle length 330.000' J

Convert proximity breakknes to standard Yes

Allow crossing breaklines No

Bevation to use Use a' erage

* Data operations i Edit operations

Figure 4-62

8. When prompted to Rebuild the surface or Mark the surface as

out-of-date, select Rebuild the surface. All triangles that haveedge lengths greater than 100m [330'] are removed from thesurface.



Definition Options

Information Definition jAnaiysis j Statistics |

Value

Surfaces Level 1

Task 2 - Delete lines.

Although you have eliminated triangle edge lengths greater than 100m, you still have some triangles that you will remove using a scalpel (i.e., deleting selected lines).

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous task or open the file SUF1-D2-Surface.dwg.

2. If you are not still in the drawing view from the previous task, select the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Surface Edit.

3. Delete the TIN lines shown in Figure 4-63.

4. In the graphics screen (Model Space), select the ExToposurface. The Tin Surface ExTopo contextual Ribbon will display. In the Modify panel, select Edit Surface and select Delete Line from the drop-down list, as shown in Figure 4-64.

5. Select each of the required TIN lines in Model Space, as shown in Figure 4-65. When you have finished, press <Enter> to end the selection and press <Enter> to end the command.


Figure 4-63

Edit Surface Water Crop

Figure 4-64



Task 3 - Add a boundary.

The Delete Line command can be effective, but might not efficiently clean up the edges of large surfaces. A surface boundary may be useful if you have a well-defined boundary. The Data Clip Boundary helps ensure that new information you add to the surface does not ignore the surface boundary and model outside of it.


2. If you are not still in the drawing view from the previous task, then in the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Surface Edit.

3. In the graphics screen (Model Space), select the ExTopo surface. The Tin Surface ExTopo contextual Ribbon will display. In the Modify panel, select Add Data and select Boundaries from the drop-down list, as shown in Figure 4-66.

4. The Add Boundaries dialog box opens, as shown in Figure 4-67. Enter EG Outside in the Name field, and select Outer in the Type drop-down list. Do not select the Non-destructive breakline option, since you do not want to trim to this polyline shape. Instead, the dialog box options selected will erase all triangle lines that cross or are beyond the boundary. Click

0K to accept the changes and close the dialog box.


Figure 4-65

Figure 4-66

Surfaces Level 1

it. Add Boundaries |w£S»|

Name:EG Outside

Type:

Outer »

Non-destructive brealdine

Mid-ordinate distance:

1.000m

OK Cancel Help

______________________

Figure 4-67

5. When prompted to select an object, select the red polyline that represents the boundary (you may have to regen the screen to see the boundary), as shown in Figure 4-68.

6. Examine how this boundary affected the surface. The boundary excluded all data that crossed or fell beyond it. This boundary is a dynamic part of the ExTopo surface.

7. (Optional) Select the boundary line and move the grips. Notice how the surface expands or contracts to the match the change in the boundary. Undo the changes.



Figure 4-68


Task 4 - Set the elevation range.

In reviewing the drawing, you need to address an error within the site. The original topographical contour file contains an invalid piece of data that has transferred to the surface.

Continue working with the drawing from the previous task or open the file SUF1-D4-Surface.dwg.

If you are not still in the drawing view from the previous task, then in the View tab >Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Surface Elev Edit.

In the graphics screen (Model Space), as shown on the left in Figure 4-69, select the ExTopo surface, right-click, and select Object Viewer.

In the Object Viewer; click and drag the view, as shown on the right in Figure 4-69, to rotate the 3D view to identify the issue.

Close the Object Viewer by selecting the X in the top right corner of the dialog box.

In the graphics screen (Model Space), select the ExTopo surface. The Tin Surface ExTopo contextual Ribbon will display. In the Modify panel, select Surface Properties, as shown in Figure 4-70. The Surface Properties dialog box opens.

Add Laoels *

LegendLate s& Tables

Tin Surface: E

Visibili (S> Catctit

Analyse


4.

5.

6.

Figure 4-69

1

.

2

.

ifjj § Properties

Q Object Viewerisolate Objects

^ nAdd inquiry

ModifyGeneral

ToolsHome Insert Annotate Modify Analyze View Output Manage Vault Express ToolsA

Add Data Edit Surface Water Crop Resolve CrossingBreakimes

Volum

Surfaces Level 1

Figure 4-70



7. Select the Statistics tab and expand the value list in the General section.

8. When you review the site conditions, you see that the site ranges from an elevation of roughly 30m [100'] to 100m [500']. However, the statistics show that the surface ranges from an elevation of 35m to 150m [110' to 500'], as shown in Figure 4-71.

Surface Properties - ExTopo

Information j Definition j Analysis StatisticsStatistics Value

B GeneralRevision number 0

Number of points 12503

Minimum X coordinate 1906764.133m

Minimum Y coordinate 620419.919m

Maximum X coordinate 1907347.644m

f Minimum elevation 35.000m ^

Maximum elevation150,000m _J

Meanelevaoon

El ExtendedS TIN


Surfaces Level 1

X:, Surface Properties - ExTopo J|

Information | Definition j Analysis Statistics |

Statistics Value

B GeneralRevision number 0

Number of points 21427

MinffTMii X coordinate 6255766.439'

Minimum Y coordinate 2035494.1031

Maximum X coordinate 6257837.7121

Maximum Y coordinate 2038043.925"

f Minimum elevation 115.000'

Maximum elevation 492.125" J

Mean elevation

B ExtendedB TIN

Figure 4-71

To correct the surface, select the Definition tab. Expand the Build properties and set the Exclude elevation less than value to Yes. Set the Elevation < value to 30m [100'], the Exclude elevation greater than value to Yes, and the Elevation > value to 100m [330'], as shown in Figure 4-72.

Surface Properties - ExTopo

Information Definition

(Analysis jiStabstics jD

e

f

i

n

i

t

i

o

n

O

p

t

i

o

n

s

-

B

u

i

l

dCog^deleted dependent objects

Exclude ele.'ations

less than Bevation

<

Exclude elevations

greater than

Bevation >

Jse

maximu

m

triangle

TengTfi

Maximi

m

triangle

length

Convert

proximit

y breakiines to standard

Allow crossing breakiines

Sevation to use

HValue

No

res

30.000r Yes

100.000m

Yes

100.000m Yes

res ___Use last b'eakline elevation at interssrl

Value

D

e

f

i

© 2011, ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge®t

J

Information Definition [Analysis | Statistics |


n

i

t

i

o

n

O

p

t

i

o

n

s

3

B

u

i

l

d


Surfaces Level 1

^ Exdude elevations less than Yes \

Bevation < 100.000' I

Exdude elevations greater than Yes

^ Bevation > 330.000'V

Use maximum triangle length Yes

Maximum triangle length 330.000'

Convert proximity breakiines to standard Yes

Allow crossing breakiines Yes

Figure 4-72



OK10. Click


11. When prompted to Rebuild the surface or Mark the surface as out-of-date, select Rebuild the Surface. All points that are above an elevation of 100m [330'] are removed and the error is fixed.


Task 5 - Review edits in the Prospector tab and the Surface Properties dialog box.

The history of all changes made to a surface is saved in the drawing.You can apply and remove these changes selectively to the surface.


2. In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Surface Edit.

3. In the Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces collection and select the ExTopo surface. Right-click and select Surface Properties. In the Surface Properties dialog box, the bottom area in the Definition tab lists the history of operations applied to the surface. You can clear any operation to review its impact on the surface. You can also change the order in which these operations are applied by highlighting an operation and clicking the arrows to the left, as shown in Figure 4-73. Clear the Add

boundary Operation Type and click

ParametersBevation range: 35 000m -96.000mfil gaps.odd points to fiat trangle edges.add ports to fiat .Type: Standard. Oescnpoon: ftKSgeBevation range: 150.000m - 150.000mfin gaps,add pouts to flat »iarigle edges,add ports to fiat..

First passes tnrougn (1907371.406;0<93.98Mrr-:Type: Cuter, Descnptxjn; EG Outsde

Cancel ! Apply | (

Figure 4-73


Apply

VaUe

srationType ] Add Contax Data ► Mwmce flat areas Add trealdne ] [h »0d Contoir Data ] I,) Mrinwe fiat area* j Cf Delete mjtrle ines 1 . Add boundary

w

Surfaces Level 1

4. When prompted, select Rebuild the Surface in the Warning dialog box that opens. The boundary is ignored.

5. Select the Add boundary Operation Type and click ! AppiY ). When prompted, select Rebuild the Surface in the Warning dialog box that opens. The boundary is once again used in the surface definition.


Task 6 - Create a composite surface.

In the preceding tasks, you created a surface from available contour data. However, the data around the existing road, Mission Avenue, was inaccurate, so you surveyed the road and created a surface. You need to create a composite surface that represents the site condition combined with the road.


2. In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Surface Edit.

3. In the Prospector tab, right-click on the Surfaces collection and select Create Surface.

4. Select TIN surface for the surface Type. Enter Existing-Site for the surface name and Composite surface of Ex Topo and Ex Road for the Description. Select Contours 2m and 10m (Background) [Contours 2' and 10' (Background)] for the

surface Style. Then click -------— ---- to close the dialog box andcreate a surface.

5. Expand the Surfaces collection in the Prospector tab and select the ExRoad surface. Right-click and select Surface Properties.

Set the surface style to _No Display, then click -------— ----- toaccept the changes and close the dialog box.

Expand the Surfaces collection in the Prospector tab and select the ExTopo surface. Right-click and select Surface Properties.

Set the surface style to _No Display, then click ' -------— -----1 toaccept the changes and close the dialog box.



7. In the Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces > Existing-Site > Definition collections for that surface and select Edits. Right-click and select Paste Surface..., as shown in Figure 4-74.

Spnnth C,.~-.ff

^Paste Surface... s!rnp!!?y?ur?acer

Figure 4-74

In the Select Surface to Paste dialog box, select the Ex Topo and Ex Road surfaces, as shown in Figure 4-75. To select both surfaces, hold down the <Ctrl> key when selecting the second

surface. Once selected, click

Jfc Select Surface to Paste

Name Descnption

Description

Surface from Ex Topo Contours

Figure 4-75

On closer examination, notice that the Ex Road surface was pasted first, followed by the Ex Topo surface. In the area of overlap along the road, the Ex Topo surface data will take precedence. This is not the desired result.


- £} Surfaces

- £) Existmg-Site (h

Masks \ Watersheds

B- Definition

Boundanes Q>

Breaklines C□ Contours DEM

Files

Drawing Objects

______Point Files

E#3 Point Group: * (2)

ExRoad ExTopo +: Alignments a

® Sitei • Pipe Networks

Add Line

Delete

Line Swap

Edge

Add Point

Delete Point

Modify Point

Move Point

Minimize Flat

Areas...

Raise/Lower

Surfac-

OK


Surfaces Level 1

10. In Model Space, select the Existing-Site surface from the surfaces listed in the Surfaces collection of the Prospector tab. The contextual Ribbon for the surface object will display. Select Surface Properties in the Ribbon panel. The Surface Properties - Existing Site dialog box opens. In the Definition tab, notice the order of the paste operations, as shown in Figure 4-76.

t. Surface Properties - Exisfcnc-iite

Informaoor. Oefreton jtaatv** j Stotottca |Detinffion Options

• Data operation** I dit operations

miniiT

2 $>'*>■>

Figure

4-76

11. Select the Paste operation with the value Add surface

ExTopo

, as shown inand move it to the top of the list by clicking Figure 4-77.

>5fimoon Options♦ (Hxtd

* Data operations 1 Edit operations


"wirr

3Add srfacs EiSoac Adc surface ExTopo

H

Add surface ExTow

Ado surface EtRoad


Figure 4-77

. When prompted to Rebuild the surface or Mark

the surface as out-of-date, select Rebuild the Surface.

to exit the dialog box.

14. As a consequence of AutoCAD Civil 3D program's dynamic

abilities, any changes to either the ExTopo or ExRoad surface will be reflected in the Existing-Site surface.



Apply12. Click

OK

13. Click

Surfaces Level 1

Review Questions

What does the size of triangles indicate about the data?

How do you delete an edit from a surface permanently?

What does the Raise/Lower Surface command do?

Why would you use a Data Clip boundary type over an Outer boundary type?


Question 1

Question 2

Question 3

Question 4


Section 3: Civil 3D Surface Labelsand Analysis4.10Surface Labels........................................................................4-62

4.11 Surface Volume Calculations...............................................4-64

4.12Surface Analysis Display.......................................................4-66

Surface Labeling and Analysis............................................. 4-69Task 1: Add surface labels....................................................... 4-69Task 2: Perform a slope analysis..............................................4-72


Surfaces Level 1

4.10 Surface Labels

Surface labels can be used to label contour elevations, slope values, spot elevations, and watershed delineations. Label values update if the surface changes.

To create surface labels, in the Annotate tab > Labels & Tables panel, select Add Labels > Surface to access the surface label flyout menu, as shown in Figure 4-78.

^ Add Projected Object Label "t Add/Edit Sample Lire Group Labels

Section Vwn Line and Curve

rotes

Figure 4-78


Modfy Analyze View Output

A B C Stanssrc

. . «notof Mulalire Check Tec * Spelling

' Add/Edit Profile Labels Add intaracticr Label

Pipe

Mebrafc

Profile View

0.2CCC| X Add Surface Labels

► Slope

^ Spot Elevaton '' Spot

Elevations on Grid Y

Contour - Slnjie

Contour - Mulcts T •

Contour - Multiple at irraarvai


Feature:

(Surface Label typeContour - Singie

^Major contour label style:

"N

d h mlMinor contour label style:

|<sq Existing Mmw Labels

d feH mlUser contour labe: style:

Easting Maicn Label;

■w y

& -I

Pipe Network Profile View

tj> Add Projected Object Label X Add/Edit Sample Line Group Labels

Section View Line and Curve

Figure 4-79

Contour Labels

Spot and Slope LabelsContour labels can be created individually, as multiples along a linear path, or as multiples along a linear path with

repeated labels at a set interval. Multiple contours are aligned along an object called a Contour Label Line, which can be repositioned as needed, and in turn updates the position of its labels. These label lines have a selectable property that can make them visible only when an attached label is selected. If they are left visible, they should be placed on a non-plotting layer.

Spot elevation and slope labels can be created as needed to annotate a surface. These are dynamic surface labels and not point objects, although they may look similar to points. Slopes can be measured at a single point or be averaged between two points.


*m*i

Surface

Figure

Parcel

Feature Line Alignment

X; Add/Edit Prcflle

Labels :SJ> Add

Intersection Label

"33n a

"3

Multiline Checi Text * ipeilng

Add Tables •

A B C

kic Labels'

Add Close Help

You can also select Add Labels > Notes, as shown on the left in Figure 4-79, to open the Add Labels dialog box. This dialog box enables you to select the feature and label type while being able to control the label style on the fly, as shown on the right.

Surfaces Level 1

4.11 Surface Volume Calculations

You can generate volume calculations in AutoCAD Civil 3D in many ways. Surface-to-surface calculations are often used to compare an existing ground surface to a proposed surface to determine cut and fill quantities. In AutoCAD Civil 3D, quantities can be adjusted by an expansion (cut) or a compaction (fill) factor. Surfaces representing different soil strata can be compared to each other to determine the volume between the soil layers. There are multiple ways of comparing surfaces to each other in AutoCAD Civil 3D, described below.

In the Analyze tab > Volumes and Materials panel, select Volumes > Volumes, as shown in Figure 4-80.

The composite method calculates volumes based on a graphical subtraction of one surface from the other, as shown in Figure 4-81.

□ E *e i e s e s a

SufeccPar VOJXT*

ews/tee

jCc<r,c«iscrtStff*e

cut I" |Nrt jo*Factor jHj OA(aduwdj iFt!tacwKaJ; j tmtafescctf | **Graoh IIi

i *

Figure 4-81

The Alet Graph color displays in red if the surface difference results in a net cut, and green if it is a net fill. You can have multiple volume entries listed if you are comparing multiple surfaces. If any surfaces

Pchange, return to this vista and click ~a (Recompute Volumes) to update the calculations. Alternatively, you can add another volume entry. Select the same two surfaces and compare before and after volume calculations..


Composite Volumes vista

Viow Output Manage Expitss ToolsAnalyze

Figure 4-80


In the Analyze tab > Volumes and Materials panel, select Volumes > Bounded Volumes. This method is similar to the composite method, but can be limited to the area defined by a defined polyline, polygon, or parcel.

This method enables you to assign the surfaces you want to compare as object properties of a volume surface. The volume between the surfaces is calculated and included in the volume surface object properties. The TIN surface calculation is the same one conducted in the Composite Volumes vista. The Grid surface calculation is based on a grid of points interpolated from both surfaces, rather than all of the surface points of both. Grid surfaces tend to be less accurate, but faster to calculate and easier to prove by manual methods.

Grid of spot elevation labels that list the elevation differences between two surfaces can be generated from either a Grid Volume surface or TIN Volume surface. Once the volume surface is created, you can create the labels. In the Annotate tab > Labels & Tables panel, select Add Labels > Surface > Spot Elevations on Grid, as shown in Figure 4-82.

Surface ■3 '' Add Surface Labels

Figure ► Y. Slope

Parcel »I Feature Line % Spot Flcvafons on Grid

j Alignment ► ■HwU: 1 JiMB

' X> Add/Edit Profile Labels Y> Contour • Multiple %

Contour • Multiple at IntervalY> Add Intersection Label

Pipe Network

Profile View 1

Y > Add Projected Object LabelAdd/Edit Sample Lire Group labels

Section View »

line and Cuve *

Y>> Notes

Figure 4-82


Bounded Volumes

Grid Volume or TIN Volume Surface

Asalabels"

AOC Tables •

Text " Spelling 0.2060

ABC Sancarc ✓

„ _ . flntfto?MJslire Check

□ A

Surfaces Level 1

4.12 Surface Analysis Display

AutoCAD Civil 3D software can calculate and display many differentsurface analyses, including:

• Contours'. This analysis can display contours differently based on their elevation ranges.

• Directions: This analysis can render surface triangles differently depending on which direction they face.

• Elevations: This analysis can render surface triangles differently depending on their elevation ranges.

• Slopes: This analysis can render surface triangles differently depending on their slope ranges.

• Slope Arrows: This analysis creates a dynamic slope arrow that points downslope for each triangle, colorized by slope range.

• User-Defined Contours: This analysis can display user-defined contours differently based on their elevation ranges.

• Watersheds: This analysis can calculate watershed areas, and render them according to area type. AutoCAD Civil 3D watershed analysis usually results in a very large number of individual watersheds. Although a Catchment Areas command is available to assist in drawing the catchment areas, it is still up to the engineers to draw their own conclusions on how these should be merged together into catchment areas.

The above analyses are calculated on demand for each surface andtheir results are stored under the surface's Surface Properties.

In addition, the following separate utilities may be helpful whenanalyzing surfaces:

• Check for Contour Problems is used to locate problems with the contour data, including crossing or overlapping contours. To access this command, in the Surface tab > expanded Analyze panel, select Check for Contour Problems, as shown in Figure 4-83.


(f Water Drop ^ Expor (g°

Catchment Area Drape Vc'unes

Extrsr

Figure 4-83


Water Drop draws a 2D or 3D polyline indicating the expected flow path of water across the surface from a given starting point. To access this command, in the Surface tab > Analyze panel, select Water Drop, as shown in Figure 4-84.

Catchment Area draws a 2D or 3D polyline indicating the catchment boundary and catchment point marker for a surface drainage area. To access this command, in the Surface tab > Analyze panel, select Catchment Area, as shown in Figure 4-85. You should use this command in conjunction with the Water Drop command to determine an accurate placement of catchment regions and points.

Express Took

j

Volum

es Analyze •»

Figure 4—85

You apply a surface analysis through the Analysis tab in the Surface Properties dialog box. In this tab, you can select the number of ranges and a legend table to be used. All of the remaining analysis settings are located in the Surface Object style, including whether to display in 2D or 3D, the color scheme, elevations, range groupings, etc. If you want to change the number of ranges or the range values, use the settings in this tab at any time.


Surface I

Analysis Settings

CmmaA Took

(q) Catchment Ares Q) Volumes

Analyze » St

Figure 4-84

Surfaces Level 1

Overall visibility, layer, linetype, and related controls for analysis elements are managed through the Display tab in the Object Style dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-86. You can see component entries for Slopes, Slope Arrows, Watersheds, and so on. These can be set to display different settings and combinations of elements in 2D and 3D.

Surface Style - Border ft Contours

Information Borders Contours Grid Points Triangles Wacersneds Analysis Display Summar\View Direction:2D V3t'

Comocrient T...

Visible

Layer Color Linetype LT Scale

Lmewelght

Plot!"'

Points i C-TOPO-PNT3

■ BVLAYER

ByLayer 1.0000

ByLayer "

j

Triangles 9 C-T1NN-VIEW

■BVLAYER

ByLayer 1.0000

ByLayer ^tW. 3

Border C-TOPO-BNDY

□BVLAYER

ByLayer 1.0000

ByLayer Sj&ayJ

Major Contour Q C-TOPO-

MAJR■ BYLAYEP.

ByLayer 1.0000

EyLayer Fytay-li ]

Minor Contour Q C-TOPO-

MINR□ BVLAYER

ByLayer 1.0000

ByLayer tvL^-1

m

User Contours 9 C-TOPO-

USER□ BVLAYER

ByLayer 1.0000

ByLayer

Gndded C-TOPO-GRID

■ BVLAYER

ByLayer 1.0000

ByLayer Sslay,, J

Directions ■ ByLayer 1.0000

ByLayer fetor" |

Elevations ■ bTvav's

1.0000

ByLayer Evijv-i-Jj

Slopes I ■ 1.0000

ByLayer tVl.*-', 1

Slope Arrows ? ■ 1.0000

ByLayer V

< >


Analysis Data Display


Cancel

Figure 4-86


HelpApply

Surfaces Level 1

Practice 4e Surface Labeling and Analysis

Task 1 - Add surface labels.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice or open the file SUF1-E1-Surface.dwg from the following folder:

Metric:


Imperial:


2. In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Surface Label.

3. Select the Existing-Site surface in the graphics screen (Model Space). The contextual Ribbon for the surface object will display. In the Labels & Tables panel, select Add Labels and select the Contour - Multiple from the drop-down list, as shown in Figure 4-87.


> Add Sumacs Labels

Figure 4-87


4. When prompted to select the first point and second point, specify any two points. When prompted for the next point, select a third point that creates a line intersecting all of the contours you want to label, as shown in Figure 4-88. Press <Enter> when done.

5. Move and reorient the contour label line. The labels update.

6. The Display Contour Label Line property can be set to be visible only when contour labels are selected. To change the visibility property, select the line in Model Space and select Properties in the contextual Ribbon. Then, in the Properties dialog box, set the Display Contour Label Line property to False as shown in Figure 4-89.


Figure 4-88

Surfaces Level 1

Display Minor Contour Labels True

CH/Io

k <):-«.. I —J-


w


8. To have all future contour label lines behave this way in this drawing, select the Settings tab in the Toolspace. Select Surface, right-click, and select Edit Feature Settings...,as shown in Figure 4-90, to edit the surface.

S © Point Cloud1

' - * l Edit Feature Settings.- & Surface Styles Vi ■ h i | . . i ■ . i ,

' Edit Label Style Defaults.. - & Label Styles

- & Table Styles Refreh

- Commands 1 D>.,.l

Figure 4-90

In the Edit Feature Settings dialog box, expand Contour Labeling Defaults and set the Display Contour Label Line property to

False, as shown in Figure 4-91. Click L— .......... .. .< to accept thechanges and close the dialog box.

Properxy Value Overr... Child... Lock

SLj General

BCj La beting

a (2)Default Styles

Q.f (fnnrfliir I flhefinn DefaultsC Display Contour Label Line false J a

Label Ma si' Type From Label Style aSurface Contour Label Style M... E»sting Major Labels aSurface Contour Label Style Mi... Exsting Minor Labels aSurface Contour Label Style U... E»stinq Major Labels ____r : ' a

0 ^Surface Defaults

aQUnitless

aD Distance

_:——. . Figure 4-91

10. Select the Existing-Site surface again in the graphics screen (Model Space). The contextual Ribbon for the surface object will display. In the Labels & Tables panel, select Add Labels and select Contour - Multiple in the drop-down list.

11. Select two points that will draw a line across some contours and press <Enter> when done. The contour label line now does not display.

12. Select the Existing-Site surface in the graphics screen (Model Space). The contextual Ribbon for the surface object will display. In the Labels & Tables panel, select Add Labels and select Slope in the drop-down list.


Surfaces Level 1

13. To accept the prompt for the default One-point label, press <Enter>, then select a point in Model Space within the surface boundary. AutoCAD Civil 3D will place the slope value at that point. When you finish placing the labels, press <Enter> to exit the command.



14. (Optional) Using the same process as in steps 10 and 11 above, experiment with labeling the surface with spot elevations and two point slopes. Note that you will be able to copy a label and place it at a different location. As the labels are dynamic, the values will change to reflect the surface information at the location of the label.

Task 2 - Perform a slope analysis.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous task or open the file SUF1-E2-Surface.dwg.

2. In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Surface.

3. Select the Existing-Site surface in the graphics screen (Model Space). The contextual Ribbon for the surface object will display. In the Modify panel, select Surface Properties.

4. In the Information tab in the Surface Properties dialog box, select Slope Banding (2D) as the surface style.

5. In the Analysis tab, select Slopes for the Analysis type and

select 5 for the number of ranges to use. Then click ^ (Run Analysis). AutoCAD Civil 3D calculates a range of values to fit within the specified number of ranges. Change the range values for Rangel to 0-2%, Range2 to 2-5%, Range3to 5-10% Range4 to 10-20%, and Range5 to 20-70000%, as shown in Figure 4-92.

.Information j Definition Analysis [statistics j

Analysis type:_____________________________

Islopes

Legend Slope

Ganges

Number:

Range Details J Scale

scheme to ft


E

Maximu

m

Siope

2.000% 5.000%

10.000

%

20.000% 28-

4.7350

%

Minimum

Slope

0.0000% 2.000% 5.000%

10.000

%

20.000%

Scneme: Reds

Preview

Figure 4-92

Surfaces Level 1

6. Change the range of colors for the slope range. To change the color, click on the color and in the Select Color dialog box,as shown in Figure 4-93, select the desired color. Assign color 51 for the the slope range 1 and color 1 for slope range 5. Click

—— ------' to close the dialog box.

Maxmm Slope 2.000% 5.000% 10.000% 20.000% 284.7350%

to close the dialog box and apply the changes.

Press <Esc> to exit the surface selection.

8. Review the area you want to develop. The slope ranges will be an issue.

9. You need to create a slope values table. Select the Existing-Site surface in the graphics screen (Model Space). The contextual Ribbon for the surface object will display. In the Labels & Tables panel, select Add Legend.

10. Type S for the Slope table and type Enter at the Command Line. Accept the default for a dynamic table by pressing <Enter>.


V Select Color IfiSSftiIndex Color Tim Color j C olor Booto

AutoCAD Color tndor (ACQ

■■■■■■

■■■■Si iSi IBHI

BBS

■ ■■

■as

■■■1

■■■

mmm

■nmmm

■■■

index cotor 51 Red. Green. Blue. 255.255.127

Figure 4-93

OK

7. Click


11. When prompted for the top corner of the table (top left), select a location in an open area to the right of the surface, as shown in Figure 4-94. Press <Esc> key to exit the selection.

Slopes Table

NuT&tr

Minimum Slope

Maximum Slope

Areo

Cdcr

1 C.OOX

J.Wt

■445B2.S0

2 2.00*

S.20H

BBS65.S1

5. DOS

ID.OOS

■

4 IG.MWS

sa.osi IS.r.142.36

■

5 2G.D0S

28Jk74*

33325.20

■

Figure 4-94

12. Because this table is dynamic, any changes made to the surface or to the ranges in the analysis will update the table automatically.


Surfaces Level 1

13. (Optional) Open the Surface Properties dialog box (steps 3-7) and change the number of slope ranges or the values. The Model Space Legend table will be updated.



Review Questions

What do surface labels do?

Which is more accurate, a composite or grid volume calculation?

After a surface analysis has been completed, how do you change the number of ranges or range limits?

What determines how a style enables an object to be displayed when viewed from above or from another vantage point?

Question 1

Question 2

Question 3

Question 4

Surfaces Level 1

Modul® 6Data Sharing Level 1


Section 1: Data Sharing Overview✓ AutoCAD Civil 3D Projects S Sharing Data

Section 2: Data Shortcuts S Data Shortcuts

Section 3: Autodesk Vault S Autodesk Vault

Overview

✓ Using the Vault Client


6-1

Data Sharing Level 1

Section 1: Data Sharing Overview6.1 AutoCAD Civil 3D Projects.........................................................6-4

6.2 Sharing Data...............................................................................6-5



6.1 AutoCAD Civil 3D Projects

There are multiple ways of organizing AutoCAD® Civil 3D® project drawings. Three of the most common approaches are:

Since AutoCAD Civil 3D surfaces, alignments, and other AEC objects can be entirely drawing-based, you can have a single drawing file act as the repository for all design data. Realistically, this might only be feasible with the smallest of projects and/or those worked on by only one person. The only external data would be survey databases, and possibly drawings containing plotting layouts that XREF the single design drawing.

This approach permits multiple survey and design drawings that share data. For example, a surface could exist in one drawing and an alignment in another. A third could contain a surface profile based on the alignment and terrain model, and all could be kept in sync with each other through Data Shortcuts. This approach is usually preferable to the single-drawing approach, because it permits more than one user to work on the project at the same time (in the different design drawings). This approach does not create any external project data other than survey databases and XML data files used to share data between drawings.

Shortcuts tend to be efficient for projects with a small number of drawings and project team members. Since the XML data files that connect drawings must be managed manually, keeping a large number of drawings and/or people in sync with shortcuts can be cumbersome. It is highly recommended that you establish procedures to ensure that data is not unintentionally deleted or changed. You will also want to document these procedures very carefully.

Autodesk® Vault program is data and document management system(ADMS). It is used in conjunction with other Autodesk® applications in different industries. When working with Autodesk Vault program, all project drawings, survey databases, and references are managed and stored inside an SQL-managed database. Autodesk Vault consists of user-level access permissions, drawing check-in/out, project templates, automated backups, data versioning, etc. These benefits are offset by the additional time required to manage and administer the database, and in some cases purchasing additional hardware and software. If you work on large projects with multiple design drawings or have many team members (more than 10), you might find Vault is the best way to keep those projects organized.


Single-Design Drawing Projects

Multiple Drawings

Sharing Data through

Snorters

Multiple Drawings

Sharing Data with Autodesk

Vault


6.2 Sharing Data

In the AutoCAD Civil 3D workflow, you can use two main methods of project collaboration or the sharing of intelligent Civil 3D design data: Data Shortcuts and Vault references.

Autodesk Vault and Data Shortcuts can be used to share design data between drawing files in the same project, such as alignment definitions, profiles, surfaces, pipe networks, and View Frames. They do not permit the sharing of profile views, assemblies, corridors, sample line groups, or other AutoCAD Civil 3D objects. Drawing sets utilizing shortcuts typically make use of XREFs, as well as reference other line work and annotations between drawings. Whether using Vault Shortcuts or Data Shortcuts, the process is similar.

Figure 6-1 demonstrates the sharing of data in a project collaboration environment. The data is broken down into three distinctive levels. Using either Data Shortcuts or Vault, these levels can be accessed and contributed to, either on a local or remote server.

Using data references and Xref, combined Civil 3D design objects with AutoCAD linework and geometricsto create engineering plansthat include proposed

design objectsto create a base plan


Civil 3D design Objects

{j Surface Alignment V* Profiles §fj Pipe Network

Using data references and Xref, combined Civil 3D design objects to create a base plan

Level 1

4 I I

Linework and Geometries

Base Drawing Topography

Utilities Grading Road

Level 2 Engineering Plan

AutoCAD Geometries

= Engineering Plans/Design Plans

Using data reference, xrefs, combine base sheets and engineering plans to create production sheets

Production Sheets

Engineering Plan Plan and Profiles Utility Sheets Landscaping Sheets

Figure 6-1

Level 3


Review Questions

In the AutoCAD Civil 3D workflow, what are the two main methods of project collaboration (or the sharing of intelligent AutoCAD Civil 3D design data)?

Why would you want to use Vault references over Data Shortcuts?

There are multiple ways of organizing AutoCAD Civil 3D project drawings. What are three of the most common methods?

When sharing data in a project collaboration environment, what is the recommended number of levels into which the data should be broken?


Question 1

Question 2

Question 3

Question 4


Section 2: Data Shortcuts6.3 Data Shortcuts..............................................................................6-8

Data Shortcuts Part I................................................................. 6-13Task 1: Set the Working folder.................................................. 6-13Task 2: Create new Shortcuts folders........................................6-14Task 3: Set up Shortcuts folder..................................................6-16

Data Shortcuts Part II................................................................ 6-18Task 1: Set up Data Shortcuts folders....................................... 6-18Task 2: Create Data Shortcuts...................................................6-19Task 3: Data-reference Data Shortcuts......................................6-22Task 4: Revise original referenced object..................................6-25

Data Shortcuts Part 111............................................................ 6-29

6.3 Data Shortcuts

Data Shortcuts can be used to share design data between drawing files through the use of XML files. Using Data Shortcuts is similar to using Vault, but does not provide the protection of your data or the tracking of versions the way that Vault does.

Data Shortcuts are managed through the Prospector tab in the Toolspace under the Data Shortcuts collection, as shown in Figure 6-2. The shortcuts are stored in XML files within one or more working folders that you create. They can use the same folder structure as Vault. This method simplifies the transition to using Vault at a future time.

9 [jFj Data Shortcuts [C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training\DataShortCuts] Surfaces

Alignments ti *-j3 Ascent Blvd ♦ -g Ascent PI + Jeffries Ranch Rd ffi -g Mission Ave o

Pipe Networks SI STORM [iia frame Groups ffi £] Diawmg Templates

Figure 6-2

Whether using Vault or Data Shortcuts, the intelligent Civil 3D object design data can be consumed and utilized on different levels. However, this referenced data only can be edited in the drawing that contains the original object. As referenced data can be assigned a different style than those in the source drawing, you have the ability to separate the design phase (where drawing presentation is not critical) from the drafting phase (where drawing presentation is paramount). What this means is that after the styles are applied at the drafting phase, any changes to the design will have minimal visual impact to the completed drawings.

Changing the name of a drawing file that provides Data Shortcuts or the shortcut XML file itself will invalidate the shortcut. Although the Data Shortcuts Editor outside of AutoCAD Civil 3D permits re-pathing if a source drawing moves, shortcuts might not resolve if the source drawing file name has changed.



If the shortcut objects are modified and the source drawing is saved, any drawings that reference those objects are updated when opened. If the drawings consuming the data referenced in the shortcuts were open at the time of the edit, a balloon message appears to warn you of the changes, as shown in Figure 6-3.

The modifier icons shown below help you determine the state of many AutoCAD Civil 3D objects.

V The object is referenced by another object. In the Settings tab, this also indicates that a style is in use in the current drawing.

The object is being referenced from another drawing file (such as through a shortcut or Vault reference).

The object is out of date and needs to be rebuilt, or is violating specified design constraints.

Ik A project object (such as a point or surface) has been modified since it was included in the current drawing.

A You have modified a project object in your current drawing and those modifications have yet to be updated to the project.

The example in Figure 6-4 shows how the modifier icons are used with a AutoCAD Civil 3D object as it displays in the Prospector tab.

8 ' 'Existing Ground

# Watersheds

Figure 6-4

To update the shortcut data, select Synchronize in the balloon message or right-click on the object in the Prospector and select Synchronize.


Figure 6-3

Update Notification


Removing and Promoting Shortcuts

©Transmit Data References

Shortcut data can be removed from the Shortcut tree in the Prospector by right-clicking on it and selecting Remove, but this does not remove the data from the drawing. To do so, right-click on the object in the Prospector and select Delete. This removes the shortcut data from the current list, so that the item is not included if a Data Shortcut XML file is exported from the current drawing.

You can also promote shortcuts, which converts the referenced shortcut into a local copy with no further connection to the original. You can promote objects by right-clicking on them in the Prospector and selecting Promote.

Projects that use Data Shortcuts can be packaged and sent to

reviewers, clients, and other consultants using the AutoCAD eTransmit command. With the eTransmit command, all of the related dependent files (such as XML files, XREFs, and text fonts) are automatically included in the package. This reduces the possibility of errors and ensures that the recipient can use the files you send them. A report file can be included in the package that explains what must be done with drawing-dependent files (e.g., XML, XREFs) so that they are usable with the included files. The Create Transmittal dialog box is shown in Figure 6-5.



' ----------------------------------------------------------------------I .......................... '......

13 Create TransmittalE

| jffij Current Drawing(s): Current user Michelle

Files Tree Files Table Select a liansmittal setup

B Current Drawing

ri U) K? Site Design • Data Shortcuts Comptete.dwg

Ei -i- BSM5HSIBBI

R7 Site Design • Data Shortcuts

CompieteGWS1213 E (£) AutoCAD Font Map E ©J

JPEG Image B 0 External References

Standard

Setup description:

EE Baseplan • Data Shortcut Complete.dwg

Transmittal Setups...

< ,;;1J sgfj

included 12 Ue(sl. S984KB [ Aod File. | Preview

Enter notes to include with this transmittal package:

i i

View Report OK

Cancel | | Help

Figure 6-5



1. In the Prospector tab, right-click on Data Shortcuts and select Set the Working Folder....

2. In the Prospector tab, right-click on Data Shortcuts and select New Data Shortcuts Folder... to create a new project folder for all your drawings.

3. Create or import the data you want to share in the source drawing and save it in the current working folder under the correct project folder.

4. In the Prospector tab, right-click on Data Shortcuts and select Create Data Shortcuts.

5. Select all items you want to share, such as surfaces, alignments, or profiles, and then clickOK

6. Save the source drawing (and close as needed).

7. Open, create and save the drawing to receive the shortcut data. Expand the Data Shortcuts collection and relevant object trees(Surfaces, Alignments, Pipe Networks, or View Frame Groups).

8. Highlight an item to be referenced, right-click and select Create Reference.... Repeat for all objects as needed. You are prompted for the styles and other settings that are required to display the object in the current drawing.

9. You might also want to add an XREF to the source drawing ifthere is additional AutoCAD® line work you would like to show in the downstream drawing.

10. AutoCAD Civil 3D tools for Data Shortcuts are located in the Manage tab, as shown in Figure 6-6, and in the Prospector tab.

[ O (£> 0 © -

Home Insert Annotate Modify Analyze View Output I Manage |

\ &r Tool ice Palette'

jPJ Cj§ New Shortcuts Folder [£}• Validate Data Shortcuts

E§ set Shortcuts Folder [^j Pro-note All Data ReferencesCreate DataShortcuts EH Set Working Folde' Synchronize References

Usei Interfo

Data Shortcuts Custorr

Figure 6-6


Data Shortcut Workflow


Set Working Folder: This option sets a new working folder as the location to store the Data Shortcut project. The default working folder for Data Shortcut projects is C:\Civil 3D Projects. The default working folder is also used for Autodesk Vault projects and local (non-Vault) Survey projects. If you work with Autodesk Vault, local Survey, and Data Shortcut projects, you should have separate working folders for each project type for ease of management.

New Shortcuts Folder: This option creates a new folder for storing a set of related project drawings and Data Shortcuts.

Create Data Shortcuts: This option creates Data Shortcuts from the active drawing.

Data Shortcuts are stored in the Shortcuts folder for the active

project,and used to create data references to source objects in otherdrawings. Each Data Shortcut is stored in a separate XML file.

• Data Shortcuts provide a simple mechanism for sharing object data, without the added system administration needs of Autodesk Vault.

• Data Shortcuts offer access to an object's intelligent data while ensuring that this referenced data can only be changed in the source drawing.

• Referenced objects can have styles and labels that differ from the source drawing.

• When you open a drawing that has revised referenced data, the referenced objects are automatically updated.

• During a drawing session, if the referenced data has been revised, you are notified both in the Communication Center and the Prospector tab in Toolspace.

• Data Shortcuts cannot provide data versioning.• Data Shortcuts provide no security or data integrity controls.• Unlike Autodesk Vault, Data Shortcuts do not provide a

secure mechanism for sharing point data or survey data.• Maintaining links between references and their source

objects requires fairly stable names and locations on the shared file system. However, most broken references can easily be repaired with tools provided within AutoCAD Civil 3D.


Workflow Details

2

.

3

.

Advantages of Data Shortcuts

Limitations of Data Shortcuts


Data Shortcuts Part I

In this practice you will walk through the steps of creating a project-based Data Shortcuts folders.

Task 1 - Set the Working folder.

In this task, you set up a new working folder as the location to store Data Shortcut projects. The default working folder for Data Shortcut projects is C:\Civil 3D Projects.

1. Create a new drawing, as shown in Figure 6-7, using the C3D Training.dwt template in one of the following folders:

Metric:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-M\Templates

Imperial:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-l\Templates

2. In the Manage tab > Data Shortcuts panel, select Set Working Folder, as shown in Figure 6-8.

! Home Insert Annotate Modify Analyze View Output BSfflfflW I

^ E§ N'ew Shortcuts Folder Validate Da:a Shortcuts

El Set Shortcuts Folder C^g P-omote .All Oaa References

Shortcuts O Set Working FoideJ Synchronize References

User Tooi

Interface Paletres

Data Shortcuts Custom

Figure 6-8


Practice 6a


3. In the Browse For Folder dialog box, select the Civil 3D Projects

folder and click I _, as shown on the left inFigure 6-9. Enter Learning Data Shortcuts as the folder name

, as shown on the right in Figure 6-9.and click

Browse For Folder

Set Working Folder

i ^ local Disk (G) C3D

Civil 3D Project Templatess Civil 3D Projects

Training Shortcuts Training Vault Drawing CiviBD-training-

Geomatics t> k t Civil3D-training-l i> J Civil3D-training-M

^ Make New Folder^

OK | Cancel |

• i Local Disk (C:)i> J* C3Dt> j Civil 3D Project Templates * Civil 3D Projects A CiviGP-training-DataSharing | ^earning Data Shortcuts Training Shortcuts Training Vault Drawing : CiviGD-training-Geomatics ^ ^ CiviBD-training-I


OK

U

Browse For Folde'

Set Workrig Foider


Make New Folder [

OK | Cancel

Figure 6-9

Task 2 - Create new Shortcuts folders.

In this task, you create a new folder for storing a set of related project drawings and Data Shortcuts. Create a folder name that reflects the project name and specify whether or not to use a project template to organize your data.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous task.

2. In the Manage tab > Data Shortcuts panel, select New Shortcuts Folder, as shown in Figure 6-10.

3. In the New Data Shortcut Folder dialog box, enter Ascent Phase 1 for the name and select the Use project template option. The template is found in the default folder C:\Civil 3D Templates, as shown in Figure 6-11. Civil 3D will replicate this template folder

structure in the Data Shortcuts project folder. Click OK — toclose the dialog box.


MkJ

Home Insert Annotate Modify Analyze View Output Manage"]

&Too? :

e

Palette

s

CustOT

Cre S

h

Hate D

t

o

r

e

-

| (^S New Shortcuts -o!de^ Validate Data Shortcuts

C3 Set Sncrtcuts Folder Promote AH Data Referencesata

;ts D Set Working Foider [^Q Synchronce References Data

Shortcuts

Use

r

Inte

rfa

<

Figure 6-10


Jfc, New Data Shortcut Folder

Working folder:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\CivJ30-traimng-DataShartngV-Cdrnnq Data Shortcuts\

Kjaa-----------^Ascent Phase I J

Description:

Use project template^

pject templates folder: C:\ pvi 3D Project Templates \

Date aeated: 30/05/2011 09:05 AM

1 I Cancel

Figure 6-11

4. In the Prospector tab, you should now see a Data Shortcut folder in C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-DataSharing\Learning Data

Shortcuts\Ascent Phase 1. If you view Windows File Explorer, you will see the folder structure Civil 3D has created for this project, as shown in Figure 6-12.

E> B © <*> • fi> v® Civil 3D

Eg New Shortcuts Folder Validate Data Shortcuts Eg

Set Shortcuts Folder [Jj Prcmote All Data ReferencesCreate DataShortcuts E3 Set Working Folder [73 Synchronize References

Data ShortcutsExportUser Tool Interface Palettes yf Edit Aliases App

Customization

Computer - & Local Disk (C:) 0 $ C3D


)Project template:

Created by:PC-MFERNANDESWX

Help

File Edit View Tools Help

Organize ▼ Include in library ▼

—


Manage

QJ, S Import


Civil 3D Project Templates * Civil 3D Projects A _ CtviBD-traininq-

DataShannq Leam^igDat^hoirtcut^^ • Ascent Phase 1 l> \ Sii .Shortcuts ■,'jfc Documents

External References Production Drawings Mi Reports ^ ' Source Drawings J i Training Shortcuts Training Vault Drawing

> CiviBD-training-Geomatics > riuiRn.tnininn-1

Figure 6-12


: Toolspace

Q.Master View

B-f~1 Open Drawings n

Drawing?

<2Data Shortcuts [C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-tr3ining-DataSharing\Leaming Data Shortcuts'vAscent Phase 1]

L"E SUfULfc, + -

Alignments

Pipe Networks

View Frame Groups i-B

Drawing Templates


5. Create a new shortcuts folder. In the Manage tab > Data Shortcuts panel, select New Shortcuts Folder.

6. In the New Data Shortcut Folder dialog box, enter Ascent Phase 2 for the name and select the Use project template option. Click

-----------I to close the dialog box.

7. You now have two projects in the working folder: Ascent Phase 1 and Ascent Phase 2, as shown in Figure 6-13.

* Computer * Local Disk (C:) i>,A C3D

Civil 3D Project Templates * Civil 3D Projects * CiviBD-training-DataSharing * Learning Data

Shortcuts Ascent Phase 1 Ascent Phase 2 i'> Training Shortcuts Jji Training Vault Drawing CiviBD-training-

Geomatics f- Civil3D-training-I CiviBD-training-M

Figure 6-13

Task 3 - Set up Shortcuts folder.

Setting the shortcut folder specifies the project path for Data Shortcuts. The path to the current Data Shortcuts folder (also known as the project folder) is specified on the Prospector tab in the Toolspace, under the Data Shortcuts collection. The project folder typically contains both Data Shortcuts and source objects for data references.


2. In the Manage tab > Data Shortcuts panel, select Set Shortcuts Folder.


1


The current Data Shortcut folder is signified by a green circle with a check mark. Select Ascent Phase 1 to make it current

J, as shown in Figure 6-14.

ii Toolspace

Q cMaster View

Q

Open

Drawi

ngs

ffi-Q

Drawi

ng 2i ■[?! Data Shortcuts [C:\Civfl3DProjects\CiviBD-training-DataSharing\Learning Data ShortcutsVAscent Phase2]

I l^s Surface^ IJjg, Set Data Shortcut Folder

Name Description

Ascent Phase 1

@ Ascent Phase 2


3.

OK

and click

S3E- Alignrr"Sb P'pe Ni

[Ej| View Fr

Ej-B Drawing Ti

Cancel Help<3>Figure 6-14


Folder Name: Ascent Phase 2



Data Shortcuts Part II

In this practice you will walk through the steps of creating project-based Data Shortcuts folders.

Task 1 - Set up Data Shortcuts folders.


Practice 6b

OK to close the dialog box, asShortcuts and click — shown in Figure 6-15.

Browse For FolderSet Working Folder

Computer >

■o Local Disk (O)

i> X C3D

l> j Civil 3D Project Templates =

* Civil 3D Projects

* CiviBD-training-DataSharing

Learning Data Shortcuts

(^"Waining Shortcuts^^

Jm Training Vault DrawingCivil3D-training-Geomatics

Civil3D-training-I

f' afc Civil3D-training-M

Make New Folder | OK | | Cancel |

Figure 6-15

3. In the Manage tab > Data Shortcuts panel, select Set Shortcuts Folder.


4. In the Set Data Shortcut Folder dialog box, select Ascent

Phasel if not already selected, and click 1-------to close thedialog box.

Task 2 - Create Data Shortcuts.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous practice or open the file DAT1-DataSharing-surface.dwg.

2. In the Prospector tab, verify that the Data Shortcuts points to the correct folder, as shown in Figure 6-16.

!"" Lb Surfaces + Alignments

Pipe Networks L - M View Frame Groups

Figure 6-16

3. This drawing contains some surfaces for which you want to create Data Shortcuts. In the Manage tab > Data Shortcuts panel, select Create Data Shortcuts, as shown in Figure 6-17.

ManageEJ§ Ne.v Shortcuts Folde- Validate Data Shortcuts : jICS Set Shortcuts Folder [^g P-orr=te Ail Data References '

Create Data! User Too!

1 Open the file DAT1 -DataSharing-surface.dwg from the following folder:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-DataSharing\Training Shortcuts\Ascent Phase1\Production Drawings


S Toolspace

a - m

Master View ▼

• Open Drawings

| $ D DAT! - ftitaShiring-surface

• ft-D Drawino2 | |

{^j*] Data Shortcuts [C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-DataSharingMraining ShortcutsVAscent Phasel^



Lshocc-ts ID Set Working :older TO Synchronize References J Irterface Paiette;

Data Shortcuts CiiStorr


saved, click *- -—----1. Save the drawing and start the CreateData Shortcuts command again.


In the Create Data Shortcuts dialog box, you will see a list of all objects that are available for use in shortcuts. Select Surfaces,

as shown in Figure 6-18, and click

Create Data Shortcuts Share Data

Selected objects will be accessible to all users who point to the same working folder These shortcuts are available in the Prospector.

B-&EI____________0 ExTopo-DataShare Tobeadded 0 ExRoad-

DataShare To be added PI Existing-Site-DataSh

are To be added

Figure 6-18

Save and close the drawing. To close, select DAT1-DataSharing-Surface, right-click and select Close, as shown in Figure 6-19.

I DATl-OataSharmq-surlace .......—■

PointsC c l o s e D

[4>] Point Groups Check in...

© Point Clouds . . . ................ . . .—

Surfaces Export LandXML...

"13 Alinnmpnt*: Rpfresh

Figure 6-19

Notice in the Prospector tab, under the Data Shortcuts and Surfaces collections, you now have access to all surfaces. In the list view below, you can see the source file name and source path, as shown in Figure 6-20.

i=i O Open Drawings : (fe-O D ATI -

DataS ha ring su rface

; ® Q Drawing2


6.5.

OK

S3" ffi-

3-D Open Drawings

A-om"] i ^i..,

Home Insert Annotate


6 ® Data Shortcuts [C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-DataSharing\Training Shortcuts\Ascent Phase 1] $ Surfjjs^ ^^^^^^ ; ■ ^ Existing-Site-Data Share ^ ! "£0 ExRoad-DataShare^ ' ExTopo-

DataShare -g Alignments

ID Centerline Alignments

Offset Alignments v] Curb

Return Alignments

Miscellaneous Alignments

Source File NameDataSharing-surface CACivil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-DataSharing\Traini...\Production Drawings

Figure 6-20


Source Location

€E


8. Open the file DAT1-DataSharing-Alignment.dwg.

9. In the Manage tab > Data Shortcuts panel, select Create Data Shortcuts.

10. If you receive a message that the drawing has not yet been

. Save the drawing and start the Create Data Shortcuts command again. In the Create Data Shortcuts dialog box, you will see a list of all objects that are available for use in shortcuts. At the bottom left corner of the dialog box, clickQI

' (Pick in drawing).

In Model Space, select the three alignments, as shown on the left in Figure 6-21. Then press <Enter>. Notice in the Create Data Shortcuts dialog box, the three alignments are selected, as

OK

to close the dialog box.shown on the right. Click

it, Create Data Shortcuts Share DataSelected objects will be accessible to all users who point to the same working folder. These shortcuts are available in the Prospector.

Description

J


OK

saved, click

11.

S3

1

Object Status

g [^^liqnments

"S 0 Mission Ave-DataShare To be added g [3 Jeffries Ranch Rd-Data... To be added 2 Q Ascent PI-DataShare

To be added


I Hide already pubsssfted objects Pick n

drawing

Figure 6-21

12. You have now created shortcuts for the alignments. This means that if the shortcuts are in a shared network folder, anyone on the network has access to these Civil 3D objects.


/

Cancel HelpOK


Task 3 - Data-reference Data Shortcuts.

1. Open the file DAT1 -DataSharing.dwg.

2. In the Prospector tab, ensure that the Data Shortcuts points to the correct folder:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-DataSharing\Training Shortcuts\Ascent Phase 1

3. In the Prospector tab, under the Data Shortcuts collection, expand the Surfaces collection (if not already expanded) and expand the Alignments->Centerline Alignments collection, as shown in Figure 6-22.

Master View B Cj Open Drawings

j S i O DATl-DataSharing-Alignment

f O DATl-DataShanng-surface j

©-D Drawing2

S"|?1 Data Shortcuts [CACivil 3D Projects\Civil3D-traimng-DataSharing\Training Shortcuts\Ascent Phasel] i C

<-B Surfaces 3 I I i-(i0 Existing-Site-DataShare ExRoad-DataShare ExTopo-DataShare

I 13 Centerline Alignments ^ ; *3 Ascent

PI-DataShare j I Jeffries Ranch Rd-

DataShare: Mission Ave-DataShare

; ; ;1 "2» Offset Alignments i" ^J Curb Return Alignments

Figure 6-22

4. Under the Surfaces collection, select the surface Existing-Site-DataShare, right-click, and select Create Reference, as shown in Figure 6-23.

[3 Data Shortcuts [CACivil 3D Projects\Crvil3D-training\Training SI

B Surfaces

!| ExRoad-DataShare

i CjHi ExTopo-DataShare a- -a Alignments

Ascent PI- DataShare lpffn« Ranr-h

Figure 6-23

6-38 © 2011, ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge®Exreting-Site-

^Create Reference... j

Open Source Drawing-

Promote

Remove


In the Create Surface Reference dialog box, you can rename the reference surface and assign a different surface and render style. Enter ExSurface for the Name, enter Data referenced surface for the Description, and enter Contours 5m and 25m (Background) for the Style, as shown in Figure 6-24. Click


Jfc, Create Surface Reference

Source surface: Existing -Site -DataShare

^ Style Contours 5m and 25m [Background; M

riendefflaJeBar'"" ^BySye^^

Figure 6-25


OK

Surface layer:

Properties □

Information

Value

Name

Descrption Data referenced surface

cOK

- (03<

2 Help


8. In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-DataSharing-Alignment, as shown in Figure 6-26.

9. In Model Space, select the Ascent PS referenced alignment. Notice that there are no grips; you are not able to geographically redefine this alignment. However, you can add labels using the contextual Ribbon.

10. In the contextual Ribbon > Labels & Tables panel, select Add Labels > Station/Offset - Fixed Point, as shown inFigure 6-27.

11. When prompted to select a point, select the center of the bulb of the cul-de-sac, as shown on the left in Figure 6-28. Select the label and move its location so that it is easier to read, as shown on the right. Note the station is 0+212.96.


Navigate Views

Figure 6-26

Figure 6-27



Figure 6-28


12. In the Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces and the ExSurface collections, as shown on the left in Figure 6-29. Notice that it does not contain the definition elements that you might otherwise see in a surface that is not data-referenced, as shown on the right. What this means is that you are not able to edit or make design changes to a referenced surface.

B Surface?;

' ' 0 ExSurface C^ Masks fy., Watersheds ± "3 Alignments £ Sites * JfO

P'pe Networks

Figure 6-29

© Surface!

B-

Existing-Site-DataShare

ti

Masks

a Watersheds

&Definition .

■T 0" ExRcad-Data Share

4 0" ExTcpo-DataShare

Save the drawing but do not close it.

Task 4 - Revise original referenced object.

In the Prospector tab, ensure that the Data Shortcuts points to the correct folder:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-DataSharing\Training Shortcuts\Ascent Phase 1

Ensure that the Master View is enabled in Toolspace so that you can see all the drawings that are loaded. Select Dat1-DataSharing-Alignment, right-click and select Switch to, as shown in Figure 6-30. Dat1-DataSharing-Alignment.dwg is now the current drawing. However, if you had closed the drawing, then open the drawing Datl -DataSharing-Alignment.dwg.

I Toolspace

I Master View

- | ____ 3 Open Drawings

DAT1 - DataS harinq


13.

DATl-DataSharing-Alignment )

Check in...


00 Projects - [3 Data Shortcuts [C:\Civil 3D Projects'

Figure 6-30

In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-DataSharing-Alignment.



4. You will now change the length of this alignment. In Model

Space, select the alignment, then select the grip that signifies the end of the alignment, and move it to the center of the cul-de-sac bulb, as shown in Figure 6-31.

A

0 Bi rd 2

Figure 6-31

From the contextual Ribbon > Modify panel, select Alignment Properties, as shown in Figure 6-32.

(g) V Surface ProfilenH ~~

("* i Profile ViewVisibility

Figure 6-32

In the Station Control tab of the Alignment Properties - Ascent PI-DataShare dialog box, set the reference point Station to 100, as shown in Figure 6-33. You receive a warning that changing the station will affect objects and data already created. Click

OK

to dismiss the warning. Next, click close the Alignment Properties dialog box.

Alignment Properties - Ascent PI-DataShare

Information Station Control :Masking | Design Criteria

Reference pont

X: Y:1906991.4731


View Output Manage Vault Express Tools

Design Superelevat.on

cC;tor Criteria editor

Modify

OK to

620770.0472


(Station:

* J

Figure 6-33

Save the drawing. This will cause the Data Shortcut to update.



8. If you are continuing with the drawing from the previous session, ensure that the Master view is enabled in the Toolspace so that you can see all the drawings that are loaded. Select Dat1-DataSharing, right-click, and select Switch to. Dat1-DataSharing.dwg is now the current drawing.

9. If you closed the drawing in the previous step, open the drawing DAT1 -DataSharing.dwg (move to Step 12).

10. At the bottom right corner of the application window, you receive a message that data shortcut definitions may have been changed. To synchronize your current drawing, select the Synchronize link in the balloon notification, as shown in Figure 6-34.

r.0 Data shortcut definitions may have changed X

References to data shortcut definitions may have changed and may require synchronization■vnchronize

Figure 6-34

Alternatively, in the Prospector tab, select the alignment Ascent PI-DataShare from the Alignments collection. Right-click and select Synchronize, as shown in Figure 6-35.

Alignments

I B-'

Offset Alignment: -x] Curb Return Alignments

Miscellaneous Alignments Sites

Pipe Networks Corridors

Delete...

Figure 6-35


11.

r Properties...

Move to Site...

Copy to Site...

(m m

promote

.££L ftr.


13. Notice that the alignment has updated geographic information, as shown in Figure 6-36. The end of alignment is at the center of the cul-de-sac bulb, and the station label is updated to reflect the change to the original alignment design.




Data Shortcuts Part III

In this practice you will create a transmittal package to send to other design professionals on the project team.

1. Continue working with the previously opened drawing DAT1 -DataSharing.dwg.

2. Select Application Menu flk > Publish > eTransmit, asshown in Figure 6-37. If a V\ferning dia'^n ^r>v npens stating that the current drawing is not saved, click Yes to save it.

Figure 6-37

3. In the eTransmit dialog box, click shown in Figure 6-38.


Practice Sc

Se&cfcSB

^ New ►Share the drawing

Send to 3D Print ServiceSend solid objects and watertightmeshes to a 3D print service.

P~7 °Ptrl *

H-savtAs '

Export ►

Publish ►

J\ ArchivePackage the current sheet set files for »

archive.

eTransmit Create a package of drawing files and their dependencies.

EmailSend the current drawing file as an email attachment

0

Traromttai Setups , as

I Create Transmittal Current Drawtrg(s)files Tree Fiies Table

- Curort Drawng

3 fl DATl-OataSharlngrfcrg

ffi JPEG rase

S-£b External Rdtmncet

S i, Civil 30 Deperde-ae?

Indufted 11 fHefs), 59G7KB | Add He

Figure 6-38

£ Current user MaiSelect a transmittal setup

Setup description

Tfansnfiai Setups...


4. In the Transmittal Setups dialog box, select the Standard setup and

click, as shown in Figure 6-39.

Transmittal Setups

I } Current user: Ma!

~~ :v '"Mmm^ESzMjm^h. [

ftsnair,*

3>Figure 6-39

5. In the Modify Transmittal Setup dialog box, accept theTransmittal file folder. Select Prompt for a

filename from the Transmittal file name drop-down list and select the Keep files and folders as is option. In the Include options section, select all of the options, as shown in Figure 6-40. Accept the remaining


fa Modify Transmittal Setup

Current user. MaiCurrent transmittal Standard

TransmBal type and location Transmittal package type3pf.ap)

File format

Keep existiig drawsig fSe formats

Maintain visual fidelity for armotahve objects i

TransmBal file folder_______________

C:\Dvil 3D Projects\Qvil3D-trartng-DataShanng\ Trairtng

Transmttal file name:

CLftompt for a filename

DATI-DataSharaig - Standards

Path optionsUse orgarized folder structure Source root folder.

Place aB files in one folder Q Keep files

and folders as i^^

^nclud^ption^^ 0 Include fonts!Vj Include textures from materials m Include files from data links J Include photometric web files V Include unloaded file references

^^MMMHMH^HHIiMMMHM^

Transmittal setup description:


Modify..

Modtfy..

OKdefaults and click

lnwiSSmpJ

Actions

O Send e-mad with

transmittal

□ Set defaut plotterto

hone' Bind external

references

0> Bine

Insert

□ Prompt for password PI

Purge drawings3(! V.

£

:C '.CM 3D Praje«s\Qvil3DifaMng-D3!sShar,rsg' Trar


Cancel

Figure 6-40


OK

Heip


6. Close the Transmittal Setups dialog box.

7. Click -------—----! to close the Create Transmittal dialog box andcreate the transmittal.

8. When prompted for the file name for the transmittal file, accept the default and save it. AutoCAD Civil 3D will proceed to create a compressed file of all the relevant data.



Review Questions

How can you edit an object referenced through Data Shortcuts?

Using Data Shortcuts is similar to using Vault, but what are the two things that Vault does that Data Shortcuts do not?

What is the file format that Data Shortcuts use to share design data between drawing files?

What is a Data Shortcut Update Notification?

During a drawing session, if the referenced data has been revised, how are you notified?


Question 1

Question 2

Question 3

Question 4

Question 5


Section 3: Autodesk Vault6.4 Autodesk Vault Overview........................................................6-34

6.5 Using the Vault Client..............................................................6-42

Vault Client............................................................................... 6-46Task 1: Log into the Vault Client............................................... 6-46

Setting up the Vault - Part I.................................................... S-48Task 1: Configure Vault Database for AutoCAD Civil 3D... 6-48Task 2: Set up the Vault Working folder.....................................6-49Task 3: Set up new vault project folders....................................6-51Task 4: Set the active project.....................................................6-52

Working with Vault - Part II..................................................... 6-53Task 1: Set up Vault project...................................................... 6-53Task 2: Check data into the Vault..............................................6-53Task 3: Check data out of the Vault...........................................6-56Task 4: Revise original referenced object..................................6-60



6.4 Autodesk Vault Overview

Autodesk® Vault program is a flexible data management applicationintegrated with your Autodesk® software that optimizes your investment in design data. Autodesk Vault program helps design teams organize and reuse designs by consolidating project information and reducing the need to recreate designs from scratch. Users can store and search both CAD data (such as AutoCAD drawings and Autodesk DWF files) and non-CAD data (such as Microsoft Word and Excel files, as well as image files). When files are



added to the vault, a copy is made of each file and included in the vault. These files become the "master" and the original files on your local machine become copies of the master files maintained by the vault. In addition, when files are added, information (also referred to as metadata) about the files is saved in the Microsoft SQL Server database and the physical files are copied to the vault file store.

The Autodesk Vault file store saves the files in a semi-proprietary format. Each time you check in a new version, a version of that file is saved to the file store. This enables Autodesk Vault to maintain a version history of changes.



The Autodesk Vault program has two components: 1) the Autodesk Data Management Server (ADMS) and 2) the Vault Client. The Vault Client is the component that is used to access information stored in the ADMS. Vault will protect data as well as track changes that are made throughout the design process.

AutoCAD® Civil 3D® Vanilla Vault 2012, when installed with AutoCAD Civil 3D software,2012 no longer includes provides the same functionality as found in AutoCAD and other the Autodesk Vault AutoCAD-based vertical applications. All Vault check-in, check-out,installation. and administrative commands will be accessed through the standard

Vault Ribbon tab and through AutoCAD Xref Manager.

Autodesk Vault 2012 program no longer includes integration



with AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012 data shortcuts and AutoCAD Civil 3D projects. The Project node is not exposed on the AutoCAD Civil 3D Prospector tab. This additional functionality as well as further enhanced project interoperability is now provided withAutodesk® Vault Workgroup, Autodesk® Vault Collaboration, andAutodesk® Vault Professional.

Data

Management

A means of organizing and tracking files through the design process.

Autodesk DataManagementServer(ADMS)

Server component that manages the database and file store of Autodesk Vault.



Clients Applications that access the Autodesk Data Management Server. These include the Autodesk Vault Client, the Civil 3D Add-in, and the Microsoft Office Add-in.

AutodeskVaultExplorer

Standalone client for Autodesk Vault used to organize vaulted information. Can also be used to manage any file in the Vault.

Microsoft® Internet Information Services (IIS)

A Microsoft® Web server necessary for the Autodesk Data Management Server to communicate with the client systems.

Vault The combination of a database and a file store. Each installation of the ADMS can manage several independent vaults. A single user can have connections to several vaults, but not simultaneously.

Vault Manager

Application used by administrators for creating vaults, backing up and restoring data, and adding users and controlling their permissions.




Key Terms


The Autodesk Data Management Server and the Vault Client make up the primary components of Autodesk Vault. Figure 6-41 illustrates a basic setup of the vault. You can have two types of configurations: Single Site or Multiple Sites. The configuration used will depend on the type of requirements and the structure of the design team.

Single Site

You can configure Autodesk Vault software for a single office site, as shown in Figure 6-41.

The simplest way to organize your projects with Autodesk Vault software is to use a single vault to store all projects and their information. All team members have access to this one location; you set up access control and user names only once. A single vault keeps project data centralized and easier to manage.


Vault Architecture Vault Client A

Main Vault Site

Vault Client BFigure 6-41


Multiple Sites

Autodesk Vault can also manage project data for users at multiple sites as if they were all working in the same office, as shown in Figure 6-42. This capability is provided by a multi-site option, available with Autodesk Vault at an extra cost.

Autodesk Vault has the ability to create and manage multiple vaults. A vault is a separate storage repository, similar to having multiple hard drives on a computer. Using multiple vaults right from the beginning is recommended for large organizations with several departments that use AutoCAD Civil 3D independently. Each department-such as the survey, site, or highway departments-has its own vault. This structure makes it easier to separately manage departmental permissions and project access.


Vault Client AMain Vault Site

Vaurt Client B

Vault Client C

Vault Client DFigure 6-42


Each vault can have a separate system administrator, and users can be granted access to only one vault, if necessary. If some users need access to multiple vaults, you must configure their permissions separately for each vault. Also note that users cannot log into more than one vault at a time.

Benefits of Using Multiple Vaults

The following are some of the benefits of using more than one vault:

° One of the best reasons for multiple vaults is to provide training areas where users can feel free to experiment without interfering with the production or main vault. You can even create a new vault for each user for training purposes, deleting them when they are finished.

• For companies that specialize in engineering consulting, it might be useful to create a separate vault for each customer you work with. This enables you to keep templates, standards, and project information separate and isolated. - You can support different departments within your group. If you have multiple teams that work on separate projects and do not need to share data, multiple vaults might help.

Disadvantage of Using Multiple Vauits

The most important thing to remember when working with multiple vaults is that the data is completely separate and can never be merged. The only way to combine two or more vaults is to remove data from one vault and manually add it to the other, resolving any conflicts that might occur.

Sharing Vault Projects

Vault projects can be packaged and shared with other project team members who do not have access to your vault. Multiple options are available for sharing files. One way is through the Pack and Go feature in the Vault Explorer. Another way is by creating a ZIP file through the Prospector tab within AutoCAD Civil 3D program. With a ZIP file, the project can be imported into another vault. Projects that used Data Shortcuts can also be imported into a vault project. Any broken references are detected and resolved after all drawings have been added to the vault.



Working Folders

When working on a project using Vault, a copy of the file is saved in the working folder. This is where AutoCAD Civil 3D program will make changes to the data. When changes and updates are completed, the user has to push the data up to Vault to ensure that Vault has the most current data. This working folder is essentially a scratch pad that is used when working with the files.

You can use one of three workflows, each with its pros and cons, to specify where this scratch pad or working folder exists. The three workflows are Local Working Folder, Individual Network Working Folder and Shared Network Working Folder.

Local Working Folder: With this workflow, the working folder resides on the local machine. This process allows team members to work offline outside of the network connection. Once changes are completed, the user can connect to the network and push the updated files to Vault. This setup also minimizes network traffic. However, network traffic occurs only when files are checked in or checked out. The disadvantage is that local workstations are seldom on a company backup process. This means that the user must be diligent in ensuring that important data is pushed back up to Vault, as it is on a regular backup plan.

Shared Network Working Folder: With this workflow, multiple users share a single working folder on the network. This setup is similar to the current configurations within most companies. Drawing and other data files are saved on a shared network drive. As the shared working folder is on the network, it is also


Figure 6-43 illustrates the Local V\forking Folder workflow.


on a regular backup plan. Another benefit to this type of configuration is that drawings with data references or external references are notified and updated every time they are saved, rather than only when they are checked back into the vault, as with the Local Working Folder option. As the working folder is a replication of the project files, accidental changes can occur more easily when users work with files in the same set of folders. Figure 6—44 illustrates the Shared Network Working Folder workflow.

Individual Network Working Folder: This is a hybrid of the twoprevious configurations. A working folder is set up on the network for each user. By maintaining individual working folders on the server, you protect each user's work-in-progress from changes by other users. Locating these folders on the server allows for nightly backup of the data.

The disadvantage to having individual working folders on the server is the increase in network traffic. Additionally, backups of the user working folders will have a lot more data than you really need, because you may back up multiple copies of the same files in each folder. Vault also contains a master updated copy of all the data.



8.S Using the Vault Client

Vault Shortcuts are managed through the Master View in the Prospector tab in the Toolspace under the Projects tree. The shortcuts are stored in the Autodesk Data Management System (ADMS) within a folder structure that you create. This enables you to use the same folder structure that you have been using in Land Desktop or other project-oriented programs.

Status Symbols in Civil 3D Toolspace

Once you have logged into Autodesk Vault software, you see something similar to Figure 6-46. If you are not

sure of the status of the files, you can hover your cursor over the icon and AutoCAD Civil 3D program will display a tool tip indicating the status of the file.


Figure 6-45 illustrates the Individual Network Working Folder workflow.


il Master View v

. . . .......... - -. . . . - - - Open Drawings

IS / Wolfhili_Editing

£; Drawing2 Points

Point Groups ^ Surfaces

f§9 Sites

fls Tf Pipe Networks ^ Corridors

Assemblies

S3 Subassemblies ®

TSF Survey a- IS

Projects B & Vault

^ Drawings

65 % Wolfhill_Editing.dwg

<S> Q Points

Alignments #

Surfaces

?« Pipe Networks

,„ f^ Survey Database

Figure 6-46

Autodesk Vault uses icons to indicate the status of files in the vault. The icons indicate if a file is checked out to another user, if you have a local copy, if your local copy is up to date, and so on. A circular icon always indicates that a local copy of the file is on your computer. The following table describes the icons in the Autodesk Vault browser.

If no icon is displayed, the drawing is not currently in an the vault project.

1 File has attachments. Expand to see what files are attached.

V

(White "I")

One or more referenced objects are out of date and need to be synchronized with the project.

(White Circle)

File is in the vault and available to be checked out. The version in your working folder is the same as in the vault. Also referred to as the Latest Version.

Q(Green Circle)

File is in the vault and available to be checked out, but the local version is newer than the latest version in the vault. This typically means the local file was changed without checking it out. If you want to save these changes, check the file out with the Get Latest Version option not selected.



•(Red Circle)

File is in the vault and available to be checked out, but the local copy is out of date. Get the latest version from the vault.

%(White Circle)

File is checked out to you and the local version is the same as in the vault. Also referred to as the Latest Version.

0

(Green Circle)

File is checked out to you and the local copy is newer than the latest version in the vault. This typically means that you made changes to the file since it was checked out but have not checked it back in.

©(Red Circle)

File is checked out to you and the local copy is older than the latest version in the vault. This typically means that you started with a version that was older than the latest version, and then checked it out to promote it to the latest.

No Icon File is not present in the vault and needs to be added.

X(White Circle)

File is checked out by someone else and the local copy is the same as in the vault. Also referred to as the Latest Version. This typically happens if the other user did not check changes back into the vault.

0(Green Circle)

File is checked out to someone else, but the local copy is newer than the latest version in the vault. This typically happens if the other user checked changes into the vault, but kept the file checked out.

o

(Red Circle)

File is checked out to someone else, but the local copy is older than the latest version in the vault.



Autodesk Vault WorkflowIn the Master view of the Prospector tab, right-click on Projects and select Set the Working Folder...,

In the Prospector tab, right-click on Projects and select Log-In to Vault. Click Log In if a second screen is displayed. Type your user name and password and set the Server and Database, as shown in Figure 6—47.



ta Log In

0

Figure 6-47

3. In the Prospector tab, right-click on Projects again and select New... to create a new project.

4. Create or import the data you want to share in the source drawing and save it in the current working folder under the correct project folder.

5. In the Prospector tab, right-click on the drawing name and select Add to Project.

6. Select all of the items you want to share, such as surfaces, alignments, or

profiles, and click ---------------------—----7. Save the source drawing (and close as needed).

8. Open or create the drawing to receive the data in the vault. Expand the Project tree and relevant object trees (Surfaces, Alignments, Pipe Networks, or View Frame Groups).

9. Select an item to be referenced, right-click, and select Create Reference.... Repeat for all objects as needed. You are prompted for the styles and other settings that are required to display the object in the current drawing.


AdministratorUser Name:

Password:

Server:

Database:

localhost

GD

vault v

□ Automatically log In next session

□ Windows Authentication

Cancel HelpOK


Advantages of Vault

• This robust database management system provides user security, data integrity protection, version control, and backup and restore functionality.

• Vault facilitates design collaboration among large teams and it is scalable when a team grows.

• Vault incorporates new features from Autodesk and Microsoft as they become available with software upgrades.

- Vault manages shared objects when checking a drawing into the database.• You can use project templates when creating projects in Vault.• An optional multi-site Vault feature supports the sharing of individual vaults by

workgroups in separate geographical locations. This feature supports the same data management and backup functionality that Vault provides on a local network.

Limitations of Vault

• Vault requires at least double the disk space needed by other project management systems, because all files exist both in the Vault file store and in one or more external working folders.

• It requires ongoing server administration activities.



Vault Client

In this practice you will begin by logging into the vault client. Task 1 - Log into

the Vault Client.

1. Create a new drawing, as shown in Figure 6-48, using the C3D Training.dwt template from one of the following folders:

Metric:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-M\Templates Imperial:


a e l Create a new

drawing<p

N - > frja* Drawing \If^jjl Starts a rew drawing with a se ected I V35"^ Cfavrlna template t i

Open ► j

W Save Sheet SetC'eates i sr*x>: se. cats fi e tra: manages

Figure 6-48

In the Ribbon, Vault tab > Access panel, click the Log In button, as shown in Figure 6-49.

r&*oCAD CM! 3D 2012W

Home Insert Annotate Modify Analyze View Output Manage Help Online Add-Ins

What is New

0 HelP

File Status

Figure 6-49


2.

Practice 6d

Express Tools

Vault

Goto^LoglnJ Open Vault

.Hecx Lhectc

HelpAccess "


3. If you are logging into a training vault server, enter theinformation provided to you by the instructor. If you are logging into a local vault, enter Administrator for the User Name. There is no password. The Server is localhost and the Database is Vault, as shown in Figure 6-50.

Administrator

test-pc Vault

F Automatically log in next session [[ Windows Authentication

ED

Figure 6-50

4. At the Command Line, you will see the following message: User 'Administrator" has successfully logged into the Vault. You will also notice that previous commands that were grayed out are now enabled, as shown in Figure 6-51.

Home Insert Annotate Modify Analyze View Output Manage Help Online Add-lns

|H=| Vault OptionsLog Out Open Attach

Access


in Login

User

Name:

Password:

Sen/en

Database:

•GD

OK Cancel Help

mGoto Vault

Vault

What is New

H] Help

Help

Che

ck

In


File Status

Figure 6-51



Setting up the Vault - Part I

In this practice you will learn the steps of creating project-based data Vault folders.

Task 1 - Configure Vault Database for AutoCAD Civil 3D.

The following procedure is necessary only if the vault administrator has not configured the vault database to work with AutoCAD Civil 3D:

Start the Autodesk Data Management Server Console, by

clicking the command icon on the window's desktop SiA.

In the Log In dialog, you must log in as a user with the Administrator role. Enter the administrator password and click OK, as shown in Figure 6-52.

Log Tn User Name: Password:

i Windows Authentication

Cancel

Figure 6-52

In Autodesk Data Management Server Console window, expand the Vault collection. Select the vault database in the AutoCAD Civil 3D Prospector tree. Right-click the database and click Import Configuration, as shown in Figure 6-53.

: File Tools Actions Help

b 0 test-pc onvjute


Practice 6e

1.

2.

53

idrnimstrator

OK Help

3.

Move File Store-

Detach... fielete...

Purge...

Re-Index Properties-

Defragment Database

Migrate... Content Indexing

Service- Export Configuration...

^mportConfiguration.!^ M VauK

Enabled

□ffi CD Manage ffi @

Workgrc


Figure 6-53



4. In the Open Configuration File dialog box, navigate to Vault server install folder location and select the file Civil3D_Vault_Configuration.cfg, as shown in Figure 6-54. Click Open.

< ^wjuimmmwwhmm^^Organize New folder

' Name Date modifiedLibraries

' en-US___________________________ 6.2 '201111:51 AM- Documents y ........ 111 1

C Civil3D Vault Configuration.cfg J 2/9/20115:04 PM Ji Music > «- "

Figure 6-54

5. The Data Management Server console will report that the configuration was successfully created. Close the message dialog box and close the Server Console dialog box. The Vault Database is now configured for AutoCAD Civil 3D.

Task 2 - Set up the Vault Working folder.

By setting a new working folder, you are setting the location to store Vault projects. The default working folder for Vault projects is C:\Civil 3D Projects.

1. If you do not already have an active drawing, create a newdrawing, as shown in Figure 6-55, using the C3D Training.dwt template from one of the following folders:

Metric:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-M\Templates Imperial:



Sheet SetCreates a sneer se: Cata fi e tra: manages

Figure 6-55


2. In the Prospector tab, ensure that the master view is set, right-click on Projects and select Set Working Folder..., as shown in Figure 6-56.

i Toolspace

I! |-l|Topl|2D

Q iis m

[Master View J O

0-Q Open Drawings at Q.

* -P) D rawing 1 CL

Data Shortcuts [C: New...

I - a Surfaces Properties.. ? j S)-^ Alignments ^ , i i ~~~Tii ^ * " Ss Pipe Networks ...

r -i . r _ Import From...

; -Pq View Frame Gr,L i—_ , , Select Projects to Display... : SB - M Drawing Templati ' r

Manage Prompts...

Autodesk Vault...

Figure 6-56

3. In the Browse For Folder dialog box, select the C:/Civil 3D Projects/Civil3D-training-DataSharing folder and click

Make New FojdgJ^ as Shown on the left in Figure 6-57. Enter

Training Vault as the folder name and click --------—-----J, to closethe dialog box.

Browse For Folder

Set Worlong Folder

Figure 6-57


03c985d7400208c60cSe2a01 *

Civil 3D Project Templates

* Civil 3D Projects

CiviBD-training-DataSharincj^^ _i> .je Training Shortcuts -

if

v j Training Vault Drawing

J, CiviBD-training-Geomatics

t Jft Civil3D-training-I

C iviRD-traininn-M

Make New Folder J} OK j |_Cancel


Task 3 - Set up new vault project folders.

In this task you will create two new folders for storing a set of related project drawings and Vault references. Create a folder name that reflects the project name, and specify whether or not to use a project template to organize your data.


2. In the Prospector tab, right-click on Projects and select New..., as shown in Figure 6-58.

aQ'© ® Data Shortcu fjf' ESj Drawing Terr

Projects

Figure 6-58

3. In the New Project dialog box, set the Name to Ascent Phase 1 and select the Use project template option, as shown in Figure 6-59. The template is in the default folder C:\Civil 3D Templates. Civil 3D will replicate this template folder structure in

Use project template

cfC: \Civil 3D Project Templates^*


Set Workina Folder,

the Vault project folder. Click

OK

Description:



Figure 6-59


Project template:


4. Create another new Project. In the Prospector tab, right-click on Projects and select New.

5. In the New Project dialog box, set the Name to Ascent Phase 2

and select the Use project template option. Click - -—---- toclose the dialog box.

6. You now have two projects in the working folder, as shown in Figure 6-60, as well as in the vault.

Projects JHMI^H j Ep- jjQ Ascent

Phase 2 j S-ftQ Ascent Phasel (± ■0 Data

Shortcuts [C:\Civil 3D Pn

Figure 6-60

Task 4 - Set the active project.

In this task you will set the active project for vault.


2. In the Prospector tab, right-click on project Ascent Phase 1 and select Set Active, as shown in Figure 6-61. This makes the project active. The active project will be in bold lettering.



Practice 6f Working with Vault - Part II

In this practice you will walk through steps of creating a project-based Vault workflow.

Task 1 - Set up Vault project.

Set a new working folder as the location to store Vault projects. The default working folder for Vault projects is C:\Civil 3D Projects.

1.

Open the file DAT1-DataSharing-surface.dwg from one of the following folders:

Metric:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-M\Training Vault Drawing

Imperial:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-l\Training Vault Drawing

2.

If not already logged in, log into the vault server (see Vault Client - Task 1 - Logging into Vault).


Projects j i-0Q Ascent Phase 2 1Mhllgl Ai-cer.t Phase ^mmm^mk ...

» 1

■t Data Shortcuts [C:\Civil ■ Set Active

[£•• Eg Drawing Templates

Export to ZIP file...

Figure 6-61


3.

If not already set, set the working folder. In the Prospector tab, select Project, right-click, and select Set Working Folder. Set the working folder to C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-DataSharing\Training Vault.

4.

If the Ascent Phase 1 project is not already active, set it as the active project. In the Prospector tab, expand the Projects collection, select the project Ascent Phase 1, right-click, and select Set active.

Task 2 - Check data into the Vault.

1.

Continue working with the drawing from the previous task or open the file DAT1-DataSharing-surface.dwg from the following folder:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-Training DataSharing\Training Vault Drawing



In the Prospector tab, you will notice the symbol, which indicates that this drawing has not been checked into the vault. Select the drawing, right-click, and select Check in, as shown in Figure 6-62.

- O Open Drawings g-7 ..................................................................

Points close

Point Groups © Point CloudsSurfaces Export LandXML...

Figure 6-62

In the Add To Project dialog box, select Ascent Phase 1, as

shown in Figure 6-63, and clickNext >

Add to Project

Select a project.Select a project to add the drawing to.

jC Ascent Ph*se 1gO Ascent Phase 2

Figure 6-63

On the Select a drawing location screen, select the Production

Drawings folder, as shown in Figure 6-64, and clickNext >

Add to Project

Select a drawing tocatioA.upBonaSy seiet^ a location for the dravwig. You can dfck an exsang folder or the button on the nght to create a ner.- one.

Select a location folder:E gO Ascent Phase 1

B- CS Drawings

G3> Documents

External References

DGN E>

DWF & DWG i fih Imian-

Production Dr

Figure 6-64


4.


5. On the Drawing file dependencies screen, clear the Keep files checked out option, since you want to close this drawing as soon as you check it into the vault. Set the DWF publishing options to Do not create, as shown in Figure 6-65. In the

Project Files section, select all of the files and click

Add to Project

Drawing file dependencies.Confirm file dependencies and DWF creation. Selected files wiE be added to the project. Deselect a file to keep it out of the project.

DWF publishing opbons: ^Do

Project P'les0 Production Drawings

QjEL ________________________________' 0 Original.Dwg

[ I Q 0 Base-Proposed Engineering.dwg I

Figure 6-65

6. On the Share data screen, select all of the listed surfaces, as shown in Figure 6-66, so that all surfaces are accessible

to the

to complete the process and close

Add to Project Share data.

Selected objects wS be accessible to other users -Aithin the project.

Description

f C i(2) 0 Existing-Site-Data... To be added C> 0 ExRoad-DataShare To be added -■- 0 ExTopo-DataShare To be added

Figure 6-66

7. A number of things have happened. The drawing has been checked into the vault using the appropriate folder structure, surfaces have been checked into the vault, and you have exited the drawing.

8. Open the file DAT1 -DataSharing-Alignment.dwg


Next >

3>

Keep files checked out;

J Do not. create

0 ATI - OataShs rrrsg-surface^iwg

Finish

project team. Click the dialog box.


9. As in steps 2 through 7 above, you will check in this drawing as well as the alignments.

10. In the Prospector tab, notice the ? symbol, which indicates that this drawing has not been checked into the vault. Select the drawing, right-click, and select the Check in.


composite surface

of... Description

Surfacefrom Ex Topo..


11. In the Add To Project dialog box, select Ascent Phase 1

and click ' Next> I.

12. On the Select a drawing location screen, select Production

Drawings and click . ~^xt> .13. On the Drawing file dependencies screen, clear the Keep

files checked out option, since you want to close this drawing as soon as you check it into the Vault. Set the DWF publishing options to Do not create. In the Project Files section, select all of

the files and click Next> .

14. On the Share data screen, select all of the listed alignments so that all alignments are accessible to the project team. Click

—— to complete the process and close the dialog box.

Task 3 - Check data out of the Vault.

1. This session assumes that you have completed Task 1 - Set up Vault Project and Task 2 - Check data into the Vault.

2. Open the file DAT1 -DataSharing.dwg

3. In the Prospector tab, expand the Projects collection, expand the Ascent Phase 1 collection, and expand the Alignments and Surfaces collections, as shown in Figure 6-67.

Projects | (tQ

Ascent Phase 1

03" Lq Drawings

| | O Points

B-"I5 Alignments

Eh "15 Centerline Alignments | j l-OO Ascent PI-DataShare

r "D O Jeffries Ranch Rd-DataShare 1

j ! 15 O Mission Ave-DataShare

!-■• Offset Alignments j— Curb

Return Alignments Miscellaneous

Alignments Surfaces

; O Existing-Site-DataShare j-^O

ExRoad-DataShare |Q O ExTopo-

DataShare



!-■ Pipe Networks hJBO

Survey Database j View

Frame Groups

| Ascent Phase 2

Figure 6-67



4. Under the Surfaces collection, the symbol (hollow circle) indicates that the surface is available to be checked out. Right-click on the surface Existing-Site-DataShare and select Create Reference..., as shown in Figure 6-68.

5. In the Create Surface Reference dialog box, you can

give the reference surface a different name and assign a different style. Enter ExSurface for the Name, enter Vault Data referenced surface for the Description, and enter Contours 5m and 25m (Background) for the Style, as shown in Figure 6-69. Click


Create Surface Reference Soixce surface: Surface layer:Existing-Site-OataShare C-TOPO

Properties Value

f 'lame ExSurface

I Description Vault Data referenced surface

\_Styte Contours 5m and 25m (Background) J

ranSSTHHISP"

Figure 6-69

6. In this step, you will create a data reference to the alignment. In the Alignments collection, right-click on Ascent PI-DataShare and select Create Reference....


Open source drawing (read--

Check out source drawing...

Figure 6-68

(2) Surfaces

j- r> :■ ESSj- ! ExP.oad-DataSh ■-£) O ExTopo-DataSh Pipe

Networks^uniMr riatahace

OK


7. In the Create Alignment Reference dialog box, accept the default value in the Name field. Enter Data referenced alignment for the Description. Set the Alignment style to Layout, and set the Alignment label set to Major and Minor only, as shown in

Figure 6-70. Click 0K when you are finished.

Jfc, Create Alignment Reference

Source alanment: Ascent PI-DataShare

® <ftone> - \C3 -'I

(Ascent Pi-DataShare^

CDaffl?tinrii ^>ata referenced alignment J

Atgnroent style: O Layout^Mwmhhmhmmm^MWMIM^Âignment layer:

C-ROAD Atgnment label set:îjE Major and Wnor oriy^ ▼ [jj^j

OK Cancel | | Help j

Figure 6-70

8. In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-DataSharing-A)ignment, as shown in Figure 6-71.

^BC3âtaShann^ligni^ Previous View k- Orbit • ©Top

- ^ views ^

^ Extents ' Bottom . |£ Navigate Views —

Figure 6-71



10. In the contextual Ribbon > Labels & Tables panel, select Add Labels > Station/Offset - Fixed Point, as shown in Figure 6-72.

11. When prompted to select a point, select the center of the bulb of the cul-de-sac, as shown on the left in Figure 6-73. Select the label and move its location so that it is easier to read, as shown on the right. Note the station value is 0+212.96.

UcsFigure 6-73

In the Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces collection, and expand the ExSurface collection, as shown on the left in


n n m

S)

n

Add

Acd Renumber Inquiry

Labels*

Tables * Tags

Add Align-nen: Labels ;ener

Add/Edit Station Labels

^^ Station/Offset - Fixed Point^ =

Figure 6-72

12.


Figure 6-74. Notice that it does not contain the definition collection that you might otherwise see in a surface that is not data-referenced, as shown on the right. This means that you are not able to edit or make design changes to a referenced surface.

£3- Surfaces

S- & 0 ExSurface Masks

Watersheds

5 Alignments Sites

Pipe Networks

•)•■ Surfaces

S- 7 Existing-Site-DataShare d~= Masks Watersheds ! ® Definition ©■■ ExRoad-

DataShare

ExTopo-DataShare

Figure 6-74



13. You can check this drawing back into the vault (see Task 2 - Check in data into Vault, steps 2-7). If you do check the drawing back into the vault, remember to keep the drawing checked out.

14. Alternatively, you can save the drawing, but do not close it.

Task 4 - Revise original referenced object.

In this task, you continue from the previous session and make edits to the alignment. If you closed the drawing, you will first have to check out the drawing.

1. In Task 2 - Check data into the Vault, step 8, you opened the drawing DAT1-DataSharing-Alignment.dwg. if this drawing is now closed, you will have to open the drawing as described in step 2 below.

2. You can use one of two methods to open the source drawing to make edits to the shared object data. Use either method (a) or method (b), but not both.

• (a) In the Prospector tab, under the project Ascent Phase 1, in the Alignments collection, select Ascent PI-DataShare, right-click, and select Check out source drawing..., as shown in Figure 6-75.

• (b) In the Prospecfortab, under the project Ascent Phase 1, in the Drawings collection, then in the Production Drawings collection, select DAT1-DataSharing-Alignment, right-click, and select Check out..., as shown in Figure 6-76.

| i $ Co Drawings

US' Documents is External References i? ■ &

Production Drawings I Sr Original.Dwg j - Q O

DATl-DataShanng-surface.dwg

j | j | L DC DATl-DataSKanng-Alignment... r Reports Open

(read-only)

Efc £3> Source Dr; ^ Checkout...^: i I nFigure 6-76


i B- "Z5 Alignments ■■■■■■ uj ;-"3 0 Jeffries Ranch Rd-Dat£

Mission Ave-DataShar Ej- (j

Surfaces

| • • 0) Existing-Site-DataShar

Create Reference...

Open source drawing (read-only)

£Check out source drawing...^

Figure 6-75


3. In the Check Out Drawing dialog box, select the Include file dependencies and Get latest version options. In the Enter version comments section, enter Update Alignment start station and end station location, as shown in Figure 6-77.

^ Check Out Drawing

Indude file dependencies Get latest version

a 0 Ascent Phase 1

B-E> 0 Drawings

B' & 0 Production Drawings

D 0 DATl-DataSharing-Alignment.dwg ~ ■•£> 0 Original.Dwg

Co 0 Base-Proposed Engineering.dwg L Co 0 Base.dwg

Enter version comments:

| OK | | Cancel | | Help |

Figure 6-77

4. In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-DataSharing-Alignment.

5. You will now change the length of this alignment. In Model Space, select the alignment, then select the grip that signifies the end of the alignment. Move it to the center of the bulb of the cul-de-sac, as shown in Figure 6-78.


S3£ }

/ ! / Lot 10 Block 2 I

' i /

Figure 6-78


In the contextual Ribbon > Modify panel, select Alignment Properties, as shown in Figure 6-79.

Alignment Ascent Pf-DataShare j

Q f3 %[»j Profile View

Alignment Ceometry Design Superelevation Visibility _, Prooerties " I Editor Criteria Editor * Check ' Offset AUgr.men

Modify ▼ Analyze | Launc

Figure 6-79

7. In the Alignment Properties - Ascent PI-DataShare dialog box, enter 100 as the reference point in the Station field, as shown in Figure 6-80. You receive a warning that changing the station will

affect objects and data already created. Click '----— to

View Output Manage Vault Express Tools

dismiss the warning, and then click ------—to close theAlignment dialog box.

hk. Alignment Properties - Ascent PI-DataShare

Information staron Control |Mas*ng Design Criteria

Reference pom:

X; it

1906991-4781 620770.0472

rnj

Figure 6-80

8. Save the drawing. Just saving the drawing does not send the revised data to the vault. When exiting the drawing, you will receive the message: Do you want to check in your changes?

9. The correct way to exit a Vault drawing session is to check in the changes, and then exit the drawing. In the Prospector tab, select the drawing Dat1-DataSharing-Alignment, right-click, and select Check in..., as shown in Figure 6-81.




Master ViewOpen Drawings

Close

Points

[<s>] Point Groups C Check in... ^

© Point Clouds Undo check out-

\ £

Surfaces S"*0

Alignments

Sync to Project...

Figure 6-81


10. In the Check In Drawing dialog box, clear the Keep fileschecked out option on the Drawing file dependencies screen, as shown in Figure 6-82. You want to close this drawing as soon as you check it into the vault. Set the DWF publishing options: to Do not create. In the Project files section, select all of the files.

Once you've made the changes, click

Check In Drawing

Drawing fife dependencies.Confirm file dependencies and DWF creation. Selected files will be updated in the project. Deselect a file to prevent update or check tn.

^^ee^Zdiedced out^

Project Files

12? 0 Production Drawings

Q 0 DAH-DataSharing-Alignrr.ent.dwg

0 Original_Dwg|~EjElB«ed*gEQ 0 Base-Proposed Engineering.dwg

Figure 6-82

11. If you are continuing with the previous session, ensure that the Master view is enabled in the Prospector tab of the Toolspace, so that you can see all drawings that are open. SelectDat1-DataSharing.dwg, right-click, and select Switch to. Dat1 -DataSharing.dwg is now the current drawing.

12. Near the bottom right corner of the application window, in the Status section, you will see a message that data shortcut definitions may have changed. To synchronize your current drawing, select the Synchronize link in the balloon message, as shown in Figure 6-83.

O Data shortcut definitions may have changed

References to data shortcut definitions may have changed and may require synchronizationSynchronize

Figure 6-83


Finish

DWF publishing options:I Do not create

1


13. Alternatively, you can expand the Alignments collection in the Prospector tab. Select Ascent PI-DataShare, right-click, and select the Synchronize, as shown in Figure 6-84.

S-D Open Drawings

t o t ® DATl-DataShaiing i i- <§> Points

! -[<s>] Point Groups

j~.<g> Point Clouds |

Surfaces

S- Alignments | E "3 Centerline

Alignments

Ascent Pt-DataShsfeProperties-

Move to Site... Copy to Site...

^Synchronize

Figure 6-84

14. The alignment has the updated geographic information, as shown in Figure 6-85, with the end of the alignment now at the center of the cul-de-sac bulb. The station label has been updated to reflect this change to the original alignment design.


MB- ' a • v

Profi

!"[ij Profi (-ft Supe

Sam

•~5> Offset Align


15. Save and close the drawing.



Review Questions

What are the two components of Vault?

What are the two types of configurations in Vault Architecture?

What is a working folder?

How many different types of configurations for working folder locations are there, and what are the names of the configurations?


Question 1

Question 2

Question 3

Question 4

Module 9

Grading Level 1


Section 1: Grading Overview S Grading

Overview V Configuring AutoCAD Civil 3D

Grading

365-1

Section 1: Grading Overview9.1 Grading Overview.......................................................................9-4

9.2 Configuring AutoCAD Civil 3D Grading....................................9-8

Pond Grading Part I - Create Existing Site Conditions . 9-10Task 1: Create a feature line from surface................................. 9-10Task 2: Create a feature based on design elevations.................9-12Task 3: Create a feature line from Corridor.................................9-16

Pond Grading Part II................................................................ 9-20Task 1: Establish control feature lines (South End)................... 9-21Task 2: Establish control feature lines (North End).....................9-27Task 3: Create the pond outside rim feature line........................9-29

Grading the Proposed Pond................................................... 9-32Task 1: Create pond grading.......................................................9-32Task 2: Supplement the surface with feature lines.....................9-38

9.1 Grading Overview

366-1

AutoCAD® Civil 3D® grading makes use of objects called feature lines

and grading groups.

• Feature lines are complex, linear 3D objects that define a string of known elevations, such as the perimeter of a proposed pond.Feature lines can be created by converting AutoCAD® lines, arcs, or polylines. Grading feature lines can also be exported from Corridors through the Modify tab > Corridor panel > Feature Lines from Corridor command.

• Parcel lines double as feature lines, and can be edited directly through the feature line elevation editor. Parcel lines that exist within the extents of a grading group are also automatically added to the surface, even if they are at elevation 0. (You can avoid this by locating feature lines and parcels in separate sites.)

• The feature lines can be created from an alignment. They can also be dynamically linked to the alignment or corridor model

367-1

from which they are created.° AutoCAD Civil 3D software can calculate the position of one

feature line based on another, such as a pond bottom calculated at a certain slope and elevation below the perimeter. Distance, slope, and surface parameters used in solutions are assigned through grading criteria.

° Grading groups are collections of these solutions that form a contiguous whole, such as the detention pond shown in Figure 9-1.

368-1

Figure 9-1


• Feature lines and grading groups are organized by site, so that any feature lines added within the perimeter of a grading group (in the same site) are automatically added to the grading group.

The Feature Line contextual tab, as shown in Figure 9-2, contains commands to edit and modify feature lines. These commands include tools to edit feature line elevations and feature line geometry, such as

Break, Trim, Extend, and Fillet (which creates a true, three-dimensional curve).

The Create Feature Lines from Objects command is available through the Home tab > Create Design panel > Feature Line command, as shown in Figure 9-3.

J—MBBTiM Insert Annotate Modify Analyze View Output Manage V,

»Toolspace

|fiO|%; Q Iniort Survey Data O Parcel • t5 Alignment - ffe ■

| f e a t u r e Line - I V1

Profit? * Assem

0 S (f/ Surfaces •o t

1 Grading groups can be used to automatically generate AutoCAD Civil 3D surfaces. Tools are also available for calculating grading group volume, and adjusting grading groups to help balance cut and fill.

° Surfaces created from grading groups (as well as corridorsurfaces) appear in the Prospector and can be adjusted through normal surface editing tools, such as Add or Delete Surface Point or Swap Edge. These edits are maintained and dynamically reapplied if the grading group is adjusted.


Feature Line Contextual Tab

Figure 9-2

Grading Level 1

/ Create feature LinePalettes "" Create Ground Data ^

Assembly •

SS'

f^*/ Create feature Lines from Objects J

Create feature Lines from Alignment

(SI +\J Create feature Line from Corridor

Create feature Line from Stepped Offset


Parcel ' l5 Alignment "

ZJ feature Line - ^f Profile - 0

Grading - Corridor

Figure 9-3


The Grading Elevation Editor vista, as shown in Figure 9-4, enables you to add, modify, or vary the elevations of a feature line. The feature line data is

organized into rows, where one row lists the data for a particular vertex.

00

Station Elevation Length Grade Ahead Grade Back

A 0+00.00 60.000' 729.550'

0.00% 0.00%

A 7+29.55 60.000' 82.272' 0.00% 0.00%

A 8+11,82 60.000' 0.643' 0.00% 0.00%

8+12.47 60.000' 63.341' 0.00% 0.00%

A 8+75.81 60.000' 91.491' 0.00% 0.00%

A 9+67.30 60.000' 2.995' 0.00% 0.00%

A 9+70.29 60.000' 103.000'

0.00% 0.00%

Figure 9-^4

^ (Select a Feature Line Or Lot Line): Enables you to change the feature line that you are editing.

^ (Zoom to): Enables you to zoom in to a highlighted vertex.

V


Elevation Editor

I G& Q Gt tf C| <*> *j v d n a

d

Grading Level 1

- (Quick Profile): Creates a quick profile along the feature line.

ft(Raise/Lower): Raises or lowers all of the feature line vertices by the

elevation entered in the edit field on the right side.

Lr (Raise/Lower Incrementally): Raises or lowers the elevations by the elevation increment entered (the default is 1).

m(Set Increment): Enables you to set the increment value.

(Flatten Grade or Elevations): Enables you to flatten selected vertices to a specified grade or single elevation.

t_o

Green (Insert Elevation Point): Adds an elevation control to the feature line. Elevation points provide an elevation control without creating a whole new vertex. These points are Z-controls without X- or Y-components.

x tRed

V(Elevations

from Surface): Takes the elevations of all the vertices from the surface if no rows are selected. If a row is selected, it takes the surface elevation for just that vertex.


(Delete Elevation Point): Removes elevation points.

Grading Level 1

9.2 Configuring AutoCAD Civil 3D Grading

Grading Styles

Feature Line

Labels

Grading CriteriaA grading style defines how the grading solution appears on the screen. The components of a grading style include the grading marker (for selecting the grading solution), slope patterns, and the solution's layers and their properties.

Feature lines have their own family of labels, which can be accessed through the Annotate tab >

Add Labels panel > Feature Line > Add Feature Line Labels command (e.g., a label indicating grade and distance).

Grading methods (to a surface, at a certain distance and slope, etc.) are organized inside AutoCAD Civil 3D drawings as grading criteria. Criteria include the grading method, slope projection, and conflict resolution properties. The Grading Criteria dialog box is shown in Figure 9-6.

• The Grading Method properties define what you want to grade to. Targets can include a Surface, Elevation, Relative Elevations, or a Distance. If the method uses a distance, you have to specify a default distance. If the method is to a surface, you can specify whether it is only for cut or fill, for both cut and fill, or for a distance. Each setting changes the information the Grading Method needs to complete its task.

• The Slope Projection properties assign the format of the slope (e.g., slope or grade) and the default values when using the command.

• The Conflict Resolution properties define how to resolve problem areas such as internal corners that overlap.


jnjxjfll Grading Criteria - Grade to Distance

Information CriteriaParameter I Value

Lock i

B Grading MethodTarget Distance

Distance 10.000' aProtection Slooe

B Slope ProjectionFormat Slope aSlope 200.00:1 a

3 Conflict Resolution

Interior Corner Overlap Use Average Slops a

Figure 9-6


Grading CriteriaSet

Grading VolumesCriteria sets are collections of grading criteria that are helpful to group together for a specific task. For example, you could create different sets for residential or commercial site

grading, and so on. These sets (and the criteria within them) can be found in the Settings tab under the Grading collection.

In this course, you work only with the Basic criteria set provided in the default AutoCAD Civil 3D templates.

The Grading Volumes Tools toolbar, as shown in Figure 9-7, displays the volume for all or selected grading solutions in a group. One tool raises or lowers all of the members of a grading group by an incremental value. The icon at the far right forces the group or selected grading solution to determine which elevations it needs for balance. Balance is a design that creates as much excavation material as needed to fill in depressions in the design area.

• The volumes in the Grading Volume Tools toolbar are dynamically linked to the grading objects.

• Grading volumes change when editing one or all of the grading group objects.


I Grading Volume Tools ■■■mi

£>] If® I Entire Group <~ SelectionI c3 Q I 1.000'

Ci ¥

Cut: FiS: Net:

10.00 Cu. Yd. | 741.87 Cu. Yd. | Fill: 741.87 Cu. Yd.

|Group: LI

Figure 9-7

Grading Level 1

Pond Grading Part I - Feature Lines (Create Existing Site Conditions)

The first step in grading is to establish existing site conditions. In this practice you will define the perimeter of the pond using three methods to define a feature line:

• Feature line from Existing Surface• Feature line based on design data 8 Feature line from Corridor

Task 1 - Create a feature line from surface.


P^radfe© 9a


4. In the Home tab > Create Design panel, select Feature Line > Create Feature Lines from Objects, as shown in Figure 9-8.

5. When prompted to select the object, select the red polyline and press <Enter> when done

6. In the Create Feature Lines dialog box, select Site 1 for the site and select the Erase existing entities, Assign elevations, and Weed Points options in the Conversion options section, as shown in Figure 9-9. Accept all other defaults and click

----OK- - - - when done.

Conversion options 0

Erase existing entities

@ Assign elevations

[7j Weed ports

Figure 9-9

7. In the Assign Elevations dialog box, select the From surface option and in the drop-down list, select Existing -Site. Click to select the Insert intermediate grade break points, as shown in


I _>.. ... m Insert Annotate Modi >■ Anil,vi' Viev* Output Manage iFockpace

teN

J^ Import Survey Data ■ifi Parts • (5 Sureces • Create Ground Data ~

0 Parcel • Alignment • $ •

SFl©

%) FeatureLme -jVf Profile • & ■

0 i O t/ Create Feature tine

PaKttes *

Toolspace Create Feature bnes from Objects 1

-iA Create

Feature Lines from Alionment

Figure 9-8

Grading Level 1

Figure 9-10. Click —--------1 to accept the changes and closethe dialog box.

t. Assign ElevationsOptions

Bevation: 0.000m

FtOMgradngs

o From surface

Q F»stinq-Ste - jl 3J Insert intennerSate grade break points

| O K | [ Cancel | | Help |

a

Figure 9-10

1 Open GRD1 -A1 -Grading.dwg from one of the following folders:

Metric:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-M\Drawings\Grading

Imperial:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-l\Drawings\Grading



8. In the Weed Vertices dialog box, accept the

defaults and click , as shown in Figure 9-11.

Jjj. Weed Vertices

Weeding Factors

gj Angle 0.5000(d)

Hi Grade 0. 20%

g] Length 25.000' G^

Close Point Removal

gj 3D distance

0.100'

0 of 7 vertices will be weeded

OK Caned Help

.J

Figure 9-11

9. A feature line has been created for the north and west property lines of the site, with elevations matching the existing ground surface. Save the drawing.

Task 2 - Create a feature based on design elevations.

In this task you will create a feature line of the east perimeter of the

pond. The grades at the east perimeter of the pond are governed by

the rear grades of the lots or parcels.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous task or open GRD1-A2-Grading.dwg.

2. In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Grading-Feature2.

3. Based on the street grades and types of lots that are required (Walkout Basements), elevations for the east property line have been roughly calculated. The last pf7ties into the existing ground elevation that is controlled by Mission Avenue, as shown in Figure 9-12.


OK

t Weed Vertices

Weeding Factors

g Angle 0.5000(d)

Grade 0.20%

g Length 10.000m

Qose Pont Removal

Li

3D distance 0.100m

35 of 195 vertices wi be weeded

Cancel HelpOK

Grading Level 1

mdl

|pt7 50.153 [164

In the

Home tab > Create Design panel, select Fea

© 2011, ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge®9-15

[ pt5 55.0 [180.5'] I /________________________pt6 55.0 [180.5 1 ]

Figure 9-12

Vt//

Home


ture Line > Create Feature Line, as shown in Figure 9-13.

Insert Annotate Modify Analyze View Output Manage

E? S

0

S

u

r

f

a

c

e

s

*

P

a

l

e

t

t

e

s

~

C

r

e

a

9-32© 2011, ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge®

Grading Level 1

t

e

G

r

o

u

n

d

D

a

t

aV Future Une V » tf

E

Figure 9-13

5. In the Create Feature Lines dialog box, select Site 1 and accept

all other defa


Import Survey Data ^Parcel ffija!

# Poirts •

Is

Toolspace

7

Create Feature Line


ults. Click -----------------------------------—-----------------------------------to close the dialog box andstart creating the feat


Grading Level 1

ure line.

6. When prompted for the feature line poin



ts, select the end point Pt1, shown in Figure


Grading Level 1

9-12 above. When prompted to Specify elevation



or [surface] <0.000>: type 61.3m [201.1'] <Enter


Grading Level 1

>.

7. When prompted for the next point, select end point Pt



2, shown in Figure 9-12 above.

8. You are prompted to Specify


Grading Level 1

grade or [SLope/Elevation/Difference/SUrface/Transition] <0.00>:.



If the option is not set to accept elevations, type E <Enter>


Grading Level 1

to set the default as the elevation.



9. Once the option is set to accept elevations, you are prompt


Grading Level 1

ed to Specify elevation or [Grade/SLope/Difference/SUrfa



ce/ Transition] <61.300>. Type 57.3 m [188.0'] <Enter>. C


Grading Level 1

ontinue this process of selecting the end point and enterin



g the elevation for all points as shown in Figure 9-12 above


Grading Level 1

. When done entering the elevation for the last point, pt7, 5



0.153m [164.961'], press <Enter> to exit the command.


Grading Level 1

1.000m

10. In Model Space, select th


Station Elevation Length Grade Ahead

Grade Back

A 0+000.00 61.300m 24.647m

-16.23% 16.23%

A 0+024.65 57.300m 52.345m

-3.44% 3.44%

A 0+076.99 55.500m 44.224n -1.13% 1.13%

A 0+121.22 55.000m 48.021m

0.00% 0.00%

A 0+169.24 55.000m 10.90Sm

0.00% 0.00%

A 0+180.15 55.000m 60.325m

-8.03% 8.03%

A 0 +240.47 50.153m

Station Bevation Length Grade Ahead

Grade Back

A 0+00.00 201.100' 80.863" -16.20% 16.20%

A 0+80.86 188.000' 171.735"

-3.49% 3.49%

A 2+52.60 182.000' 145.091'

-1.03% 1.03%

A 3+97.69 180.500' 157.548'

0.00% 0.00%

A 5+55.24 180.500' 35.789' 0.00% 0.00%

A 5+91.03 180.500' 197.918'

-7.85% 7.85%

Jv

7+88.94 164.961'

Figure 9-15

12. Due to the grade difference between Jeffries Ranch Rd and the adjacent lot grade, the start of the feature line must be adjusted to show a 1:1 slope.

o. x a o e§

& ^ *i y A i


e back of lot feature line and in the contextu


Grading Level 1

al Ribbon > Modify panel, select Edit Elevatio



ns to toggle on the Edit Elevations panel, the


Grading Level 1

n select Elevation Editor, as shown in Figure 9



-14.

11. In the Grading Elevation Editor vista,


Figure 9-14

Grading Level 1

as shown in Figure 9-15, you are able to make changes to f



eature line design.


Grading Level 1

13. With the feature still selected and the contextual Ribbon

enabled, select Edit Elevatio



ns in the Modify panel to toggle on the Edit Eleva


Grading Level 1

tions panel, then select Insert Elevation Point, as s



hown in Figure 9-16. If the contextual Ribbon is no


Grading Level 1

t enabled for the feature line, you will have to re



select the feature line in Model Space.


lets Elevatic PointEdit

Elevations

Feature Line

j) Add to Surface as 3reskl;ne

Aopiy Feature Line K'anesE evatio1

Apply Feature Line Styles Editor

Output Manage Vault Express Took

Grading Level 1

Figure 9-16

14. When prompted for a point, type D <Enter> at th



e Command Line (for Distance).

15. As you will be gra


Grading Level 1

ding down at a 1:1 slope for 4m [13'] from elevat



ion 61.3 to 57.3, type 4m [13'] <Enter> at the Co


Grading Level 1

mmand Line for the Distance value. Type 57.3m [1



88.0'] <Enter> for the Elevation value.

16. Press <Enter> to exit and


Grading Level 1

complete the command.

17. If you did not close the Grading Elevatio



n Editor vista, you will see the new station, as sh


Grading Level 1

own in Figure 9-17. To reactivate the vista if is



not visible, in the contextual Ribbon > Modify pa


Grading Level 1

nel, select Edit Elevations to toggle on the Edit E



levations panel, then select Elevation Editor.


Grading Level 1

Station Elevation Length Grade Ahead

Grade Back

A 4.nnnm -mn.nn%

&0+004.00 57.300

m20.647m

0.00% 0.00%

T 0+024.<j5

IV. 300m

52.345m

-3.44% i.44%

A 0+076.99 55.500m

44.224m

-1.13% 1.13%

A 0+121.22 55.000m

48.021m

0.00% 0.00%

A 0+169.24 55.000m

10.90Sm

0.00% 0.00%

0+180.15 55.000m

60.325m

-8.03% 8.03%

0+240.47 50.153m



Length

201.100 13.000'

188.000' 67.863'

188.000' 171.735 1

182.000' 145.091'

Figure 9-17

1 ^ Q X m tf $ £1 1.000m <+> t *t u +

ho +.o +t


Task 3 - Create a feature line from Corridor.

The grades at the south end of th


Grading Level 1

e pond are controlled by Jeffries Ranch Rd. In



this task you will extract a feature from the c


Grading Level 1

orridor to establish the elevation of the sout



h property line.

1. Continue working with the draw


Grading Level 1

ing from the previous task.or open GRD1-A3-Grad



ing.dwg.

2. In the View tab > Views panel, select


Grading Level 1

the preset view C3D-Grading-Feature3, as shown



in Figure 9-18.

Home Insert Annotate Modify Analyze

View

P

reviou

s

View

12 \a-

ned

Views

& H

L5L2

Figure 9-18

3. In Mode


Pan

Ortit

Exte

nts *

Navigate

lit • ""'lop...............................» (2-

TopJ 2ottorr,

Views

Grading Level 1

l Space, select the Jeffries Ranch Rd corridor object, right-c



lick, and select Display Order > Bring to Front.

4. In Model Spac


Grading Level 1

e, select the Jeffries Ranch Rd corridor object again and i



n the contextual Ribbon > Launch Pad panel, select Feat


Grading Level 1

ure Lines from Corridor, as shown in Figure 9-19.

[

CfxtolCr


Superelevation

%Visibility Checic

Analyze


Figure 9-19

Depending on the sequence of selection of the


Grading Level 1

corridor objects, AutoCAD Civil 3D software might



first prompt you for the feature line followed by t


Grading Level 1

he Create Feature Line from Corridor dialog box



. Or, it might reverse the order and provide you wi


Grading Level 1

th the dialog box followed by the selection of t



he feature line. In either case, Steps 6 and 7 are


Grading Level 1

required, but not necessarily in that order.



6. When prompted to select the corridor feature line, select the north property (green or magenta) line, as shown in Figure 9-20.

In the Create Feature Line from Corridor dialog box, select Site 1 in the Site drop-down list and clear the Create dynamic link to the corridor option, as shown in Figure 9-21. Accept the

remaining defaults and click dialog box.

jfc. Create Feature Line from Corridor

Site:

Sie 1

□ Name

Feature <[Next Counter{CP)]>

El Style

^ Basic Feature Line

Layer o C-TOPO-FEAT Use current layer

|Vj Smoothing

Horizontal deviation: 0.100Arc inclusion distance:

0.100

□ Create dynamic link to the corridor

OK | | Cancel


"i-.-.o rn a- r«' 1 *. ...........

feature line is created from <P2>North PropertyFigure 9-20

7.

OK to accept and close the

1)

Weeting

distance:

10.000Help j

iL,

Grading Level 1

Figure 9-21



8. You will see a message at the Command Line that a feature line from <P2> has been created. Press <Enter> to exit the selection command

9. In Model Space, select the newly created feature line, as shown in Figure 9-22. In the contextual Ribbon > Modify panel, select Edit Geometry, and then in the Edit Geometry panel, select the Trim command.

Figure 9-22

10. When prompted to select the cutting edge, select the east and west property

lines of the pond and press <Enter> when done.

11. When prompted to select the object to trim, select the feature line at a point outside of the pond property lines, west of the west cutting edge and east of the east cutting edge, as shown in Figure 9-23. Press <Enter> when done and press <Esc> to exit the feature object selection.


.

.4

■ «

•T '

1 r.....*.....?-:':.....l>*

n----------------------------------

"7

Feature L"-»e

lai to Surticc as Ercai. ..-ie V* Mature Line Names ^PO'i feature joe

>.iert PJ Delete P!

btmaTasli

Output Mwy

Itttwt l»»e Properties

Madrfy ■

East cutting

itedge

w~

West cutting

edge

Grading Level 1

\ Trim pt Figure 9-23

A feature line based on the corridor road design has now been created.




13. To join the three feature lines you created, select the feature line at the west side of the pond (in Model Space).

14. In the contextual Ribbon > Modify panel, select Edit Geometry to toggle on the Edit Geometry panel, then select the Join command, as shown in Figure 9-24.

15. When prompted, select the feature line to the south and select the feature line to the east. Press <Enter> to end the command and press <Esc> to exit the feature line selection. If the feature line fails to join any lines in this process, some grip editing might be required where lines do not intersect completely.



Figure 9-24

Grading Level 1

Pond Grading Part II - Feature Line (Create base line) - Optional

In this practice, you will establish a base feature line that will be used to grade the pond (as you are not able to create a mixed grading object). The design criteria required for our pond is as shown in the cross-section in Figure 9-25.

Each side of the pond requires different grading criteria:

At the South end of the pond site is Jeffries Ranch Rd, which is designed at an elevation of 60m [197']. The road is elevated at an average of 6m [20'] above the adjacent parcels. As a result, you will use a 1:1 grade from the road so that you can drop to a workable pond base elevation of 55m. [180']

At the North end, you designed a maintenance access road that is elevated 1m above the Permanent Water Level (PWL).

At the time of publication of this material (June 2011), AutoCAD Civil 3D software was unable to use stacked grading based on different stations.

To grade the pond as shown in the cross-section, you must establish a base feature line to which a common grading criteria can be applied. This involves the following:


Practice 9b

HWL 50.00 f1801 PWL 49.00 [160]____________________

Road 60.0 [1971

55 00 [180']

Bottom 45.00

Maintenance elev 50 00

Figure 9-25


• Creating a base feature line to the South (1:1 to elev 55.00m).

• Creating a base feature line to the North (3:1 to elev 50.00m).

• Joining the trimmed east and west feature lines to the north and south control feature lines.

• Grading the pond based on this new combined feature line.


Grading Level 1

Task 1 - Establish control feature lines (south end).

1. Open GRD1-B1-Grading.dwg from one of the following folders:

Metric:


Imperial:


2. To data reference designs, you must first ensure that data shortcut paths have been set to one of the following folders:

Metric:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-M Imperial:C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-l If this has not already been done, you will have to set the working folder to point to the data shortcuts. For the procedure on how to set the data shortcut folder, refer to Appendix A.2.


4. In the Home tab > Create Design panel, select Grading > Grading Creation Tools, as shown in Figure 9-26.

Insert Annotate Modify Analyze View Output

Palettes - Crea:e Ground Data J

i Toolspace

Q.

In the Grading Creation Tools toolbar, click

^J (Set the Grading Group). Accept the default Site 1 for the site and click

I, as shown in Figure 9-27.


Home

Toolspace

gQ % Import Survey Data Q Parcel - WTOl #

Points -

0 S & Surfaces •

[_/\ Create Grading Infill

Figure 9-26

i Align rre

Feature Line - Vf Profile -

Grading * co-

3Grading Creation Tools

5.

OK


iing Creation Tools [62>]jO 0 Grade to Bevation

ip:

Figure 9-27You will create a temporary grading object in which you can create pre-design information. In the Create Grading Group dialog box, enter Temp as the name, as shown in Figure 9-28.Accept all the other defaults and click

Establish a feature line with a 1:1 slope to an elevation of 55 [180']. In the Grading Creation Tools toolbar, set the

criteria to


t Site

I

Site!

OK

Cancel

Grading Creation Tools \ >y\ § N£3b|

£>] O & QjQ^. Grade to Bevation QQ [CiGroup: Temp Surface Existing-Site

Figure 9-29

V Create Grading Group Is^ai

IKJ

Description:

I □ Automatic su-face creation

j Use ike Group 'iame

Contours lm and 5m {Desfl -

leftHxm sp*anp.i 10.030m

■ . ..r-^---: -'. --'uj^.1 s.oeoo (a)vaJume base swface

£> BosHns-SHe •1 ffl

f OK J Cancel Hdp 1

11 '1 i AFigure 9-28

Grading Level 1

8. When prompted to select a feature, select the green pondboundary feature line that defines the perimeter pond site. When prompted to weed the feature line, select Continue grading without feature line weeding, as shown in Figure 9-30.

Grading - Weed Feature Line

You are attempting to grade from a feature line which should be weeded. What do you want to do?

v Weed the feature lineThe feature line weeding options will be presented.

Continue grading without feature line weedingis net recommended to grade from a feature line that has not beenweeded.

Cancel

Figure 9-30

9. When prompted for the side to grade, select a point inside of the pond. Enter No when prompted to Apply to the entire length.

10. When prompted for the start point, select the center of the Yellow circle located on the west feature line and press <Enter> to accept the station.

11. When prompted for the end point or length, select the center of the Yellow circle located on the south feature line and press <Enter> to accept the station.

12. When prompted for the elevation, type 55.00m [180'] and press <Enter>.

13. When prompted for cut format, type Slope <Enter> followed by 1 <Enter> to indicate a cut slope of 1:1.

14. When prompted for the fill format, enter Slope <Enter> followed by 1 <Enter> to indicate a fill slope of 1:1.



15. This defines the 1:1 slope from the road, as shown in Figure 9-31.

i 1:1 Toe of slope

V1

1 \•

a , h j v ] i

Figure 9-31

16. Next you need to determine where the 3:1 slope from the parcels to the east will intersect the 1:1 slope of the pond. At any time, If you accidently exited out of the Grading command, you simply need to select the Create Grading command (Step 7).

17. When prompted to select a feature line, select the pond boundary feature line, the green line that defines the outer perimeter of the pond site.

18. When prompted for the grading side, select a point inside of the pond. Enter No if prompted to Apply to the entire length.

19. When prompted for the start point, select the center of the southern most cyan circle located on the east feature line and press <Enter> to accept the station.

20. When prompted for the end point or length, select the center of the northern most cyan circle located on the east feature line and press <Enter> to accept the station.

21. When prompted for the elevation, type 50 [165']<Enter>.

22. When prompted for cut format, type Slope <Enter> followed by 3 <Enter> for a cut slope of 3:1.

23. When prompted for the fill format, type Slope <Enter> followed by 3 <Enter> for a fill slope of 3:1.

24. This establishes the toe of slope where 1:1 slope intersects the 3:1 slope. Press <Esc> to end the feature line selection and click on the X in the Grading Creation Tools toolbar to close the dialog box.


Grading Level 1




26. In order to use the toe of slope for further grading, the feature line that represents the toe of slope must be extracted from the grading object. In Model Space, select the toe of slope feature line, right-click, and select Move to Site..., as shown in Figure 9-32.

27. In the Move to Site dialog box, select Storm Pond in theDestination site drop-down list, as shown in Figure 9-33, and

click

t Move to Site

B 1 Site 1-{7: Feature Une(s): 1

Figure 9-33

28. By moving the feature line to a different site, the grading object is deleted, leaving just the toe of slope.

29. In Model Space, select the feature line and in the contextual Ribbon > Modify panel, select Feature Line Properties, as shown in Figure 9-34.

Figure 9-34


Figure 9-32

ex

Selected objects:

•S Home Insert Annotate Modify

0 Properties

Q. Obiect Viewer Add Acc Renumber j Labels' Tables' Taas i % isolate Objects

£$> Add to Surface as 8reak' : ne

^ Aoply Feature Line Karnes

Eievatio^ Aoply Feature Line Styles Editor

Modify

| Feature Line

n □Labels & Tables General Tools

Grading Level 1

30. In the Feature Line Properties dialog box, select the Name option and enter Toe of slope in the field, as shown in

OKFigure 9-35. Click


V Feature Line Properties: Storm Pond !_____H!___^

jstatistics ]

U Name

Toe of slope

Figure 9-35

In Model Space, select the toe of slope feature line. In the contextual Ribbon > Modify panel, select Edit Elevations, and then in the Edit Elevations panel, select Elevation Editor, as shown in Figure 9-36.

In the Grading Elevation Editor vista, the elevation shown for station 0+085.33 [2+84.74] is 52.50m [172.50'], as shown in Figure 9-37. The correct elevation is 55.00m

[180'] so will have to be changed.

A 2+34.32 180.000'

14.960'

-0.00% 0A 2+49.28 180.00

0'25.001'

0.00% <

A 2+74.28 _Dt}®M

10.454'

-0.00% 0

A 2+84.74 <

jiS'K'I' ft >

48.266'

-31.08% 3

A 3+33.01 f i e s^ c

w


Information

31.

32.

Analyze View

Output

Manage

j^EJjJ^SJBJj^JJ Feature line: Toe slope ^QQjjm

VFeature lew Properties

Edit 1 GeometiJ

WEdit Elevations

^ Add to Surface as BreaMme J J. Jjfe^ Aopiy Feature Line .Names ^ ^ ^ SJ Insert PI Delete P!ft? Appiy Feature Line Styles ^ £

Elevati

on

EditorL i

iser. Ei Pot

» Edit Geometry

Figure 9-36


Figure 9-37

33. Click in the elevation cell for station 0+085.33 [2+84.74] and change it to 55.00m [180'].

34. To join the toe of slope feature line to the east pond boundary, select the toe of slope feature line and select the east feature line to display all the grips.


Grading Level 1

35. Select the last grip on the toe of slope feature line and drag it to the intermediate point on the east feature line, as shown in Figure 9-38.

36. You have now defined the south pond feature line. Close the Grading Elevation Editor vista by clicking X.


Task 2 - Establish control feature lines (North End).

In this task you will define the north pond feature line by determining the location of the Pond maintenance access road, based on a 3:1 grade from the existing boundary.

1. Continue working with the drawing from the previous task or open GRD1-B2-Grading.dwg.


3. In the Home tab > Create Design panel, select Grading > Grading Creation Tools.

4. In the Grading Creation Tools dialog box, set the Grading Group name to Temp (if not already set) and ensure the grading criteria is Grade to Elevation.

a5. Click ^ , as shown in Figure 9-39, and select the

Pond boundary feature line, the green line


Figure 9-38


that represents the perimeter of the pond site.

6. When prompted to weed the feature line, select Continue grading without feature line weeding.

7. When prompted for the side to grade, select a point inside of the pond. Enter No when prompted to Apply to the entire length.

8. When prompted for the start point, select the center of the magenta circle located on the northeast corner of the feature line and press <Enter> to accept the station.

9. When prompted for the end point or length, select the center of the magenta circle located on the northern part of the west feature line and press <Enter> to accept the station.

10. When prompted for the elevation, type 50.00 [165.0']<Enter>.

11. When prompted for cut format, type Slope <Enter> followed by 3 <Enter> for a cut slope of 3:1.

12. When prompted for the fill format, type Slope <Enter> followed by 3 <Enter> for a fill slope of 3:1.

13. Press <Esc> to exit the feature line selection. Click on the X in the Grading Creation Tools toolbar to close the dialog box.

14. This grading object defines a 3:1 slope from the existing boundary and establishes the approximate location of the maintenance road. To save time, the access road has already been designed, as shown in Figure 9-40. To view the access road, in the View Tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Grading-MaintenanceRoad. You may have to type Regen at the Command Line to refresh the screen.


Grading Creation Tools

Figure 9-39

Grading Level 1

15. Based on the 3:1 cut and fill slope to an elevation of 50.00m, [164.4'] you now have a feature line representing the access road. This access road will have a maximum side slope of 3:1 to existing ground on the north side of the road. On the south side of the road, you will continue to grade based on the design criteria for the pond.

16. You no longer require the grading 3:1 maximum slope, so you can erase it. In Model Space, select the grading object and select the AutoCAD Erase command.


Task 3 - Create the pond outside rim feature line.

Continue working with the drawing from the previous task or open GRD1-B3-Grading.dwg.

In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Grading-Pond.

In the Prospector tab, expand the Sites > Storm Pond collection. Select Feature lines and note the grid view usually at the bottom of the pane. This list displays the names of the feature lines, style, layer, and 2D length.

Select the feature lines, Toe of slope from the list, right-click, and select Select, as shown in Figure 9-41. AutoCAD Civil 3D software will highlight the appropriate feature line.


Figure 9-40



j 6 ® Sites \\ \

| [ f ® Sitel Properties-

i S Storm Pond Apply Feature Line Names- fEB""I3 Aliqnments Apply Feature Line Styles-

Si-JPfeatureLines J I-

[S>J Gradijg Groups ' SI

Parc/s V Catchmen*

Remove Dynamic Links...

\I

Raise/Lower...

Add to Surface as Breakline... r!

Name / Style Move to Site-

Copy to Site...

i

♦>|Pond-Bdy-North f Pond Contr B

Pond-Bdy-South / Pond Contr Pond-Bdy-

West / Pond CorjJ*i

^SelecT"^^^ > • _ ri _______ . : ___

Pond Access RoiJjp' Pon^ontr " Line Shading

f 1 -1J Ii 1

—

Pond Access. Road North ^nd Contr Copy value to clipboard —Toe of Siooe Copy to clipboard

Figure 9-41

Grading Level 1

5. In the contextual Ribbon > Modify panel, select Feature Line Properties, as shown in Figure 9-^42.

Home Insert Annotate Modify Analyze View Output Manage Vault Express Tools

Feature line; Acd to Su- face as Sreai; r.e || L| ^p/ Aooly Feature une Names

E:evatioApply Feature une Styles Editor

Labels Tables Tag:

Labels & Tables

Figure 9-42

6. In the Feature Line Properties dialog box, change the Alame from Toe of slope to Pond-Bdy-Control and set

the Style to Pond Control Feature Line, as shown in Figure 9^43. Click


V Feature Line Properties: Storm Pond

Information jStatistics

| IV Name

£ Pond-Bdy-Control^^MMHNMM^

g Style

^ Pond Control Feature Lme

Figure 9-43

7. To join all feature lines, first select the feature linePond-Bdy-Control. In the contextual Ribbon > Modify panel, select Edit Geometry, and then in the Edit Geometry panel, click

t, as shown in Figure 9-^4.


Genera1 Tools » Modify ■

OK

© S3

n nLd UDjec: v iewer

Add Ada Renumber-jfl isolate Objects

raEdit

Eievatt

ons

knalyze View Output

Manage Feature Line: Pond Bdy-Control 1

V Ifeature Line

1 Properties \

fa]

Edit

mI Edit Elevations

Add to Sirface as break ns

Apply Feature Line Karnes

^ Apply Feature Line Styles

; » j j Insert PI Delete PI

Modify

w Edit Geometry

Figure 9-44


8. When prompted to select the connecting feature lines, select the feature line Pond-Bdy-East (2), Pond-Bdy-North (3), and Pond-Bdy-West (4), as shown in Figure 9-45.

9. Press <Esc> to exit the feature line selection.

10. In the grid view list of feature lines, note that only four feature lines now exist, as shown in Figure 9-46.


Practice 9c Pond Grading Part III - Grading

Object (Grading the Proposed


Name Style Layer

^J Pond Access Rd-N

Corridor Lane Break

A-Pond-MaintenanceRoa

yj Pond-Bdy-North Pond Control Featur<

A-Pond-FeatureLine

VlPond Bdy-Control Pond Control Featurf

C-TOPO-FEAT

.j>jPond Bry-South Pond Control Featurs

A-Pond-FeatureLine

Figure 9-46

Grading Level 1

Pond)In this practice you will create a stormwater detention pond withfeature lines and grading tools. Now that a common base of controlfeature lines have been established, you can continue to grade thestorm pond.

In the previous practice, the following control feature lines werecreated:

• A feature line defining the existing conditions along the entire pond

site boundary.• A feature line defining the Access road at the North end.• A feature line defining the toe of 1:1 slope at the South end.• To save time, the east and west feature lines have already been

created. These two feature lines were created by copying thefeature line from step 1 above, and were trimmed at the tie inpoints of the feature lines from steps 2 and 3.

In this practice you will join these feature lines, creating a base featureline, which will enable you to use the grading tools to grade the pond.

Task 1 - Create pond grading.

With the pond boundary established, the rest of the pond can now begraded to the criteria set out in the cross-section.

1. Open GRD1-C1-Grading.dwg from one of the following folders:

Metric:


Imperial:




2. To data reference designs, you must first ensure that data

shortcut paths have been set to one of the following folders:Metric:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-M

Imperial:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-l


Grading Level 1

If this has not already been done, you will have to set the working folder to point to the data shortcuts. For the procedure on how to set the data shortcut folder, refer to Appendix A.2.

3. In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Grading-Pond Control.

4. In the Home tab > Create Design panel, select Grading > Grading Creation Tools, as shown in Figure 9-47.

5. In the Grading Creation Tools toolbar, click Figure

9^8.


E Q [ % [ Q Irroort Survey Data Q P;(j :arcel * Aiignme

%} Feature Line - V° Profile *

0 Grading -1 ^ Csrrdor

Figure 9-47

[O]

as shown in

Figure 9-48


In the Select Grading Group dialog box, set the Site name to Storm Pond, as shown on the left in Figure 9-49. To create a

new group, click & (Create a Grading Group). In the Create Grading Group dialog box, enter Pond for the name and select the Automatic surface creation option, as shown on the right.


52 t. Create Grading Group

PLPond >wii —Description:

. J ^ptomabc surface creation [Vj Use the Group Name Surface style:

l^gj Contois 1m and 5m {Desio

Tesseiabon spadng: 10.000m

Tesseiabon angle: 3.0000 (d)

J Volume base surface £) Easbng-Ste

Cancel

Figure 9-49

In the Create Surface dialog box, accept the defaults and click

OK

OK

In the Select Grading Group dialog box, click the dialog box.

You now have the new grading group Pond in the site Storm Pond. You can proceed to grade the pond. In the Grading Creation Tools toolbar, set the grading criteria to Grade to

Elevation and click & (Create a Grading Group), as shown in Figure 9-50. The first step is to grade to the Permanent water level of 49.00 [160.76] at a slope of 3:1.


; Grade to Bevation

Surface Existing-Site


OK

Click

m

Select Grading Group

Help

to close8

.

9

.

Group: Pond

Grading Level 1

Figure 9-50



10. When prompted to select the feature line, select the Pond-Bry-Control feature line. This feature line defines the inside rim of the pond.

11. When prompted to weed feature line select Continue grading without weeding.

12. When prompted to select the side to grade, select the inside of the pond. Enter Yes when prompted to Apply to entire length.

13. Enter 49.00 [160.76] for the elevation.

14. When prompted for the Cut format, type Slope <Enter> and then type 3 <Enter> for the slope value to signify a 3:1 slope.

15. When prompted for the Fill format, type Slope <Enter> and then type 3 <Enter> for the slope value to signify a 3:1 slope.

16. You now need to grade to the bottom of the pond, which is 4m [13'] deep at a slope of 2:1.

17. In the Grading Creation Tools toolbar, change the criteria to Grade to Relative Elevation, as shown in Figure 9-51.

Grading Creation Tool 6->] O 0 ^M «■>» Grade to Relative Bevation Group: Pond

Figure 9- 51

18. When prompted to select the feature line, select the inside of pond feature line created by the last grading object, as shown in Figure 9-52. Enter Yes when prompted to Apply to entire length.


)Surface Existing-Site

Figure 9-52

Grading Level 1

19. If prompted to select the side to grade, select the inside of the pond.

20. When prompted for the relative elevation, type 4 [13]<Enter>.



21. When prompted for the format, type Slope <Enter> and then type 2 <Enter> for the slope value to signify a 2:1 slope.

22. In the Grading Creation Tools toolbar, click the drop-down arrow

next to L (Create a Grading Group) and select Create Infill, as shown in Figure 9-53. When prompted to select an area to infill, select the center of the pond, and press <Esc> to exit the command.

23. To view the pond grading in 3D, select the surface in Model Space, right-click, and select Object Viewer. Looking at the model or at the contours, notice that there is an error. The 2:1 slope that is supposed to project down to the bottom of the pond was mistakenly projected up. In step 19, a negative value should have been entered to indicate the slope projection as downwards (i.e., -4 [-13]instead of +4 [13]).

Close the Object Viewer by


Ooject Viewer

[standard

Figure 9-54

. ..... - lOQtgRfjffii top


Jl-i 0 0 Cv Grade to Reiawe Bevation Group:

Pond

i Q " O O

Surface: Ex Q Create Grading✓

Copy Create

Grading

Creat^fransiiion .Cr

eate Infill.Figure 9-53

Grading Level 1

clicking on the X in the right top corner of the dialog box, as shown in Figure 9-54.



24. In the Modify tab > Design panel, select Grading to display the contextual Grading tab, as shown in Figure 9-55.

£3 Home Insert Annotate

cjg|V5 ^ Survey f^j Parcel Alignment Intersection

|f> Surface J Feature Line V Profile Assembly

© Point Cloud

f[_) Grading J f§j| Corndor ^'P® Network Ground Data j

Design »

Figure 9-55

25. In the Grading tab > Modify panel, select Grading Editor, as shown in Figure 9-56.

26. When prompted to select a point in the grading or site, select a

point in the second grading object (the 2:1 slope closest to the pond

bottom), as shown in Figure 9-57. M^uiliiffiiiiWmF^mlu \

Figure 9-57


Modify

Analyze View Output

f JBS ----- Home Insert

Annotate

Modify Analyze View Output Manage Vault Express

B Properties Q

Object Viewer

Isolate Objects

jjQ 63k1 Change Group Grading Editor^ & Create Gradinc infill C^ Edit GradinaGrading Grading GroupProperties" Properties £jk Delete Grading

1 oGradin

c

Volum

e TcGeneral Tools * Modify - Grad:n

g T:

Figure 9-56

i w) ,„iS/ -/ /

tmm^ i JU

Grading Level 1

27. In the Grading Editor vista, under Grading Method,

change the Relative Elevation to -4m [-13'], as shown in Figure 9-58.

0 m

Criteria: | Grade to Relative Elevation

Parameter Value

9 Grading Method

Q Tjrcet ^ ystion

Relative Ele/ation -4.000m

Projection

Parameter

B Grading Method® Target

Relative Elevation

(?) Projection

Figure 9-58


x

Criteria: | Grade to Relative Bevation

0 Q

Value

Relative]Elevati o

n -13.000' I Siope


28. Close the Grading Editor vista by clicking on the X in the top right corner of the dialog box.


Task 2 - Supplement the surface with feature lines.


• fcj Subassemblies Move to Site...' Intersections Copy to Site-

* Ltne Shading

Copy value to clipboard Copy

to clipboard

Figure 9-59

Name

Styks

Pond Control Feat>

m&m

4. Once selected, the feature lines can be added to the surface as breaklines.

Grading Level 1

5. In the Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces > Pond > Definition collections for the point, and select Breaklines. Right-click and select Add, as shown in Figure 9-60.

E- Q Surfaces j .+.

Existing-

Site

| B £} Pond

Masks Watersheds S & Definition

A' Boundaries

6. In the Add Breaklines dialog box, accept all the defaults and click

I OK j

7. You now have a pond surface that matches the proposed design of the parcels on the east side and Jeffries Ranch Road on the south side. The north and west sides of the pond have been graded to match the existing ground.



fa Drawing Objects

Figure 9-60


Review Questions

What does the combination of feature lines and their grading solutions do?

How do you raise or lower feature line vertices?

What is the function of a grading group?t) Q Open Drawings S D Drawingl

Points [■$•] Point Groups © Point Clouds C) Surfaces IT ID Alignments Si Sites Q Catchments

O Open Drawings B-Q INTRO-Introduction

1. If necessary, start AutoCAD Civil 3D application byFigure 2-3

The right-of-way (ROW) parcel is related to the alignment and parcels. This special parcel represents land that is owned, maintained, and used for the community by a regulatory body (usually the local municipality). Typically, the ROW contains the road, sidewalks, and utilities. The contents of the ROW depend on the covenants or agreements made before the site is developed. For example, in some cases the sidewalks and utilities might be located in an easement outside of the road ROW

B T6Survey Databases ^

i Survey Data tfes**

;• [®] Network Groups j B Figures !-- [&] Figure Groups Survey Points [EH Survey

Point Groups H Surveyl Data B1 -0* 32'div iron Pin 1 -0*32'51.: Iron Pin l -0* 32'53.1 Iron Pin 1-0' 32* 54.r Iron Pin 1 -0" 32*55.: IronPin 10'32'55.1 iron Pin

IXSurface Properties - ExTopo |

Infonruton Definition |*n»«B j Statistics |

Ofintrcn OoOons* Data operation*♦ Edit operations


Question 1

Question 2

Question 3

Grading Level 1

In this task, you set up a new working folder as the location to store Data Shortcut projects. The default working folder for Data Shortcut projects is C:\Civil 3D Projects.2. In the Manage tab > Data Shortcuts panel, select Set Working

Folder. In the Browse For Folder dialog box, in C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-DataSharing, select Training

Figure 6-174. If you receive a message that the drawing has not yet been

13. Save the drawing, but do not close it.12. Complete this step only if the drawing DAT1-DataSharing.dwg was not previously opened. Open DAT1-

DataSharing.dwg.10. You might also want to add an XREF to the source drawing if you

want to show additional AutoCAD linework in the downstream drawing.

9. In Model Space, select the Ascent PI referenced alignment. Notice that there are no grips. You are not able to geographically redefine this alignment. However, you can add labels in the contextual Ribbon.

The north boundary of the site is defined by Mission Avenue and the west boundary is defined by an existing subdivision. To establish a design control line for the north and west perimeters of the site, you will create a feature line that extracts elevations from the existing surface.2. To data reference designs, you must first ensure that data

shortcut paths have been set to one of the following folders:

Metric:

C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-M

Imperial:C:\Civil 3D Projects\Civil3D-training-S If this has not already been done, you will have to set the working folder to point to the data shortcuts. For the procedure on how to set the data shortcut folder, refer to Appendix A.2

3. In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view C3D-Grading-Feature1. You should see a red polyline that runs along the north and west property lines; you may have to type Regen at the Command Line to regenerate the graphics.

Add feature lines to represent critical grade breaks and other important elevation breaklines on the surface. These lines will accentuate the



geometry and make the surface more accurate. In this task you will add feature lines at the north and south ends of the site.2. In the View tab > Views panel, select the preset view

C3D-Grading-Pond3. In the Prospector tab, expand the Sites collection, expand the site

Storm Pond collection, and select Feature Lines. In the grid view at the bottom, select the three feature lines Pond-Bdy-North, Pond-Bdy-South, and Pond-Access Rd-North using the <Ctrl> key. Right-click and select Select, as shown in Figure 9-59.


curso civil uca

Documents

cacivil 3d

civil 3d projectscivil3d

civil 3d projects

autocad civil

civil 3d content

civil 3d workspace

civil 3d templates

preset view